US20080210748A1 - Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and responding - Google Patents
Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and respondingDownload PDFInfo
- Publication number
- US20080210748A1 US20080210748A1US11/900,649US90064907AUS2008210748A1US 20080210748 A1US20080210748 A1US 20080210748A1US 90064907 AUS90064907 AUS 90064907AUS 2008210748 A1US2008210748 A1US 2008210748A1
- Authority
- US
- United States
- Prior art keywords
- agents
- individual
- samples
- pathogens
- units
- Prior art date
- Legal status (The legal status is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the status listed.)
- Abandoned
Links
Images
Classifications
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N35/00—Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
- G01N35/00029—Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor provided with flat sample substrates, e.g. slides
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
- G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
- G01N33/5302—Apparatus specially adapted for immunological test procedures
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
- G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
- G01N33/543—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals
- G01N33/54313—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor with an insoluble carrier for immobilising immunochemicals the carrier being characterised by its particulate form
- G01N33/54326—Magnetic particles
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N33/00—Investigating or analysing materials by specific methods not covered by groups G01N1/00 - G01N31/00
- G01N33/48—Biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Haemocytometers
- G01N33/50—Chemical analysis of biological material, e.g. blood, urine; Testing involving biospecific ligand binding methods; Immunological testing
- G01N33/53—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor
- G01N33/569—Immunoassay; Biospecific binding assay; Materials therefor for microorganisms, e.g. protozoa, bacteria, viruses
- G—PHYSICS
- G06—COMPUTING OR CALCULATING; COUNTING
- G06F—ELECTRIC DIGITAL DATA PROCESSING
- G06F21/00—Security arrangements for protecting computers, components thereof, programs or data against unauthorised activity
- G06F21/60—Protecting data
- G06F21/62—Protecting access to data via a platform, e.g. using keys or access control rules
- G06F21/6218—Protecting access to data via a platform, e.g. using keys or access control rules to a system of files or objects, e.g. local or distributed file system or database
- G06F21/6245—Protecting personal data, e.g. for financial or medical purposes
- G—PHYSICS
- G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
- G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
- G16H10/00—ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of patient-related medical or healthcare data
- G16H10/40—ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of patient-related medical or healthcare data for data related to laboratory analysis, e.g. patient specimen analysis
- G—PHYSICS
- G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
- G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
- G16H70/00—ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of medical references
- G16H70/60—ICT specially adapted for the handling or processing of medical references relating to pathologies
- B—PERFORMING OPERATIONS; TRANSPORTING
- B01—PHYSICAL OR CHEMICAL PROCESSES OR APPARATUS IN GENERAL
- B01L—CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL LABORATORY APPARATUS FOR GENERAL USE
- B01L3/00—Containers or dishes for laboratory use, e.g. laboratory glassware; Droppers
- B01L3/50—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes
- B01L3/502—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures
- B01L3/5027—Containers for the purpose of retaining a material to be analysed, e.g. test tubes with fluid transport, e.g. in multi-compartment structures by integrated microfluidic structures, i.e. dimensions of channels and chambers are such that surface tension forces are important, e.g. lab-on-a-chip
- G—PHYSICS
- G01—MEASURING; TESTING
- G01N—INVESTIGATING OR ANALYSING MATERIALS BY DETERMINING THEIR CHEMICAL OR PHYSICAL PROPERTIES
- G01N35/00—Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor
- G01N35/00029—Automatic analysis not limited to methods or materials provided for in any single one of groups G01N1/00 - G01N33/00; Handling materials therefor provided with flat sample substrates, e.g. slides
- G01N2035/00099—Characterised by type of test elements
- G01N2035/00158—Elements containing microarrays, i.e. "biochip"
- G—PHYSICS
- G16—INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR SPECIFIC APPLICATION FIELDS
- G16H—HEALTHCARE INFORMATICS, i.e. INFORMATION AND COMMUNICATION TECHNOLOGY [ICT] SPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR THE HANDLING OR PROCESSING OF MEDICAL OR HEALTHCARE DATA
- G16H20/00—ICT specially adapted for therapies or health-improving plans, e.g. for handling prescriptions, for steering therapy or for monitoring patient compliance
- G16H20/10—ICT specially adapted for therapies or health-improving plans, e.g. for handling prescriptions, for steering therapy or for monitoring patient compliance relating to drugs or medications, e.g. for ensuring correct administration to patients
- Y—GENERAL TAGGING OF NEW TECHNOLOGICAL DEVELOPMENTS; GENERAL TAGGING OF CROSS-SECTIONAL TECHNOLOGIES SPANNING OVER SEVERAL SECTIONS OF THE IPC; TECHNICAL SUBJECTS COVERED BY FORMER USPC CROSS-REFERENCE ART COLLECTIONS [XRACs] AND DIGESTS
- Y02—TECHNOLOGIES OR APPLICATIONS FOR MITIGATION OR ADAPTATION AGAINST CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02A—TECHNOLOGIES FOR ADAPTATION TO CLIMATE CHANGE
- Y02A90/00—Technologies having an indirect contribution to adaptation to climate change
- Y02A90/10—Information and communication technologies [ICT] supporting adaptation to climate change, e.g. for weather forecasting or climate simulation
Definitions
- the present disclosurerelates to methods and systems that may be used for detection of one or more pathogens and determining one or more agents in response to pathogen detection.
- one or more methodsinclude identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- the methodmay optionally include displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- the methodmay optionally include transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more methodsinclude receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents, determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained and processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the methodmay optionally include packaging the one or more agents.
- the methodmay optionally include shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- one or more methodsinclude identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the methodmay optionally include receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- the methodmay optionally include displaying the information associated with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more methodsinclude receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual, receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- the methodmay optionally include displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- the methodmay optionally include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- the methodmay optionally include packaging the one or more agents.
- the methodmay optionally include shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- a systemin some embodiments includes a signal-bearing medium bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and one or more instructions for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- a systemin some embodiments includes a signal-bearing medium bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- a systemin some embodiments includes a signal-bearing medium bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for displaying the information associated with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- a systemin some embodiments includes a signal-bearing medium bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and one or more instructions for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- one or more systemsinclude means for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, means for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and means for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens responsive to the means for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the means for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include means for displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include means for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more systemsinclude means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained and means for processing the information associated with the means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include means for packaging the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include means for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- one or more systemsinclude means for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, means for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and means for transmitting one or more signals responsive to the means for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the means for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include means for receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- the systemmay optionally include means for displaying the information associated with the means for receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more systemsinclude means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual, means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and means for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens responsive to the means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include means for displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include means for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include means for packaging the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include means for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- one or more systemsinclude circuitry for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, circuitry for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, circuitry for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens responsive to the circuitry for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the circuitry for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more systemsinclude circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained and circuitry for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for packaging the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- one or more systemsinclude circuitry for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, circuitry for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, circuitry for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for displaying the information associated with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more systemsinclude circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual, circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and circuitry for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens responsive to the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for packaging the one or more agents.
- the systemmay optionally include circuitry for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- meansinclude but are not limited to circuitry and/or programming for effecting the herein referenced functional aspects; the circuitry and/or programming can be virtually any combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein referenced functional aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.
- circuitry and/or programmingcan be virtually any combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein referenced functional aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.
- other system aspects meansare described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- related systemsinclude but are not limited to circuitry and/or programming for effecting the herein referenced method aspects; the circuitry and/or programming can be virtually any combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.
- circuitry and/or programmingcan be virtually any combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer.
- FIG. 1illustrates an example system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 1Aillustrates an example system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 1Billustrates an example system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 1Cillustrates an example system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 2illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 3illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 4illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 5illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 6illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 7illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 8illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 9illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 10illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 11illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 10 .
- FIG. 12illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 13illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 12 .
- FIG. 14illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 12 .
- FIG. 15illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 16illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 15 .
- FIG. 17illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 15 .
- FIG. 18illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 19illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 18 .
- FIG. 20illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 21illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 22illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 23illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 24illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 25illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 24 .
- FIG. 26illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 27illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 28illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 29illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 30illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 31illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 32illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 33illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 34illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 35illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 36illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 37illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 38illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 37 .
- FIG. 39illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 40illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 39 .
- FIG. 41illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 39 .
- FIG. 42illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.
- FIG. 43illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 42 .
- FIG. 44illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow of FIG. 42 .
- FIG. 45illustrates an example system 4500 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 45Aillustrates an example system 4500 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 45Billustrates an example system 4500 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 46illustrates an example system 4600 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 46Aillustrates an example system 4600 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 46Billustrates an example system 4600 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 47illustrates an example system 4700 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 47Aillustrates an example system 4700 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 47Billustrates an example system 4700 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 48illustrates an example system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 48Aillustrates an example system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 48Billustrates an example system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 48Cillustrates an example system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 48Dillustrates an example system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- FIG. 1illustrates an example system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.
- the system 100is operable to provide a method that may be used to detect and respond to one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104may be processed with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104may be processed with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to analyze one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104 associated with an individual 102may be processed.
- one sample 104 associated with an individual 102may be processed.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be used to process one or more samples 104 .
- one microfluidic chip 108may be used to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be used to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be used to process one sample 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to accept one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include one or more reservoirs.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include one or more reagent inputs.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to operably associate with one or more analysis units 110 . In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more centrifugation units. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more processing units 112 . In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more transmitting units 116 . In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more display units 114 . In some embodiments, one or more analysis units 110 may be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one analysis unit 110may be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be portable analysis units 110 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be non-portable analysis units 110 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be hand-held analysis units 110 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include one or more user interfaces 122 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include one user interface 122 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include one or more user interfaces 122 that are operably associated with the one or more analysis units 110 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include one or more display units 114 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be operably associated with one or more display units 114 .
- one or more display units 114may include one or more user interfaces 122 .
- one or more display units 114may include one user interface 122 .
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more analysis units 110 .
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more display units 114 .
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more user inputs.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may be operably associated with one or more processing units 112 . In some embodiments, one or more transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one or more display units 114 . In some embodiments, one or more transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one or more analysis units 110 . In some embodiments, one or more transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one or more accepting units 118 .
- FIG. 1Aillustrates an example system 100 A in which embodiments may be implemented.
- the system 100 Ais operable to provide a method that may be used during the detection and response to one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more signals 126may be received by one or more receiving units 136 .
- Such signals 126may include numerous types of information.
- such signals 126may include information related to agent information 128 , sample information 130 , individual information 132 , pathogen information 134 , and the like.
- one or more receiving units 136may be operably associated with one or more: processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more processing units 112may process information received by one or more receiving units 136 .
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more display units 114may display information received from one or more receiving units 136 .
- one or more display units 114may display information received from one or more processing units 112 .
- one or more display units 114may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information received from one or more receiving units 136 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information received from one or more processing units 112 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , display units 114 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more user interfaces 122may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 .
- one or more packaging units 138may receive one or more signals 126 from one or more transmitting units 116 .
- one or more packaging units 138may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more shipping units 140may ship one or more packages that include one or more agents 142 .
- one or more shipping units 140may receive one or more signals 126 from one or more transmitting units 116 .
- one or more shipping units 140may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more accepting units 118 .
- FIG. 1Billustrates an example system 100 B in which embodiments may be implemented.
- the system 100 Bis operable to provide a method that may be used to detect and respond to one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104may be processed with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104may be processed with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to analyze one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104 associated with an individual 102may be processed.
- one sample 104 associated with an individual 102may be processed.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be used to process one or more samples 104 .
- one microfluidic chip 108may be used to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be used to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be used to process one sample 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to accept one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include one or more reservoirs.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include one or more reagent inputs.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to operably associate with one or more analysis units 110 . In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more centrifugation units. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more processing units 112 . In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more transmitting units 116 . In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more display units 114 . In some embodiments, one or more analysis units 110 may be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one analysis unit 110may be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be portable analysis units 110 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be non-portable analysis units 110 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be hand-held analysis units 110 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include one or more user interfaces 122 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include one user interface 122 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include one or more user interfaces 122 that are operably associated with the one or more analysis units 110 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include one or more display units 114 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be operably associated with one or more display units 114 .
- one or more display units 114may include one or more user interfaces 122 .
- one or more display units 114may include one user interface 122 .
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more analysis units 110 .
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more display units 114 .
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more user inputs.
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more accepting units 118 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may be operably associated with one or more processing units 112 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may be operably associated with one or more display units 114 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may be operably associated with one or more analysis units 110 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may be operably associated with one or more accepting units 118 .
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 .
- one or more receiving units 136may be operably associated with one or more: processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- FIG. 1Cillustrates an example system 100 C in which embodiments may be implemented.
- the system 100 Cis operable to provide a method that may be used during the detection and response to one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more signals 126may be received by one or more receiving units 136 .
- Such signals 126may include numerous types of information.
- such signals 126may include information related to sample information 130 , individual information 132 , pathogen information 134 , and the like.
- one or more receiving units 136may be operably associated with one or more: processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more processing units 112may process information received by one or more receiving units 136 .
- one or more processing units 112may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more display units 114may display information received from one or more receiving units 136 .
- one or more display units 114may display information received from one or more processing units 112 .
- one or more display units 114may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information received from one or more receiving units 136 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information received from one or more processing units 112 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , display units 114 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more user interfaces 122may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , packaging units 138 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 .
- one or more packaging units 138may receive one or more signals 126 from one or more transmitting units 116 .
- one or more packaging units 138may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , shipping units 140 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more shipping units 140may ship one or more packages that include one or more agents 142 .
- one or more shipping units 140may receive one or more signals 126 from one or more transmitting units 116 .
- one or more shipping units 140may be operably associated with one or more: receiving units 136 , processing units 112 , display units 114 , transmitting units 116 , user interfaces 122 , packaging units 138 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- samples 104may be analyzed through use of system 100 .
- one or more samples 104may be associated with an individual 102 .
- one or more samples 104may be associated with one or more individuals 102 .
- an individual 102may be a human.
- an individual 102may be a group of humans who share a common pathogen infection.
- system 100may be used to diagnose an individual 102 for infection with one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104may include a liquid.
- one or more samples 104may include a solid.
- one or more samples 104may include a vapor.
- one or more samples 104may include a semi-solid. In some embodiments, one or more samples 104 may include a gas. Examples of such samples 104 include, but are not limited to, samples 104 obtained from humans (e.g., skin, breath, tissue, hair, saliva, blood, mucus, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, fecal material, tears, urogenital associated samples), samples 104 that are associated with, but not limited to, one or more toxins, viruses, bacteria, protozoans, single-celled organisms, fungus, algae, prions, microbes, cyst, eggs, pathogenic proteins, or substantially any combination thereof.
- humanse.g., skin, breath, tissue, hair, saliva, blood, mucus, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, fecal material, tears, urogenital associated samples
- samples 104that are associated with, but not limited to, one or more toxins, viruses, bacteria, protozoans, single-celled organisms, fungus, algae, prions, micro
- an agent 142may include a substance that may be used in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease in a human or another animal. Such agents are recognized in the official United States Pharmacopeia, official Homeopathic Pharmacopeia of the United States, official National Formulary or any supplement thereof.
- an agent 142may include a chemical agent 142 .
- an agent 142may be an antibiotic, a steroid, an alcohol deterrent, an analgesic, an anesthetic, an antacid, an antihelmintic, an antiallergic, an antiamebic, an antiarteriosclerotic, an antibacterial, an antibacterial adjuvant, an antiharrheal, an antidiuretic, an antifungal, an antimalarial, an antiprotozoal, an antishphilitic, an antitussive, an antiviral, a chelating agent, a choleretic, a CNS stimulant, a decongestant, an antiseptic, a disinfectant, an expectorant, a glucocorticoid, an HIV fusion inhibitor, an HIV protease inhibitor, an immunomodulator, an immunosuppressant, a protease inhibitor, a pulmonary surfactant, a respiratory stimulant
- agents 142are known and have been described (e.g., Merck Index, Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. (2001); Mosby's Drug Guide, An Imprint of Elsevier, St. Louis, Mo. (2004); The Merck Manual, Seventeenth Edition, Merck Research Laboratories, Whitehouse Station, N.J. (1999); Physician's Desk Reference, 58 th Edition, Thomson Montvale, N.J. (2004)).
- an agent 142may include a mechanical agent 142 .
- mechanical agents 142include, but are not limited to, radiation, ultraviolet light, sonication, phototherapy, and the like.
- an agent 142may include a bioagent.
- a bioagentmay be found in nature.
- an bioagentmay be synthetic.
- a bioagentmay be produced through use of recombinant nucleic acid technology.
- a bioagentmay be assembled in vitro.
- a bioagentmay be a virus and/or bacteriophage against a pathogen that is found in nature.
- a bioagentmay be a virus and/or bacteriophage against a pathogen that is assembled in vitro.
- a bioagentmay be a virus and/or bacteriophage against a pathogen that includes recombinant nucleic acid (e.g., Merrill et al., PNAS (USA), 93:3188 (1996); Brussow, Microbiology, 151:2133-2140 (2005)).
- an agentmay include a recombinant microbe.
- Yersinia, Listeria, Salmonella , and/or Shigellamay be used to deliver recombinant products through the intestinal mucosa.
- an agent 142may provide a synergistic effect with another agent.
- a first agent 142may increase the effectiveness of a second agent 142 .
- a first agent 142may be an antibacterial adjuvant (e.g., a beta-lactamase inhibitor).
- pathogens 106may be processed, analyzed and/or detected through use of system 100 .
- pathogens 106include intact pathogens 106 and components of pathogens 106 .
- pathogens 106may include polynucleotides and/or polypeptides that are associated with a pathogen 106 .
- pathogens 106may include one or more products of a pathogen 106 .
- pathogens 106may include products and/or substrates that are associated with the activity of one or more pathogen associated enzymes.
- pathogens 106that may be processed, analyzed and/or detected through use of system 100 include, but are not limited to, pathogens 106 associated with plants, animals, humans, fish, birds, and the like.
- pathogens 106include, but are not limited to, viruses, bacteria, prions, protozoans, single-celled organisms, algae, eggs of pathogenic organisms, microbes, cysts, molds, fungus, worms, amoeba, pathogenic proteins, or substantially any combination thereof.
- Numerous pathogens 106are known and have been described (e.g., Foodborne Pathogens: Microbiology and Molecular Biology, Caister Academic Press, eds.
- virusesNumerous types of viruses may be identified. Such viruses are known and have been described (e.g., U.S. Patent Appl. No. 20060257852; Field's Virology, Knipe et al, (Fifth Edition) Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, (2006)). Examples of such viruses include, but are not limited to, hepatitis, influenza, avian influenza, severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus (severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS)), human immunodeficiency virus, herpes viruses, human papilloma virus, rhinovirus, rotavirus, West Nile virus, and the like.
- SARSsevere acute respiratory syndrome
- bacteriaexamples include, but are not limited to, Staphylococcus aureus, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcus sp., Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus agalactiae, Streptococcus pyogenes, Enterococcus sp., Bacillus anthracis, Bacillus cereus, Bifidobacterium bifidum, Lactobacillus sp., Listeria monocytogenes, Nocardia sp., Rhodococcus equi, Erysipelothrix rhusiopathiae, Corynebacterium diptheriae, Propionibacterium acnes, Actinomyces sp., Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium difficile, Clostridium perfringens, Clostridium tetani, Mobiluncus sp., Peptostrepto
- prionsNumerous prions may be identified. Examples of such prions include, but are not limited to, bovine prion protein, human prion protein, monkey prion protein, dog prion protein, and the like. The amino acid sequences and/or nucleotide sequences of numerous prions are known and have been reported (e.g., Premzl and Gamulin, BMC Genomics, 8:1 (2007)).
- wormsNumerous pathogenic worms may be identified. Examples of such worms include, but are not limited to, tapeworms, helminths, whipworms, hookworms, ringworms, roundworms, pinworms, ascarids, filarids, and the like.
- the eggs and/or cysts of pathogens 106may be identified.
- eggs and/or cystsinclude, but are not limited to, eggs and/or cysts of: parasitic worms (e.g., Heterodera glycines, Trichinella ), amoebe (e.g., Entamoeba histolytica, Acanthamoeba ), protozoans (e.g., Giardia, cryptosporidium, Toxoplasma ), and the like.
- protozoansinclude, but are not limited to, slime molds, flagellates, ciliates, and the like (e.g., cryptosporidium, giardia, naegleria fowleri, acanthamoeba, entamoeba histolytica, cryptosporidium parvum, cyclospora cayetanensis, isospora belli, microsporidia ) (Marshall et al., Clin, Micro. Rev., 10:67-85 (1997)).
- slime moldse.g., slime molds, flagellates, ciliates, and the like (e.g., cryptosporidium, giardia, naegleria fowleri, acanthamoeba, entamoeba histolytica, cryptosporidium parvum, cyclospora cayetanensis, isospora belli, microsporidia )
- pathogenic fungiexamples include, but are not limited to, dimorphic fungi that may assume a mold form but may also adopt a yeast form, histoplasma capsulatum, coccidioides immitis, candida, aspergillus , and the like.
- Pathogenic algaeinclude, but are not limited to, Prototheca members, Helicosporidiu members, Chattonella members (e.g., Chattonella marina), and the like.
- pathogenic proteinsinclude, but are not limited to, toxins (e.g., exotoxing, endotoxins), prions, and the like.
- microbesmay be prokaryotes.
- microbesmay be eukaryotes. Examples of such microbes include, but are not limited to, Giardia , amoeba (e.g., Entamoeba, Naegleria, Acanthamoeba ), trypanosomes, Plasmodium (e.g., Plasmodium falciparum, Plasmodium vivax, Plasmodium ovale, Plasmodium malariae, Plasmodium knowlesi ), Eimeria, Toxoplasma, Neospora, Mycoplasma, Leishmania, Trichomonas, Cryptosporidium, Isospora, Balantidium , protozoans, Mycoplasma hominis, Ureaplasma urealyticum , and the like.
- Giardiaamoeba (e.g., Entamoeba, Naegleria, Acanthamoeba ), trypanosomes
- a pathogen 106may be a member of numerous groups of pathogens 106 .
- single-celled organismsmay include microbes, protozoans, and the like.
- a pathogen 106may include an artificial device such an electomechanical machine, a nano-machine, a micro-machine, and the like.
- microfluidic chips 108Numerous types of microfluidic chips 108 may be utilized within system 100 . Methods to construct and utilize microfluidic chips 108 have been described (e.g., U.S. Statutory Invention Registration No. H201; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,454,945; 6,818,435; 6,812,458; 6,794,196; 6,709,869; 6,582,987; 6,482,306; 5,726,404; 7,118,910; 7,081,192; herein incorporated by reference).
- a microfluidic chip 108may be configured to utilize microfluidic principles. Accordingly, in some embodiments, a microfluidic chip 108 may be configured to include one or more channels with at least one dimension that is less than 1 millimeter. However, in some embodiments, microfluidic chips 108 may be configured such that they do not utilize microfluidic principles. Accordingly, in some embodiments, microfluidic chips 108 may be configured such that there are not any components that have a dimension that is less than 1 millimeter.
- microfluidic chips 108may be configured that include components having a dimension that is less than 1 millimeter, while in other embodiments, microfluidic chips 108 may be configured with components having dimensions that are greater than 1 millimeter.
- a microfluidic chip 108may include at least one component that has at least one dimension that is less than 1 millimeter and at least one component having at least one dimension that is greater than 1 millimeter.
- microfluidic chips 108may be configured to utilize a variety of methods to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 .
- methodsinclude, but are not limited to, nucleic acid (polynucleotide) hybridization based methods, immunological based methods, chromatographic based methods, affinity based methods, extraction based methods, separation based methods, isolation based methods, filtration based methods, enzyme based methods, isoelectric focusing methods, or substantially any combination thereof.
- Microfluidic chips 108may utilize numerous methods to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to utilize: chemiluminescent methods (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,090,545 and 5,093,268; herein incorporated by reference), plasmon resonance sensors (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,030,989; herein incorporated by reference), nuclear magnetic resonance detectors (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,194,900; herein incorporated by reference), gradient-based assays (e.g., U.S. Pat. No.
- reporter beadse.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,747,349; herein incorporated by reference
- transverse electrophoresise.g., Macounova et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:1627-1633 (2001)
- isoelectric focusinge.g., Macounova et al., Analytical Chemistry, 72:3745-3751 (2000)
- Xu et al.Isoelectric focusing of green fluorescent proteins in plastic microfluidic channels.
- capillary electrophoresise.g., Kameoka et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:1935-1941 (2001)
- immunoassayse.g., Hatch et al., Nature Biotechnology, 19:461-465 (2001); Eteshola and Leckband, D. Development and characterization of an ELISA assay in PDMS microfluidic channels.
- PCR amplificatione.g., Belgrader et al., Biosensors & Bioelectronics, 14:849-852 (2000); Khandurina et al., Analytical Chemistry, 72:2995-3000 (2000); Lagally et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:565-570 (2001)), cell manipulation (e.g., Glasgow et al., IEEE Transactions On Biomedical Engineering, 48:570-578 (2001)), cell separation (e.g., Yang et al., Analytical Chemistry, 71:911-918 (1999)), cell patterning (e.g., Chiu et al., Proc. Natl.
- PCR amplificatione.g., Belgrader et al., Biosensors & Bioelectronics, 14:849-852 (2000); Khandurina et al., Analytical Chemistry, 72:2995-3000 (2000); Lagally et al., Ana
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to utilize one or more magnets that may be used during processing and/or analysis of one or more samples 104 .
- ferrous metallic particlesmay be associated with one or more pathogens 106 that are associated with one or more samples 104 (e.g., use of antibodies, aptamers, peptides, polynucleotides, and the like that bind to one or more pathogen indicators and that are coupled to a ferrous metallic particle).
- the one or more pathogens 106may be separated from the remainder of the one or more samples 104 through use of one or more magnets.
- one or more magnetsmay be used to create eddy currents that may be used to process and/or analyze one or more samples 104 .
- non-ferrous metallic particlesmay be associated with one or more pathogens 106 that are associated with one or more samples 104 (e.g., use of antibodies, aptamers, peptides, polynucleotides, and the like that bind to one or more pathogen indicators and that are coupled to a non-ferrous metallic particle).
- One or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured such that passage of a non-ferrous metallic particle through a magnetic field will cause an eddy current to impart kinetic energy to the non-ferrous metallic particle and provide for separation of the associated pathogens 106 from the remainder of the one or more samples 104 .
- such methodsmay be combined with additional methods to provide for separation of one or more pathogens 106 from one or more samples 104 .
- magnetic separationmay be used in combination with one or more methods that may include, but are not limited to, diffusion (e.g., use of an H-filter), filtration, precipitation, immunoassay, immunodiffusion, and the like.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to utilize ferrofluids to separate one or more pathogens 106 from one or more samples 104 .
- a microfluidic chip 108may include an H-filter where a sample fluid and a ferrofluid flow substantially in parallel (e.g., the sample fluid and the ferrofluid flow side-by-side through the H-filter (horizontal) and/or above and below (vertical)).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include a ferrofluid having magnetic particles such that ferrous materials contained within the sample fluid are attracted to the ferrofluid and thereby separated from the sample fluid.
- microfluidic chips 108may be configured to separate one or more pathogens 106 from one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include a ferrofluid having ferrous particles such that magnetic materials contained within the sample fluid are attracted to the ferrofluid and thereby separated from the sample fluid.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to utilize ferrofluids to separate one or more pathogens 106 from one or more samples 104 .
- Microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process numerous types of samples 104 .
- a microfluidic chip 108may be configured to sonicate one or more samples 104 .
- a microfluidic chip 108may include one or more ultrasonic electronic generators that produce a signal (e.g., 20 kilohertz) that can be used to drive a piezoelectric converter/transducer. This electrical signal may be converted by the transducer to a mechanical vibration due to the characteristics of the internal piezoelectric crystals. This vibration can be amplified and transmitted to one or more probes having tips that expand and contract to provide for sonication of one or more samples 104 .
- a signale.g. 20 kilohertz
- a microfluidic chip 108may include one or more sonication probes. Such probes may be configured such that are able to operably associate with one or more vibration sources in a detachable manner. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 that include one or more probes may be configured to detachably connect with one or more vibration sources that produce a vibration that can be coupled to the one or more probes. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may include one or more vibration sources.
- a microfluidic chip 108may be configured to mix one or more samples 104 .
- a microfluidic chip 108may include a mixing chamber which includes one or more ferrous mixing members and electromagnets which are configured such that motion may be imparted to the one or more ferrous mixing members.
- a microfluidic chip 108may include one or more mixing chambers that include two or more electromagnets positioned around the one or more mixing chambers and one or more ferrous members positioned within the one or more mixing chambers and between the electromagnets. Accordingly, mixing of one or more materials within the one or more mixing chambers may be facilitated by alternating current between the electromagnets positioned around the mixing chamber.
- a mixing chambermay include an elastomeric material that includes a ferrous material (e.g., an elastomeric-ferrous material) such that movement of the elastomeric-ferrous material may be facilitated through use of one or more magnets, such as electromagnets.
- a ferrous materiale.g., an elastomeric-ferrous material
- elastomeric-ferrous materialsmay be utilized to fabricate pumps that are associated with microfluidic chips 108 .
- a tubemay include an elastomeric material that includes ferrous material such that movement of the elastomeric material may be facilitated through use of one or more magnets.
- valves and ferrous materialsmay be associated with the elastomeric tube such that expansion of a portion of the elastomeric tube through the action of a magnet, such as an electromagnetic, will act like a vacuum pump to draw fluids into the expanded portion of the elastomeric tube.
- valvesmay be positioned within the tube to provide for directional flow of fluid through the elastomeric tube. Accordingly, such pumps may be configured as vacuum pumps, propulsion type pumps, and/or both vacuum and propulsion type pumps.
- microfluidic chips 108may be configured to utilize magnetically actuated fluid handling.
- a microfluidic chip 108may utilize magnetic fluid (e.g., ferrofluid, ferrogel, and the like) to move one or more gases and/or liquids through flow channels.
- magnetic fluide.g., ferrofluid, ferrogel, and the like
- magnetically actuated slugs of magnetic fluidmay be moved within channels of a microfluidic chip 108 to facilitate valving and/or pumping of one or more gases and/or liquids.
- the magnets used to control gas and/or liquid movementmay be individual magnets that are moved along the flow channels and/or one or more arrays of magnets that may be individually controlled to hold or move one or more magnetic slugs.
- an array of electromagnetsmay be positioned along a flow channel which may be turned on and off in a predetermined pattern to move magnetic fluid slugs in desired paths in one or more flow channels.
- Methods to construct magnetically actuated fluid handling deviceshave been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,408,884 and 7,110,646; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may process one or more samples 104 through use of polynucleotide interaction.
- Numerous methods based on polynucleotide interactionmay be used. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, those based on polynucleotide hybridization, polynucleotide ligation, polynucleotide amplification, polynucleotide degradation, and the like. Methods that utilize intercalation dyes, FRET analysis, capacitive DNA detection, and nucleic acid amplification have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,118,910 and 6,960,437; herein incorporated by reference).
- fluorescence resonance energy transfermay be used to analyze polynucleotide interaction.
- methodsare known and have been described (e.g., Jarvius, DNA Tools and Microfluidic Systems for Molecular Analysis, Digital Comprehensive Summaries of Uppsala Dissertations from the Faculty of Medicine 161, ACTA UNIVERSITATIS UPSALIENSIS UPPSALA 2006, ISBN: 91-554-6616-8; Singh-Zocchi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:7605-7610 (2003); Wang et al., Anal.
- one or more polynucleotides that include at least one carbon nanotubeare combined with one or more samples 104 , and/or one or more partially purified polynucleotides obtained from one or more samples 104 .
- the one or more polynucleotides that include one or more carbon nanotubesare allowed to hybridize with one or more polynucleotides that may be present within the one or more samples 104 .
- the one or more carbon nanotubesmay be excited (e.g., with an electron beam and/or an ultraviolet laser) and the emission spectra of the excited nanotubes may be correlated with hybridization of the one or more polynucleotides that include at least one carbon nanotube with one or more polynucleotides that are included within the one or more samples 104 .
- Methods to utilize carbon nanotubes as probes for nucleic acid interactionhave been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,821,730; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of protein interaction. Numerous methods based on protein interaction may be used. In some embodiments, protein interaction may be used to immobilize one or more pathogens 106 . In some embodiments, protein interaction may be used to separate one or more pathogens 106 from one or more samples 104 .
- Examples of such methodsinclude, but are not limited to, those based on ligand binding, protein-protein binding, protein cross-linking, use of green fluorescent protein, phage display, the two-hybrid system, protein arrays, fiber optic evanescent wave sensors, chromatographic techniques, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, regulation of pH to control protein assembly and/or oligomerization, regulation of ion concentration to control protein assembly and/or oligomerization, and the like.
- Methods that may be used to construct protein arrayshave been described (e.g., Warren et al., Anal. Chem., 76:4082-4092 (2004) and Walter et al., Trends Mol. Med., 8:250-253 (2002), U.S. Pat. No. 6,780,582; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of peptide interaction.
- Peptidesare generally described as being polypeptides that include less than one hundred amino acids.
- peptidesinclude dipeptides, tripeptides, and the like.
- peptidesmay include from two to one hundred amino acids.
- peptidesmay include from two to fifty amino acids.
- peptidesmay include from two to one twenty amino acids.
- peptidesmay include from ten to one hundred amino acids.
- peptidesmay include from ten to fifty amino acids. Accordingly, peptides can include numerous numbers of amino acids.
- peptide interactionmay be used to immobilize one or more pathogens 106 .
- peptide interactionmay be used to separate one or more pathogens 106 from one or more samples 104 .
- Examples of such methodsinclude, but are not limited to, those based on ligand binding, peptide-protein binding, peptide-peptide binding, peptide-polynucleotide binding, peptide cross-linking, use of a fluorescent protein, phage display, the two-hybrid system, protein arrays, peptide arrays, fiber optic evanescent wave sensors, chromatographic techniques, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, regulation of pH to control peptide and/or protein assembly and/or oligomerization, and the like. Accordingly, virtually any technique that may be used to analyze proteins may be utilized for the analysis of peptides.
- high-speed capillary electrophoresismay be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 through use of fluorescently labeled phosphopeptides as affinity probes (Yang et al., Anal. Chem., 10.1021/acO61936e (2006)). Methods to immobilize proteins and peptides have been reported (Taylor, Protein Immobilization: Fundamentals and Applications, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York (1991)).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of antibody interaction.
- Antibodiesmay be raised that will bind to numerous pathogens 106 through use of known methods (e.g., Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. (1988)).
- Antibodiesmay be configured in numerous ways within one or more microfluidic chips 108 to process one or more pathogens 106 .
- antibodiesmay be coupled to a substrate within a microfluidic chip 108 .
- One or more samples 104may be passed over the coupled antibodies to facilitate binding of one or more pathogens 106 to the one or more antibodies to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes.
- a labeled detector antibody that binds to the pathogen 106 (or the antibody-pathogen complex)may then be passed over the one or more antibody-pathogen complexes such that the labeled detector antibody will label the pathogen 106 (or the antibody-pathogen complex).
- Numerous labelsmay be used that include, but are not limited to, enzymes, fluorescent molecules, radioactive labels, spin labels, redox labels, and the like.
- antibodiesmay be coupled to a substrate within a microfluidic chip 108 .
- One or more samples 104may be passed over the antibodies to facilitate binding of one or more pathogens 106 to the one or more antibodies to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes. Such binding provides for detection of the antibody-pathogen complex through use of methods that include, but are not limited to, surface plasmon resonance, conductivity, and the like (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,030,989; herein incorporated by reference).
- antibodiesmay be coupled to a substrate within a microfluidic chip 108 to provide for a competition assay.
- One or more samples 104may be mixed with one or more reagent mixtures that include one or more labeled pathogens 106 .
- the mixturemay then be passed over the antibodies to facilitate binding of pathogens 106 in the sample 104 and labeled pathogens 106 in the reagent mixture to the antibodies.
- the unlabeled pathogens 106 in the sample 104will compete with the labeled pathogens 106 in the reagent mixture for binding to the antibodies. Accordingly, the amount of label bound to the antibodies will vary in accordance with the concentration of unlabeled pathogen 106 in the sample 104 .
- antibody interactionmay be used in association with microcantilevers to process one or more pathogens 106 . Methods to construct microcantilevers are known (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos.
- one or more antibodiesmay be used in conjunction with one or more aptamers to process one or more samples 104 . Accordingly, in some embodiments, aptamers and antibodies may be used interchangeably to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of chemical interaction. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize chemical extraction to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more samples 104may be mixed with a reagent mixture that includes one or more solvents in which the one or more pathogens 106 are soluble. Accordingly, the solvent phase containing the one or more pathogens 106 may be separated from the sample phase to provide for detection of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104may be mixed with a reagent mixture that includes one or more chemicals that cause precipitation of one or more pathogens 106 .
- the sample phasemay be washed away from the one or more precipitated pathogens 106 to provide for detection of the one or more pathogens 106 . Accordingly, reagent mixtures that include numerous types of chemicals that interact with one or more pathogens 106 may be used.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of diffusion. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one or more fluid samples 104 through use of an H-filter.
- a microfluidic chip 108may be configured to include a channel through which a fluid sample 104 and a second fluid flow such that the fluid sample 104 and the second fluid undergo substantially parallel flow through the channel without significant mixing of the sample fluid and the second fluid. As the fluid sample 104 and the second fluid flow through the channel, one or more pathogens 106 in the fluid sample 104 may diffuse through the fluid sample 104 into the second fluid.
- diffusionprovides for the separation of the one or more pathogens 106 from the sample 104 .
- Methods to construct H-filtershave been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,742,661; 6,409,832; 6,007,775; 5,974,867; 5,971,158; 5,948,684; 5,932,100; 5,716,852; herein incorporated by reference).
- diffusion based methodsmay be combined with immunoassay based methods to process and detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- Methods to conduct microscale diffusion immunoassayshave been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,541,213; herein incorporated by reference). Accordingly, microfluidic chips 108 may be configured in numerous ways to process one or more pathogens 106 through use of diffusion.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of filtration.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to include one or more filters that have a molecular weight cut-off.
- a filtermay allow molecules of low molecular weight to pass through the filter while disallowing molecules of high molecular weight to pass through the filter.
- one or more pathogens 106 that are contained within a sample 104may be allowed to pass through a filter while larger molecules contained within the sample 104 are disallowed from passing through the filter.
- a microfluidic chip 108may include two or more filters that selectively retain, or allow passage, of one or more pathogens 106 through the filters. Such configurations provide for selective separation of one or more pathogens 106 from one or more samples 104 . Membranes and filters having numerous molecular weight cut-offs are commercially available (e.g., Millipore, Billerica, Mass.). In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to provide for dialysis of one or more samples 104 .
- a microfluidic chip 108may be configured to contain one or more samples 104 in one or more sample chambers that are separated from one or more dialysis chambers by a semi-permeable membrane. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or more pathogens 106 that are able to pass through the semi-permeable membrane may be collected in the dialysis chamber. In other embodiments, one or more pathogens 106 may be retained in the one or more sample chambers while other sample components may be separated from the one or more pathogens 106 by their passage through the semi-permeable membrane into the dialysis chamber.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to include two or more dialysis chambers for selective separation of one or more pathogens 106 from one or more samples 104 .
- Semi-permeable membranes and dialysis tubingis available from numerous commercial sources (e.g., Millipore, Billerica, Mass.; Pierce, Rockford, Ill.; Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.). Methods that may be used for microfiltration have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,922,210; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of chromatography.
- Numerous chromatographic methodsmay be used to process one or more samples 104 . Examples of such chromatographic methods include, but are not limited to, ion-exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, gel filtration chromatography, hydroxyapatite chromatography, gas chromatography, reverse phase chromatography, thin layer chromatography, capillary chromatography, size exclusion chromatography, hydrophobic interaction media, and the like.
- a microfluidic chip 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of one or more chromatographic methods.
- chromatographic methodsmay be used to process one or more samples 104 for one or more pathogens 106 that include one or more polynucleotides.
- one or more samples 104may be applied to a chromatographic media to which the one or more polynucleotides bind. The remaining components of the sample 104 may be washed from the chromatographic media. The one or more polynucleotides may then be eluted from chromatographic media in a more purified state.
- Similar methodsmay be used to process one or more samples 104 for one or more pathogens 106 that include one or more proteins or polypeptides (e.g., Mondal and Gupta, Biomol.
- Chromatography media able to separate numerous types of moleculesis commercially available (e.g., Bio-Rad, Hercules, Calif.; Qiagen, Valencia, Calif.; Pfizer, New York, N.Y.; Millipore, Billerica, Mass.; GE Healthcare Bio-Sciences Corp., Piscataway, N.J.).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of aptamer interaction.
- one or more aptamersmay include polynucleotides (e.g., deoxyribonucleic acid; ribonucleic acid; and derivatives of polynucleotides that may include polynucleotides that include modified bases, polynucleotides in which the phosphodiester bond is replaced by a different type of bond, or many other types of modified polynucleotides).
- one or more aptamersmay include peptide aptamers.
- Aptamersmay be configured in numerous ways within one or more microfluidic chips 108 to process one or more pathogens 106 .
- aptamersmay be coupled to a substrate within a microfluidic chip 108 .
- One or more samples 104may be passed over the aptamers to facilitate binding of one or more pathogens 106 to the one or more aptamers to form one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes.
- Labeled detector antibodies and/or aptamers that bind to the pathogen 106 (or the aptamer-pathogen complex)may then be passed over the one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes such that the labeled detector antibodies and/or aptamers will label the pathogen 106 (or the aptamer-pathogen complex).
- Numerous labelsmay be used that include, but are not limited to, enzymes, fluorescent molecules, radioactive labels, spin labels, redox labels, and the like.
- aptamersmay be coupled to a substrate within a microfluidic chip 108 .
- One or more samples 104may be passed over the aptamers to facilitate binding of one or more pathogens 106 to the one or more aptamers to form one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes.
- Such bindingprovides for detection of the aptamer-pathogen complex through use of methods that include, but are not limited to, surface plasmon resonance, conductivity, and the like (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,030,989; herein incorporated by reference).
- aptamersmay be coupled to a substrate within a microfluidic chip 108 to provide for a competition assay.
- One or more samples 104may be mixed with one or more reagent mixtures that include one or more labeled pathogens 106 .
- the mixturemay then be passed over the aptamers to facilitate binding of pathogens 106 in the sample 104 and labeled pathogens 106 in the reagent mixture to the aptamers.
- the unlabeled pathogens 106 in the sample 104will compete with the labeled pathogens 106 in the reagent mixture for binding to the aptamers. Accordingly, the amount of label bound to the aptamers will vary in accordance with the concentration of unlabeled pathogens 106 in the sample 104 .
- aptamer interactionmay be used in association with microcantilevers to process one or more pathogens 106 .
- Methods to construct microcantileversare known (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,141,385; 6,935,165; 6,926,864; 6,763,705; 6,523,392; 6,325,904; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more aptamersmay be used in conjunction with one or more antibodies to process one or more samples 104 .
- aptamers and antibodiesmay be used interchangeably to process one or more samples 104 . Accordingly, in some embodiments, methods and/or systems for processing and/or detecting pathogen indicators may utilize antibodies and aptamers interchangeably and/or in combination.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of electrical conductivity.
- one or more samples 104may be processed through use of magnetism.
- one or more samples 104may be combined with one or more tagged polynucleotides that are tagged with a ferrous material, such as a ferrous bead. The tagged polynucleotides and the polynucleotides in the one or more samples 104 may be incubated to provide hybridized complexes of the tagged polynucleotides and the sample polynucleotides.
- Hybridizationwill serve to couple one or more ferrous beads to the polynucleotides in the sample 104 that hybridize with the tagged polynucleotides. Accordingly, the mixture may be passed over an electromagnet to immobilize the hybridized complexes. Other components in the sample 104 may then be washed away from the hybridized complexes. In some embodiments, a chamber containing the magnetically immobilized hybridized complexes may be heated to release the sample polynucleotides from the magnetically immobilized tagged polynucleotides. The sample polynucleotides may then be collected in a more purified state.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured in numerous ways to utilize magnetism to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more samples 104may be processed through use of eddy currents. Eddy current separation uses electromagnetic induction in conducting materials to separate non-ferrous metals by their different electric conductivities. An electrical charge is induced into a conductor by changes in magnetic flux cutting through it. Moving permanent magnets passing a conductor generates the change in magnetic flux.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to include a magnetic rotor such that when conducting particles move through the changing flux of the magnetic rotor, a spiraling current and resulting magnetic field are induced.
- the magnetic field of the conducting particlesmay interact with the magnetic field of the magnetic rotor to impart kinetic energy to the conducting particles.
- the kinetic energy imparted to the conducting particlesmay then be used to direct movement of the conducting particles.
- non-ferrous particlessuch as metallic beads, may be utilized to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more samples 104may be combined with one or more tagged polynucleotides that are tagged with a non-ferrous material, such as an aluminum bead.
- the tagged polynucleotides and the polynucleotides in the one or more samples 104may be incubated to provide hybridized complexes of the tagged polynucleotides and the sample polynucleotides.
- Hybridizationwill serve to couple one or more ferrous beads to the polynucleotides in the sample 104 that hybridize with the tagged polynucleotides.
- the mixturemay be passed through a magnetic field to impart kinetic energy to the non-ferrous bead. This kinetic energy may then be used to separate the hybridized complex.
- similar methodsmay be used in conjunction with antibodies, aptamers, peptides, ligands, and the like.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured in numerous ways to utilize eddy currents to process one or more samples 104 .
- One or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured in numerous ways to utilize electrical conductivity to process one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of isoelectric focusing.
- Methodshave been described that may be used to construct capillary isoelectric focusing systems (e.g., Herr et al., Investigation of a miniaturized capillary isoelectric focusing (cIEF) system using a full-field detection approach, Mechanical Engineering Department, Stanford University, Stanford, Calif.; Wu and Pawliszyn, Journal of Microcolumn Separations, 4:419-422 (1992); Kilar and Hjerten, Electrophoresis, 10:23-29 (1989); U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,150,813; 7,070,682; 6,730,516; herein incorporated by reference).
- Such systemsmay be modified to provide for the processing of one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of one-dimensional electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of two-dimensional electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of gradient gel electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of electrophoresis under denaturing conditions. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of electrophoresis under native conditions. One or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize numerous electrophoretic methods.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of immunoassay.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of enzyme linked immunosorbant assay (ELISA).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of radioimmuno assay (RIA).
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of enzyme immunoassay (EIA).
- such methodsmay utilize antibodies (e.g., monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, antibody fragments, single-chain antibodies, and the like), aptamers, or substantially any combination thereof.
- a labeled antibody and/or aptamermay be used within an immunoassay.
- labelsinclude, but are not limited to, radioactive labels, fluorescent labels, enzyme labels, spin labels, magnetic labels, gold labels, colorimetric labels, redox labels, and the like.
- Numerous immunoassaysare known and may be configured for processing one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of one or more competition assays. In some embodiments, one or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one or more samples 104 through use of one or more polynucleotide based competition assays. One or more microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to include one or more polynucleotides coupled to a substrate, such as a polynucleotide array.
- the one or more microfluidic chips 108may be further configured so that a sample 104 and/or substantially purified polynucleotides obtained from one or more samples 104 , may be mixed with one or more reagent mixtures that include one or more labeled polynucleotides to form an analysis mixture.
- This analysis mixtureis then passed over the substrate such that the labeled polynucleotides and the sample polynucleotides are allowed to hybridize to the polynucleotides that are immobilized on the substrate.
- the sample polynucleotides and the labeled polynucleotideswill compete for binding to the polynucleotides that are coupled on the substrate.
- the presence and/or concentration of the polynucleotides in the sample 104can be determined through detection of the label (e.g., the concentration of the polynucleotides in the sample 104 will be inversely related to the amount of label that is bound to the substrate).
- labelsmay be used that include, but are not limited to, enzymes, fluorescent molecules, radioactive labels, spin labels, redox labels, and the like.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to include one or more antibodies, proteins, peptides, and/or aptamers that are coupled to a substrate.
- the one or more microfluidic chips 108may be further configured so that a sample 104 and/or substantially purified sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides obtained from one or more samples 104 , may be mixed with one or more reagent mixtures that include one or more labeled polypeptides and/or labeled peptides to form an analysis mixture.
- This analysis mixturecan then be passed over the substrate such that the labeled polypeptides and/or labeled peptides and the sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides are allowed to bind to the antibodies, proteins, peptides, and/or aptamers that are immobilized on the substrate.
- sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides and the labeled polypeptides and/or sample peptideswill compete for binding to the antibodies, proteins, peptides, and/or aptamers that are coupled on the substrate. Accordingly, the presence and/or concentration of the sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides in the sample 104 can be determined through detection of the label (e.g., the concentration of the sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides in the sample 104 will be inversely related to the amount of label that is bound to the substrate).
- Numerous labelsmay be used that include, but are not limited to, enzymes, fluorescent molecules, radioactive labels, spin labels, redox labels, and the like.
- Microfluidic chips 108may be configured to utilize numerous types of competition assays.
- microfluidic chips 108may be configured for analysis of numerous types of pathogens 106 (e.g., intact pathogen 106 and/or portion of pathogen).
- pathogens 106e.g., intact pathogen 106 and/or portion of pathogen.
- System 100may include one or more analysis units 110 .
- Analysis units 110may be configured for analysis of numerous types of pathogens 106 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured for analysis of one or more polynucleotides, polypeptides, polysaccharides, enzyme activities, and the like.
- one or more polynucleotides, polypeptides, polysaccharides, enzyme activities, and the like that are associated with one or more pathogens 106may be analyzed.
- one or more polynucleotides, polypeptides, polysaccharides, enzyme activities, and the like that are associated with pathogen 106 activitymay be analyzed.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured for analysis of one or more polypeptides through use of numerous techniques that include, but are not limited to, competition assays, immunological methods (e.g., sandwich assays), and the like.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured for analysis of one or more polynucleotides through use of numerous techniques that include, but are not limited to, competition assays, electron transfer assays, electrical conductivity assays, and the like.
- an analysis unit 110may include one or more centrifugation units.
- one or more centrifugation unitsmay be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 . Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or more centrifugation units may be used to facilitate analysis and/or detection of one or more pathogens 106 . Methods to fabricate devices that may be used to drive fluid movement through centripetal acceleration in a microfluidics system have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,709,869; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more centrifugation unitsmay be used to facilitate the analysis of one or more polynucleotides from one or more samples 104 that are applied to one or more microfluidic chips 108 (e.g., U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 11/699,770; 11/699,920; 11/699,747; and 11/699,774; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more centrifugation unitsmay be configured to centrifuge one or more microfluidic chips 108 to facilitate movement of one or more samples 104 , one or more reagents, one or more fluids, and the like through the one or more microfluidic chips 108 .
- one or more centrifugation unitsmay be configured to centrifuge one or more microfluidic chips 108 to create a gradient.
- velocity gradientsmay be created to facilitate analysis of one or more samples 104 .
- glycerol gradientsmay be used to separate polypeptides from one or more samples 104 .
- density gradientsmay be created to facilitate analysis of one or more samples 104 .
- cesium chloridemay be used to create a density gradient to facilitate the analysis of one or more polynucleotides.
- gradient centrifugationmay be used to analyze one or more viral particles.
- one or more centrifugation unitsmay be configured to centrifuge one or more microfluidic chips 108 to facilitate chromatographic separations of components within one or more samples 104 .
- chromatographic mediamay be packed within a microfluidic chip 108 to facilitate the separation of components, such as pathogens 106 , from one or more samples 104 .
- Such chromatographic mediais commercially available (e.g., Qiagen Sciences, Germantown, Md. and Pfizer, New York, N.Y.).
- an analysis unit 110may include one or more reagent delivery units.
- one or more reagent delivery unitsmay be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 .
- one or more reagent delivery unitsmay be configured to contain one or more reagents that may be used within one or more microfluidic chips 108 to analyze and/or detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more reagent delivery unitsmay include one or more pumps to facilitate delivery of one or more reagents. Numerous types of pumps may be used within a reagent delivery unit.
- one or more reagent delivery unitsmay be configured to operably associate with one or more centrifugation units.
- reagentsmay be delivered through use of centrifugal force.
- Reagent delivery unitsmay be configured in numerous ways.
- reagent delivery unitsmay include one or more reagent reservoirs, one or more waste reservoirs or substantially any combination thereof.
- Reagent delivery unitsmay be configured to contain and/or deliver numerous types of reagents. Examples of such reagents include, but are not limited to, phenol, chloroform, alcohol, salt solutions, detergent solutions, solvents, reagents used for polynucleotide precipitation, reagents used for polypeptide precipitation, reagents used for polynucleotide extraction, reagents used for polypeptide extraction, reagents used for chemical extractions, and the like. Accordingly, reagent delivery units may be configured to contain and/or deliver virtually any reagent that may be used for the analysis of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to facilitate detection of one or more pathogens 106 with at least one technique that includes spectroscopy, electrochemical detection, polynucleotide detection, fluorescence anisotropy, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, electron transfer, enzyme assay, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, chromatography, immunoprecipitation, immunoseparation, aptamer binding, filtration, electrophoresis, use of a CCD camera, immunoassay, or substantially any combination thereof.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include a window (e.g., a quartz window, a cuvette analog, and/or the like) through which one or more analysis units 110 may determine if one or more pathogens 106 are present and/or determine the concentration of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to utilize numerous techniques, such as visible light spectroscopy, ultraviolet light spectroscopy, infrared spectroscopy, fluorescence spectroscopy, and the like, to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to facilitate detection and/or analysis of one or more pathogens 106 through use of surface plasmon resonance.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include one or more antibodies, aptamers, proteins, peptides, polynucleotides, and the like, that are bound to a substrate (e.g., a metal film) that is associated with a prism through which one or more analysis units 110 may shine light to detect one or more pathogens 106 that interact with the one or more antibodies, aptamers, proteins, peptides, polynucleotides, and the like, that are bound to a substrate.
- a substratee.g., a metal film
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to facilitate detection and/or analysis of one or more pathogens 106 through use of nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR).
- the analysis units 110may be configured to accept an NMR probe and are configured to detect one or more pathogens 106 through use of NMR spectroscopy.
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of spectroscopy.
- spectroscopic methodsinclude, but are not limited to, ultraviolet spectroscopy, visible light spectroscopy, infrared spectroscopy, x-ray spectroscopy, fluorescence spectroscopy, mass spectroscopy, plasmon resonance (e.g., Chemf et al., Clinical Chemistry, 52:255-262 (2006) and U.S. Pat. No. 7,030,989; herein incorporated by reference), nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy, Raman spectroscopy, fluorescence quenching, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, intrinsic fluorescence, ligand fluorescence, and the like.
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of electrochemical detection.
- one or more polynucleotidesmay be analyzed through use of electrochemical detection.
- a polynucleotide that includes a redox label, such as ferroceneis coupled to a gold electrode.
- the labeled polynucleotideforms a stem-loop structure that can self-assemble onto a gold electrode by means of facile gold-thiol chemistry.
- Hybridization of a sample polynucleotideinduces a large conformational change in the surface-confined polynucleotide structure, which in turn alters the electron-transfer tunneling distance between the electrode and the redoxable label.
- the resulting change in electron transfer efficiencymay be measured by cyclic voltammetry (Fan et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:9134-9137 (2003); Wang et al., Anal. Chem., 75:3941-3945 (2003); Singh-Zocchi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:7605-7610 (2003)).
- Such methodsmay be used to analyze numerous polynucleotides, such as messenger ribonucleic acid, genomic deoxyribonucleic acid, fragments thereof, and the like.
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of polynucleotide analysis.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to use polynucleotide analysis.
- Numerous methodsmay be used to analyze one or more polynucleotides. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, those based on polynucleotide hybridization, polynucleotide ligation, polynucleotide amplification, polynucleotide degradation, and the like. Methods that utilize intercalation dyes, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, capacitive deoxyribonucleic acid detection, and nucleic acid amplification have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat.
- Such methodsmay be adapted to provide for analysis of one or more pathogens 106 .
- fluorescence quenching, molecular beacons, electron transfer, electrical conductivity, and the likemay be used to analyze polynucleotide interaction.
- Such methodsare known and have been described (e.g., Jarvius, DNA Tools and Microfluidic Systems for Molecular Analysis, Digital Comprehensive Summaries of Uppsala Dissertations from the Faculty of Medicine 161, ACTA UNIVERSITATIS UPSALIENSIS UPPSALA 2006, ISBN: 91-554-6616-8; Singh-Zocchi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad.
- one or more polynucleotides that include at least one carbon nanotubemay be combined with one or more samples 104 , and/or one or more partially purified polynucleotides obtained from one or more samples 104 .
- the one or more polynucleotides that include one or more carbon nanotubesare allowed to hybridize with one or more polynucleotides that may be present within the one or more samples 104 .
- the one or more carbon nanotubesmay be excited (e.g., with an electron beam and/or an ultraviolet laser) and the emission spectra of the excited nanotubes may be correlated with hybridization of the one or more polynucleotides that include at least one carbon nanotube with one or more polynucleotides that are included within the one or more samples 104 .
- polynucleotides that hybridize to one or more pathogens 106may include one or more carbon nanotubes.
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of fluorescence anisotropy.
- Fluorescence anisotropyis based on measuring the steady state polarization of sample fluorescence imaged in a confocal arrangement.
- a linearly polarized laser excitation sourcepreferentially excites fluorescent target molecules with transition moments aligned parallel to the incident polarization vector.
- the resultant fluorescenceis collected and directed into two channels that measure the intensity of the fluorescence polarized both parallel and perpendicular to that of the excitation beam.
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET).
- Fluorescence resonance energy transferrefers to an energy transfer mechanism between two fluorescent molecules. A fluorescent donor is excited at its fluorescence excitation wavelength. This excited state is then nonradiatively transferred to a second molecule, the fluorescent acceptor. Fluorescence resonance energy transfer may be used within numerous configurations to detected and/or analyze one or more pathogens 106 .
- an antibodymay be labeled with a fluorescent donor and one or more pathogens 106 may be labeled with a fluorescent acceptor.
- labeled antibodies and pathogens 106may be used within competition assays to facilitate detection and/or the determination of the concentration of one or more pathogens 106 in one or more samples 104 .
- Numerous combinations of fluorescent donors and fluorescent acceptorsmay be used to analyze one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to include a window (e.g., quartz) through which fluorescent light may pass to provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of fluorescence resonance energy transfer. Accordingly, fluorescence resonance energy transfer may be used in conjunction with competition assays and/or numerous other types of assays to analyze and/or detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of electron transfer.
- Electron transferis the process by which an electron moves from an electron donor to an electron acceptor causing the oxidation states of the electron donor and the electron acceptor to change.
- electron transfermay occur when an electron is transferred from one or more electron donors to an electrode.
- electron transfermay be utilized within competition assays to analyze one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may include one or more polynucleotides that may be immobilized on one or more electrodes.
- the immobilized polynucleotidesmay be incubated with a reagent mixture that includes sample polynucleotides and polynucleotides that are tagged with an electron donor. Hybridization of the tagged polynucleotides to the immobilized polynucleotides allows the electron donor to transfer an electron to the electrode to produce a detectable signal 126 . Accordingly, a decrease in signal due to the presence of one or more polynucleotides that are pathogens 106 in the reagent mixture indicates the presence of a pathogen 106 in the sample 104 . Such methods may be used in conjunction with polynucleotides, polypeptides, peptides, antibodies, aptamers, and the like.
- One or more analysis units 110may be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 to utilize numerous electron transfer based assays to provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of one or more enzyme assays.
- Numerous enzyme assaysmay be used to provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 .
- Examples of such enzyme assaysinclude, but are not limited to, beta-galactosidase assays, peroxidase assays, catalase assays, alkaline phosphatase assays, and the like.
- enzyme assaysmay be configured such that an enzyme will catalyze a reaction involving an enzyme substrate that produces a fluorescent product.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to facilitate detection of fluorescence resulting from the fluorescent product.
- enzyme assaysmay be configured as binding assays that provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to include a substrate to which is coupled one or more antibodies, aptamers, peptides, proteins, polynucleotides, ligands, and the like, that will interact with one or more pathogens 106 .
- One or more samples 104may be passed across the substrate such that one or more pathogens 106 present within the one or more samples 104 will interact with the one or more antibodies, aptamers, peptides, proteins, polynucleotides, ligands, and the like, and be immobilized on the substrate.
- One or more antibodies, aptamers, peptides, proteins, polynucleotides, ligands, and the like, that are labeled with an enzymemay then be passed across the substrate such that the one or more labeled antibodies, aptamers, peptides, proteins, polynucleotides, ligands, and the like, will bind to the one or more immobilized pathogens 106 .
- an enzyme substratemay then be introduced to the one or more immobilized enzymes such that the enzymes are able to catalyze a reaction involving the enzyme substrate to produce a fluorescent product.
- assaysare often referred to as sandwich assays.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to provide for detection of one or more products of enzyme catalysis to provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of electrical conductivity.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of electrical conductivity.
- microfluidic chips 108may be configured to operably associate with one or more analysis units 110 such that the one or more analysis units 110 can detect one or more pathogens 106 through use of electrical conductivity.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may be configured to include two or more electrodes that are each coupled to one or more detector polynucleotides.
- the electrodesmay be carbon nanotubes (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,216; herein incorporated by reference).
- electrodesmay include, but are not limited to, one or more conductive metals, such as gold, copper, iron, silver, platinum, and the like; one or more conductive alloys; one or more conductive ceramics; and the like.
- electrodesmay be selected and configured according to protocols typically used in the computer industry that include, but are not limited to, photolithography, masking, printing, stamping, and the like.
- other molecules and complexes that interact with one or more pathogens 106may be used to detect the one or more pathogens 106 through use of electrical conductivity. Examples of such molecules and complexes include, but are not limited to, proteins, peptides, antibodies, aptamers, and the like.
- two or more antibodiesmay be immobilized on one or more electrodes such that contact of the two or more antibodies with a pathogen 106 , such as a spore, a bacterium, a virus, an egg, a worm, a cyst, a protozoan, a single-celled organism, a fungus, an algae, and the like, will complete an electrical circuit and facilitate the production of a detectable electrical current.
- a pathogen 106such as a spore, a bacterium, a virus, an egg, a worm, a cyst, a protozoan, a single-celled organism, a fungus, an algae, and the like, will complete an electrical circuit and facilitate the production of a detectable electrical current.
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of isoelectric focusing.
- analysis units 110may be configured to provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of isoelectric focusing.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to utilize isoelectric focusing to detect and/or analyze one or more pathogens 106 .
- native isoelectric focusingmay be utilized.
- denaturing isoelectric focusingmay be utilized.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to include one or more CCD cameras that can be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 that are analyzed through isoelectric focusing. In some embodiments, one or more analysis units 110 may be configured to include one or more spectrometers that can be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 . Numerous types of spectrometers may be utilized to detect one or more pathogens 106 following isoelectric focusing. In some embodiments, one or more analysis units 110 may be configured to utilize refractive index to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of chromatographic methodology alone or in combination with additional analysis and/or detection methods.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured for use with chromatographic methods. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or more analysis units 110 may be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 and detect one or more pathogens 106 that were analyzed through use of chromatographic methods. In some embodiments, the one or more analysis units 110 may be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 and supply solvents and other reagents to the one or more microfluidic chips 108 .
- one or more analysis units 110may include pumps and solvent/buffer reservoirs that are configured to supply solvent/buffer flow through chromatographic media (e.g., a chromatographic column) that is operably associated with one or more microfluidic chips 108 .
- chromatographic mediae.g., a chromatographic column
- Numerous types of chromatographic methods and mediamay be used to analyze one or more samples 104 and provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 .
- Chromatographic methodsinclude, but are not limited to, low pressure liquid chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), microcapillary low pressure liquid chromatography, microcapillary high pressure liquid chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, gel filtration chromatography, size exclusion chromatography, thin layer chromatography, paper chromatography, gas chromatography, and the like.
- HPLChigh pressure liquid chromatography
- microcapillary high pressure liquid chromatographyion exchange chromatography
- affinity chromatographyaffinity chromatography
- gel filtration chromatographysize exclusion chromatography
- thin layer chromatographypaper chromatography
- gas chromatographygas chromatography
- biotinylated sitemay be engineered into a polypeptide, peptide, aptamer, antibody, or the like.
- the biotinylated proteinmay then be incubated with avidin coated polystyrene beads and slurried in Tris buffer.
- Affinity columnsmay be prepared that may include one or more molecules and/or complexes that interact with one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more aptamers that bind to one or more pathogens 106may be used to construct an affinity column.
- numerous chromatographic methodsmay be used alone, or in combination with additional methods, to process and detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- Numerous detection methodsmay be used in combination with numerous types of chromatographic methods.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to utilize numerous detection methods to detect one or more pathogens 106 that are analyzed through use of one or more chromatographic methods.
- one or more chromatographic markersmay be added to one or more samples 104 prior to the samples 104 being applied to a chromatographic column.
- One or more analysis units 110 that are operably associated with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that include a chromatographic columnmay be configured to detect the one or more chromatographic markers and use the elution time and/or position of the chromatographic markers as a calibration tool for use in detecting one or more pathogens 106 . Accordingly, chromatographic methods may be used in combination with additional methods and in combination with numerous types of detection methods.
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of immunoprecipitation.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 through use of immunoprecipitation.
- an analysis unit 110may be configured to associated with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to utilize immunoprecipitation to analyze one or more pathogens 106 .
- immunoprecipitationmay be utilized in combination with additional analysis and/or detection methods to analyze and/or detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to analyze one or more samples 104 through use of immunoprecipitation.
- one or more samples 104may be combined with one or more antibodies that bind to one or more pathogens 106 to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes.
- An insoluble form of an antibody binding constituentsuch as protein A (e.g., protein A-sepharose bead, protein A-magnetic bead, protein A-ferrous bead, protein A-non-ferrous bead, and the like), Protein G, a second antibody, an aptamer, and the like, may then be mixed with the antibody-pathogen complex such that the insoluble antibody binding constituent binds to the antibody-pathogen complex and provides for precipitation of the antibody-pathogen complex.
- protein Ae.g., protein A-sepharose bead, protein A-magnetic bead, protein A-ferrous bead, protein A-non-ferrous bead, and the like
- Protein Ge.g., Protein G, a second antibody, an aptamer, and the like
- Such complexesmay be separated from other sample components to provide for detection of one or more pathogens 106 .
- sample componentsmay be washed away from the precipitated antibody-pathogen complexes.
- one or more analysis units 110 that are configured for immunoprecipitationmay include one or more centrifugation units to assist in precipitating one or more antibody-pathogen complexes.
- aptamerspolypeptide and/or polynucleotide
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to detect one or more pathogens 106 through use of numerous detection methods in combination with immunoprecipitation based methods.
- one or more pathogens 106may be analyzed through use of immunoseparation.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to analyze one or more pathogens 106 through use of immunoseparation.
- an analysis unit 110may be configured to associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to analyze one or more pathogens 106 through use of immunoseparation.
- immunoseparationmay be utilized in combination with additional analysis and/or detection methods to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to analyze one or more samples 104 through use of immunoseparation.
- one or more samples 104may be combined with one or more antibodies that bind to one or more pathogens 106 to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes.
- An antibody binding constituentmay be added that binds to the antibody-pathogen complex.
- antibody binding constituentsthat may be used alone or in combination include, but are not limited to, protein A (e.g., protein A-sepharose bead, protein A-magnetic bead, protein A-ferrous bead, protein A-non-ferrous bead, and the like), Protein G, a second antibody, an aptamer, and the like.
- Such antibody binding constituentsmay be mixed with an antibody-pathogen complex such that the antibody binding constituent binds to the antibody-pathogen complex and provides for separation of the antibody-pathogen complex.
- the antibody binding constituentmay include a tag that allows the antibody binding constituent and complexes that include the antibody binding constituent to be separated from other components in one or more samples 104 .
- the antibody binding constituentmay include a ferrous material. Accordingly, antibody-pathogen complexes may be separated from other sample components through use of a magnet, such as an electromagnet.
- an antibody binding constituentmay include a non-ferrous metal.
- antibody-pathogen complexesmay be separated from other sample components through use of an eddy current to direct movement of one or more antibody-pathogen complexes.
- two or more forms of an antibody binding constituentsmay be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- a first antibody binding constituentmay be coupled to a ferrous material and a second antibody binding constituent may be coupled to a non-ferrous material.
- the first antibody binding constituent and the second antibody binding constituentmay be mixed with antibody-pathogen complexes such that the first antibody binding constituent and the second antibody binding constituent bind to antibody-pathogen complexes that include different pathogens 106 .
- different pathogens 106 from a single sample 104 and/or a combination of samples 104may be separated through use of direct magnetic separation in combination with eddy current based separation.
- one or more samples 104may be combined with one or more antibodies that bind to one or more pathogens 106 to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes.
- the one or more antibodiesmay include one or more tags that provide for separation of the antibody-pathogen complexes.
- an antibodymay include a tag that includes one or more magnetic beads, a ferrous material, a non-ferrous metal, an affinity tag, a size exclusion tag (e.g., a large bead that is excluded from entry into chromatographic media such that antibody-pathogen complexes pass through a chromatographic column in the void volume), and the like.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to analyze one or more pathogens 106 through use of numerous analysis methods in combination with immunoseparation based methods.
- aptamerspolypeptide and/or polynucleotide
- one or more pathogens 106may be analyzed through use of aptamer binding.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to analyze one or more pathogens 106 through use of aptamer binding.
- aptamer bindingmay be utilized in combination with additional analysis and/or detection methods to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more samples 104may be combined with one or more aptamers that bind to one or more pathogens 106 to form one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes.
- Such complexesmay be detected through use of numerous methods that include, but are not limited to, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, fluorescence quenching, surface plasmon resonance, and the like.
- aptamer binding constituentsmay be added that bind to the aptamer-pathogen complex.
- Numerous aptamer binding constituentsmay be utilized.
- one or more aptamersmay include one or more tags to which one or more aptamer binding constituents may bind. Examples of such tags include, but are not limited to, biotin, avidin, streptavidin, histidine tags, nickel tags, ferrous tags, non-ferrous tags, and the like.
- one or more tagsmay be conjugated with a label to provide for detection of one or more complexes.
- tag-label conjugatesinclude, but are not limited to, Texas red conjugated avidin, alkaline phosphatase conjugated avidin, CY2 conjugated avidin, CY3 conjugated avidin, CY3.5 conjugated avidin, CY5 conjugated avidin, CY5.5 conjugated avidin, fluorescein conjugated avidin, glucose oxidase conjugated avidin, peroxidase conjugated avidin, rhodamine conjugated avidin, agarose conjugated anti-protein A, alkaline phosphatase conjugated protein A, anti-protein A, fluorescein conjugated protein A, IRDye® 800 conjugated protein A, peroxidase conjugated protein A, sepharose protein A, alkaline phosphatase conjugated streptavidin, AMCA conjugated streptavidin, anti-streptavidin ( Streptomyces avidinii ) (rabbit) IgG Fraction, beta-galactosidase conjugated streptavidin, CY2
- aptamer binding constituentsmay be mixed with an aptamer-pathogen complex such that the aptamer binding constituent binds to the aptamer-pathogen complex and provides for separation of the aptamer-pathogen complex.
- the aptamer binding constituentmay include a tag that allows the aptamer binding constituent and complexes that include the aptamer binding constituent to be separated from other components in one or more samples 104 .
- the aptamer binding constituentmay include a ferrous material.
- aptamer-pathogen complexesmay be separated from other sample components through use of a magnet, such as an electromagnet.
- an aptamer binding constituentmay include a non-ferrous metal.
- aptamer-pathogen complexesmay be separated from other sample components through use of an eddy current to direct movement of one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes.
- two or more forms of aptamer binding constituentsmay be used to analyze one or more pathogens 106 .
- a first aptamer binding constituentmay be coupled to a ferrous material and a second aptamer binding constituent may be coupled to a non-ferrous material.
- the first aptamer binding constituent and the second aptamer binding constituentmay be mixed with aptamer-pathogen complexes such that the first aptamer binding constituent and the second aptamer binding constituent bind to aptamer-pathogen complexes that include different pathogens 106 .
- different pathogens 106 from a single sample 104 and/or a combination of samples 104may be separated through use of direct magnetic separation in combination with eddy current based separation.
- one or more samples 104may be combined with one or more aptamers that bind to one or more pathogens 106 to form one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes.
- the one or more aptamersmay include one or more tags that provide for separation of the aptamer-pathogen complexes.
- an aptamermay include a tag that includes one or more magnetic beads, a ferrous material, a non-ferrous metal, an affinity tag, a size exclusion tag (e.g., a large bead that is excluded from entry into chromatographic media such that antibody-pathogen complexes pass through a chromatographic column in the void volume), and the like.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to detect one or more pathogens 106 in combination with numerous analysis methods.
- antibodiesmay be used in combination with aptamers and/or in place of aptamers.
- one or more pathogens 106may be analyzed through use of electrophoresis.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to analyze one or more samples 104 through use of electrophoresis.
- such analysis units 10may be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to detect and/or analyze one or more pathogens 106 through use of electrophoresis. Numerous electrophoretic methods may be utilized to analyze and/or detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- electrophoretic methodsinclude, but are not limited to, capillary electrophoresis, one-dimensional electrophoresis, two-dimensional electrophoresis, native electrophoresis, denaturing electrophoresis, polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, agarose gel electrophoresis, and the like.
- Numerous detection methodsmay be used in combination with one or more electrophoretic methods to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected according to the position to which the one or more pathogens 106 migrate within an electrophoretic field (e.g., a capillary and/or a gel).
- the position of one or more pathogens 106may be compared to one or more standards.
- one or more samples 104may be mixed with one or more molecular weight markers prior to gel electrophoresis.
- the one or more samples 104 that include the one or more molecular weight markersmay be subjected to electrophoresis and then the gel may be stained.
- refraction, absorbance, and/or fluorescencemay be used to determine the position of sample components within a gel.
- the molecular weight markersmay be used as a reference to detect one or more pathogens 106 present within the one or more samples 104 .
- one or more components that are known to be present within one or more samples 104may be used as a reference to detect one or more pathogens 106 present within the one or more samples 104 .
- gel shift assaysmay be used to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- a sample 104e.g., a single sample 104 or combination of multiple samples 104
- the first sample 104may be mixed with an antibody, aptamer, ligand, or other molecule and/or complex that binds to the one or more pathogens 106 .
- the first and second samples 104may then be subjected to electrophoresis.
- the gels corresponding to the first sample 104 and the second sample 104may then be analyzed to determine if one or more pathogens 106 are present within the one or more samples 104 .
- Analysis units 110may be configured in numerous ways to analyze and detect one or more pathogens 106 through use of electrophoresis.
- one or more pathogens 106may be detected and/or analyzed through use of one or more charge-coupled device (CCD) cameras.
- one or more analysis units 110 that include one or more CCD camerasmay be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 .
- Such analysis units 110may be utilized in combination with numerous analysis methods. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, electrophoresis; competition assays; methods based on polynucleotide interaction, protein interaction, peptide interaction, antibody interaction, aptamer interaction, immunoprecipitation, immunoseparation, and the like.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to analyze one or more samples 104 through use of immunoprecipitation.
- one or more antibodiesmay be conjugated to a fluorescent label such that binding of one or more labeled antibodies to one or more pathogens 106 included within one or more samples 104 will form a fluorescently labeled antibody-pathogen complex.
- One or more insoluble pathogen binding constituentssuch as a sepharose bead that includes an antibody or aptamer that binds to the one or more pathogens 106 , may be bound to the fluorescently labeled antibody-pathogen complex and used to precipitate the complex.
- One or more analysis units 110that include a CCD camera that is configured to detect fluorescent emission from the one or more fluorescent labels may be used to detect the one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more CCD camerasmay be configured to utilize dark frame subtraction to cancel background and increase sensitivity of the camera.
- one or more analysis units 110may include one or more filters to select and/or filter wavelengths of energy that can be detected by one or more CCD cameras (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 3,971,065; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more analysis units 110may include polarized lenses.
- One or more analysis units 110may be configured in numerous ways to utilize one or more CCD cameras to detect one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more pathogens 106may be analyzed through use of immunoassay.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to analyze one or more samples 104 through use of immunoassay.
- one or more analysis units 110may be configured to operably associate with one or more microfluidic chips 108 that are configured to analyze one or more samples 104 through use of immunoassay. Numerous types of detection methods may be used in combination with immunoassay based methods.
- a labelmay be used within one or more immunoassays that may be detected by one or more analysis units 110 .
- labelsinclude, but are not limited to, fluorescent labels, spin labels, fluorescence resonance energy transfer labels, radiolabels, electrochemiluminescent labels (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,093,268; 6,090,545; herein incorporated by reference), and the like.
- electrical conductivitymay be used in combination with immunoassay based methods.
- an analysis unit 110may be configured to utilize numerous detection methods. Examples of such detection methods include, but are not limited to, calorimetric methods, spectroscopic methods, resonance based methods, electron transfer based methods (redox), conductivity based methods, gravimetric based assays, turbidity based methods, ion-specific based methods, refractive index based methods, radiological based methods, or substantially any combination thereof.
- detection methodsinclude, but are not limited to, calorimetric methods, spectroscopic methods, resonance based methods, electron transfer based methods (redox), conductivity based methods, gravimetric based assays, turbidity based methods, ion-specific based methods, refractive index based methods, radiological based methods, or substantially any combination thereof.
- the system 100may include one or more processing units 112 .
- one or more processing units 112may include memory and/or one or more databases that include information related to agents 142 .
- one or more processing units 112may access memory and/or one or more databases that include information related to agents 142 .
- Such informationmay include: identities of agents 142 , contraindications of agents 142 , dosages for use of agents 142 , administration schedules for agents 142 , methods of administration for agents 142 , cost of agents 142 , coverage of agents 142 by insurance companies, coverage of agents 142 by health care providers, chemical structures for agents 142 , generic names for agents 142 , brand names for agents 142 , geographical distributions for agents 142 , regulatory restrictions related to agents 142 , alternatives to agents 142 , side-effects of agents 142 , agents 142 that reduce the pathogenicity of pathogens 106 , stability of agents 142 , shelf-life of agents 142 , recommended shipping procedures for agents 142 , and the like.
- one or more processing units 112may access memory and/or one or more databases to determine one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of one or more detected pathogens 106 .
- one or more processing units 112may access one or more remote databases.
- one or more processing units 112may access one or more databases at pharmaceutical companies, pharmacies, health care facilities, and the like.
- one or more processing units 112may include a computer.
- one or more processing units 112may perform numerous types of calculations.
- one or more processing units 112may calculate one or more dosages of one or more agents 142 for administration to one or more individuals 102 .
- one or more processing units 112may perform numerous types of calculations in response to information related to one or more individuals 102 .
- one or more processing units 112may calculate dosages of one or more agents 142 for administration to one or more specific individuals 102 .
- the system 100may include one or more display units 114 .
- Numerous types of display units 114may be used in association with system 100 .
- Examples of such display units 114include, but are not limited to, liquid crystal displays, printers, audible displays, cathode ray displays, plasma display panels, Braille displays, passive displays, chemical displays, active displays, and the like.
- display units 114may display information in numerous languages. Examples of such languages include, but are not limited to, English, Spanish, German, Japanese, Chinese, Italian, and the like.
- display units 114may display information pictographically, calorimetrically, and/or physically, such as displaying information in Braille.
- one or more display units 114may be physically coupled to one or more microfluidic chips 108 . In some embodiments, one or more display units 114 may be remotely coupled to one or more microfluidic chips 108 . In some embodiments, one or more display units 114 may be physically coupled to one or more analysis units 110 . In some embodiments, one or more display units 114 may be remotely coupled to one or more analysis units 110 . In some embodiments, one or more display units 114 may be physically coupled to one or more detection units. In some embodiments, one or more display units 114 may be remotely coupled to one or more detection units.
- one or more display units 114may be positioned in one or more locations that are remote from the position where analysis of one or more pathogens 106 takes place. Examples of such remote locations include, but are not limited to, the offices of physicians, nurses, pharmacists, and the like.
- signals 126may be used in association with system 100 .
- Examples of such signals 126include, but are not limited to, optical signals 126 , radio signals 126 , wireless signals 126 , hardwired signals 126 , infrared signals 126 , ultrasonic signals 126 , and the like.
- one or more signals 126may not be encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals 126 may be encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals 126 may be sent through use of a secure mode of transmission. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals 126 may be transmitted to a specified individual. In some embodiments, one or more signals 126 may be transmitted to a specified group. In some embodiments, one or more signals 126 may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one or more signals 126 may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient.
- one or more signals 126may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals 126 (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like).
- one or more signals 126may be sent in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law.
- one or more signals 126may be transmitted in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act.
- the system 100may include one or more transmitting units 116 .
- Numerous types of transmitting units 116may be used in association with system 100 .
- Examples of such transmitting units 116include, but are not limited to, transmitters that transmit one or more optical signals, radio signals, wireless signals, hardwired signals, infrared signals, ultrasonic signals, and the like (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. RE39,785; 7,260,768; 7,260,764; 7,260,402; 7,257,327; 7,215,887; 7,218,900; herein incorporated by reference).
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that are encrypted.
- the system 100may include one or more receiving units 136 .
- Numerous types of receiving units 136may be used in association with system 100 .
- Examples of such receiving units 136include, but are not limited to, receivers that receive one or more optical signals, radio signals, wireless signals, hardwired signals, infrared signals, ultrasonic signals, and the like.
- Such receiversare known and have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. RE39,785; 7,218,900; 7,254,160; 7,245,894; 7,206,605; herein incorporated by reference).
- the system 100may include one or more accepting units 118 .
- one or more accepting units 118may accept input 120 from one or more users 124 .
- the user 124may be an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- the user 124may be someone other than an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- input 120may be entered into one or more accepting units 118 through use of a user interface 122 .
- input 120may be entered into an accepting unit 118 through use of a keyboard, a keypad, an audio based system, a wireless system, and the like.
- one or more users 124may enter input 120 into an accepting unit 118 through use of a wireless device, such as a mobile telephone, personal data assistant, a radio transmitter, and the like.
- a wireless devicesuch as a mobile telephone, personal data assistant, a radio transmitter, and the like.
- one or more accepting units 118may include a touch screen on which informational choices are displayed.
- a touch screenmay display a series of questions that a user 124 may answer. Such questions may include questions pertaining to an individual's 102 height, weight, blood pressure, exercise habits, substance use habits, sleep habits, occupation, insurance provider, health care provider, financial information, location, cholesterol level, metabolic indicators, and the like.
- an accepting unit 118may include memory in which input 120 may be stored.
- an accepting unit 118may include a database in which input 120 may be stored. In some embodiments, an accepting unit 118 may include a receiver that is configured to receive wireless signals 126 . In some embodiments, an accepting unit 118 may include a receiver that is configured to operably connect to a telephone connection, a data port, a digital cable, an optical cable, and the like.
- Numerous types of input 120may be entered into system 100 .
- Examples of such input 120include, but are not limited to, an individual's 102 height, weight, blood pressure, exercise habits, substance use habits, sleep habits, occupation, insurance provider, health care provider, financial information, location, cholesterol level, metabolic indicators, and the like.
- the system 100may include one or more packaging units 138 .
- packaging units 138may be configured to package one or more agents 142 in unit dosage form.
- packaging units 138may be configured to package one or more agents 142 in numerous types of administration forms.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 in packaging material that provides for release of the one or more agents 142 at selected positions within an individual 102 (e.g., stomach, intestine, eye, nose, lungs, etc.).
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 in packaging material that provides for administration of the one or more agents 142 .
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 for interperitoneal administration, nasal administration, pulmonary administration, intravenous administration, intraperitoneal administration, and the like.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients.
- the system 100may include one or more shipping units 140 .
- one or more shipping units 140may address one or more packages for delivery to a destination. Examples of such destinations include, but are not limited to, the residence of an individual 102 , a hospital, a medical field station, a ship, a health care facility, a pharmacy, and the like.
- a shipping unit 140may include circuitry and program instructions that provide for access to shipping schedules and routes used by shipping companies. Accordingly, in some embodiments, a shipping unit 140 may determine a route for shipping one or more packages that is responsive to the identity of one or more agents 142 that are to be shipped. For example, in some embodiments, an agent 142 may need to be packaged in dry ice to preserve the agent 142 . Accordingly, a shipping unit 140 may select overnight delivery to a destination to preserve the integrity of the agent 142 . Accordingly, one or more shipping units 140 may select a schedule and route that is appropriate for an agent 142 that is to be shipped.
- a user 124may interact with system 100 .
- a user 124may be human.
- a user 124may be non-human.
- a user 124may interact with one or more microfluidic chips 108 , one or more reagent delivery units, one or more centrifugation units, one or more analysis units 110 , one or more detection units, one or more display units 114 , one or more user interfaces 122 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- the usercan interact through use of numerous types of user interfaces 122 .
- one or more users 124may interact through use of numerous user interfaces 122 that utilize hardwired methods, such as through use of a keyboard, use of wireless methods, use of the internet, and the like.
- a user 124may be a health-care worker. Examples of such health-care workers include, but are not limited to, physicians, nurses, pharmacists, and the like.
- a user 124may be a hiker, a farmer, a food inspector, a cook, a traveler, and the like.
- FIG. 2illustrates an operational flow 200 representing examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- discussion and explanationmay be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions of FIGS. 1-1C .
- the various operationsare presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.
- the operational flow 200includes an identifying operation 210 involving identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips.
- one or more analysis units 110may be used to identify one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips 108 .
- the operational flow 200includes an accepting operation 220 involving accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more accepting units 118may be used to accept input 120 associated with an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- the operational flow 200includes a determining operation 230 involving determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more processing units 112may be used to determine one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 3illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 200 of FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 3illustrates example embodiments where the identifying operation 210 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 302 , operation 304 , and/or operation 306 .
- the identifying operation 210may include accepting the one or more samples with the one or more microfluidic chips.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 that include one or more liquids.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 that include one or more solids.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 that include one or more gases.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 that include one or more biological samples 104 .
- biological samples 104include, but are not limited to, blood, cerebrospinal fluid, mucus, breath, urine, fecal material, skin, tissue, tears, hair, and the like.
- the identifying operation 210may include processing the one or more samples with the one or more microfluidic chips to facilitate analysis of one or more pathogen indicators associated with the one or more samples.
- the identifying operation 210may include processing one or more samples 104 with one or more microfluidic chips 108 through use of polynucleotide interaction, protein interaction, peptide interaction, antibody interaction, chemical interaction, diffusion, filtration, chromatography, aptamer interaction, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, electrophoresis, immunoassay, competition assay, or substantially any combination thereof.
- the identifying operation 210may include analyzing one or more pathogen indicators with one or more analysis units that are configured to operably associate with the one or more microfluidic chips.
- identifying operation 210may include analyzing the one or more pathogen indicators with one or more analysis units 110 through use of at least one technique that includes spectroscopy, electrochemical detection, polynucleotide detection, fluorescence anisotropy, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, electron transfer, enzyme assay, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, chromatography, immunoprecipitation, immunoseparation, aptamer binding, electrophoresis, use of a CCD camera, immunoassay, or substantially any combination thereof.
- FIG. 4illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 200 of FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 4illustrates example embodiments where the accepting operation 220 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 402 , and/or operation 404 .
- the accepting operation 220may include accepting input associated with one or more parameters related to the individual.
- one or more accepting units 118may accept input 120 associated with one or more parameters related to an individual 102 .
- the one or more parametersmay be physical parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be psychological parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be financial parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be health care provided related parameters (e.g., physician's name, insurance provider, HMO name, prescription plan, etc.).
- the accepting operation 220may include accepting input associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or location.
- one or more accepting units 118may accept input 120 associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition (e.g., body mass index, fat percentage), substance use (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, illicit drugs), liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage (e.g., prescription plan, insurance limits, limitations on providers, HMO limitations), pregnancy status (e.g., pregnant, not pregnant, unknown), blood pressure, child bearing plans (e.g., yes, no, time when planning to become pregnant), one or more activities (e.g., travel, athletic activities, occupational activities, driving), location (e.g., travel to foreign nation, local address, town, city), or substantially any combination thereof.
- substance usee.g., alcohol, tobacco, illicit drugs
- liver healthe.g., allergies
- prescription drug usee.g., non-prescription drug use
- insurance coveragee.g., prescription plan, insurance limits, limitations on providers, HMO limitations
- pregnancy statuse.g., pregnant
- FIG. 5illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 200 of FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 5illustrates example embodiments where the determining operation 230 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 502 , operation 504 , operation 506 , operation 508 , and/or operation 510 .
- the determining operation 230may include identifying one or more chemical agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more chemical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one pathogen 106 that is identified.
- Numerous chemical agents 142may be identified. Examples of such chemical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, ozone, peroxides, chlorinated compounds, acids, bases, alcohols, and the like (e.g., Merck Index, Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. (2001) and Mosby's Drug Guide, An Imprint of Elsevier, St. Louis, Mo. (2004)). In some embodiments, such chemical agents 142 may be identified that are specific for one or more identified pathogens 106 .
- the determining operation 230may include identifying one or more mechanical agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more mechanical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one pathogen 106 that is identified.
- Numerous mechanical agents 142may be identified. Examples of such mechanical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, ultraviolet light, irradiation, and the like. In some embodiments, such mechanical agents 142 may be identified that are specific for one or more identified pathogens 106 .
- the determining operation 230may include identifying the one or more bioagents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more bioagents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 that are identified.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more bacteriophages that may be used to reduce the disease causing ability of a bacteria.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more invasive recombinant bacteria that may be used to deliver a gene product that may be used to reduce the disease causing ability of one or more pathogens.
- recombinant bacteriamay be engineered to produce an antibiotic.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more inactivated pathogens (e.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi) that may be used to induce an immune response against one or more pathogens.
- the determining operation 230may include identifying the one or more agents that are not contraindicated by one or more substances used by the individual.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that are not contraindicated by one or more substances used by an individual 102 .
- an individual 102may use one or more prescription medications.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that do not contraindicate the one or more prescription medications.
- an individual 102may use one or more substances such as tobacco or alcohol that may contraindicate an agent 142 .
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that are not affected by one or more substances used by an individual 102 and/or that do not affect one or more substances used by an individual 102 . Accordingly, one or more processing units 112 may identify one or more agents 142 with regard to numerous types of substances used by an individual 102 .
- the determining operation 230may include identifying the one or more additional agents that act synergistically with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more additional agents 142 that act synergistically with the one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more additional agents 142 that increase the effectiveness of one or more antibiotics.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more antibacterial adjuvants (e.g., beta-lactamase inhibitors) that may act synergistically with one or more antibiotics.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that up regulate an immune response against a pathogen that may act synergistically with one or more other agents 142 .
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that down regulate an immune response against a pathogen that may act synergistically with one or more other agents 142 .
- FIG. 6illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 200 of FIG. 2 .
- FIG. 6illustrates example embodiments where the determining operation 230 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 602 , operation 604 , and/or operation 606 .
- the determining operation 230may include identifying the one or more agents in response to one or more parameters associated with the individual.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 in response to one or more parameters associated with the individual 102 .
- one or more agents 142may be identified for application to a specific individual 102 .
- Such embodimentsprovide for personalized selection and dosing of agents 142 that may be used to treat pathogen infection.
- Numerous parameters associated with an individual 102may be considered. Examples of such parameters include, but are not limited to, size, weight, allergies, body composition, substance use, and the like.
- the determining operation 230may include identifying one or more agents in response to at least one parameter associated with the individual that includes age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or child bearing plans.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 in response to at least one parameter associated with the individual 102 that includes age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, or substantially any combination thereof.
- the determining operation 230may include identifying one or more agents that reduce the pathogenicity of at least one virus, bacterium, worm, egg, cyst, protozoan, single-celled organism, fungus, algae, pathogenic protein, or microbe.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that reduce the pathogenicity of at least one virus, bacterium, worm, egg, cyst, protozoan, single-celled organism, fungus, algae, pathogenic protein, or microbe.
- Numerous agents 142are known that will reduce the pathogenicity of one or more pathogens 106 (The Merck Index, 13th Edition, An Encyclopedia of Chemicals, Drugs, and Biologicals, Merck & Co.
- FIG. 7illustrates operational flow 700 that includes operations 710 , 720 , and 730 , that correspond to operations 210 , 220 , and 230 as illustrated in FIG. 2 , with an optionally included displaying operation 740 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- discussion and explanationmay be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 700optionally includes a displaying operation 740 involving displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more display units 114may be used to display information associated with one or more agents 142 .
- Numerous types of display units 114may be used to display information. Examples of such display units 114 include, but are not limited to, liquid crystal displays, light emitting diode displays, audio displays, Braille displays, graphical displays, and the like. Numerous types of information may be displayed.
- Examples of such types of informationinclude, but are not limited to, the identity of one or more agents 142 , the dosage of one or more agents 142 , contraindications associated with the one or more agents 142 , administration method to be used with one or more agents 142 , administration schedule associated with one or more agents 142 , and the like.
- FIG. 8illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 700 of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 8illustrates example embodiments where the displaying operation 740 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 802 , operation 804 , and/or operation 806 .
- the displaying operation 740may include displaying an identity of the one or more agents.
- one or more display units 114may be used to display an identity of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display the identity of one or more agents 142 in numerous languages (e.g., English, French, Spanish, Italian, Japanese, etc.).
- one or more display units 114may display the identity of one or more agents 142 according to chemical name, brand name, generic name, name according to location (e.g., name in a given country), and the like.
- the displaying operation 740may include displaying dosage information associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more display units 114may be used to display dosage information associated with one or more agents 142 .
- dosagemay be displayed with reference to a schedule.
- an agent 142may be administered more often at a lower dosage while in other embodiments the agent 142 may be administered less often at a higher dose.
- a dosage of one or more agents 142may depend upon the method used to administer the one or more agents 142 .
- an agent 142may be administered orally, intravenously, or nasally. Accordingly, the dosage that is displayed may depend on the methods used to administer the agent 142 .
- the displaying operation 740may include displaying instructions associated with use of the one or more agents.
- one or more display units 114may be used to display instructions associated with use of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display a schedule for administration of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display instructions with regard to routes for administration of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display instructions for food and/or beverage consumption during administration of one or more agents 142 . Accordingly, numerous types of information may be displayed by one or more display units 114 .
- FIG. 9illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 700 of FIG. 7 .
- FIG. 9illustrates example embodiments where the displaying operation 740 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 902 , operation 904 , and/or operation 906 .
- the displaying operation 740may include displaying information associated with cost of the one or more agents.
- one or more display units 114may be used to display information associated with the cost of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display a combination of agents 142 based on the combined cost of the agents 142 .
- two or more agents 142may be displayed that are compatible with each other and an individual 102 as well as providing the lowest cost when compared to other comparable agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display a group of agents 142 and their associated cost.
- one or more display units 114may display a group of agents 142 and information related to whether the cost of the agents 142 will be paid by an individual's health care plan or insurance. Numerous types of information may be displayed with regard to the cost of one or more agents 142 .
- the displaying operation 740may include displaying information associated with insurance coverage related to the one or more agents.
- one or more display units 114may be used to display information associated with insurance coverage related to one or more agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display a group of agents 142 and information related to which of the agents 142 are included within a health care or insurance plan.
- one or more display units 114may display alternative health care or insurance plans under which the cost of one or more agents 142 will be covered. Accordingly, in such embodiments, an individual 102 may be presented with information that allows the individual 102 to select an insurance or health care plan under which the cost of one or more agents 142 will be covered.
- the displaying operation 740may include displaying one or more contraindications associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more display units 114may be used to display one or more contraindications associated with one or more agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display one or more selected agents 142 and additional agents 142 that contraindicate the selected agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may display activities that are contraindicated by one or more selected agents 142 .
- one or more display units 114may indicate that an individual 102 should not drive or operate machinery following administration of one or more agents 142 . Accordingly, numerous types of information may be displayed.
- FIG. 10illustrates operational flow 1000 that includes operations 1010 , 1020 , 1030 , and 1040 that correspond to operations 710 , 720 , 730 , and 740 as illustrated in FIG. 7 with an optionally included transmitting operation 1050 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 10 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the methoddiscussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 1000optionally includes a transmitting operation 1050 involving transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more transmitting units 116may be used to transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more transmitting units 116may transmit signals 126 through use of numerous technologies. For example, such signals 126 may be transmitted through use of the internet, radio waves, optical cables, cellular telephone connections, telephone connections, satellite telephone connections, and the like.
- the one or more signals 126may be transmitted to, and received by, numerous types of receivers. For example, one or more signals 126 may be received by pharmacies, hospitals, pharmaceutical companies, health care providers, nutraceutical companies, and the like.
- FIG. 11illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 1000 of FIG. 10 .
- FIG. 11illustrates example embodiments where the transmitting operation 1050 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 1102 , operation 1104 , operation 1106 , operation 1108 , operation 1110 , and/or operation 1112 .
- the transmitting operation 1050may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the identity of one or more agents.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the identity of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the brand name, the generic name, the chemical name, the structure, identifiers associated with an agent 142 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- the transmitting operation 1050may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the individual.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with an individual 102 .
- One or more signals 126 that include numerous types of information associated with an individual 102may be transmitted. Examples of such information include, but are not limited to, height, weight, age, substances used by an individual 102 (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, prescription medication, non-prescription medication, illicit drugs, etc.), body composition, allergies, physical characteristics (e.g., blood pressure, heart rate, intraocular pressure, etc.), activities, and the like.
- the transmitting operation 1050may include transmitting the one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 through use of a secure connection.
- one or more signalsmay be encrypted.
- one or more signalsmay be sent through use of a secure mode of transmission.
- one or more signalsmay be transmitted to a specified individual.
- one or more signalsmay be transmitted to a specified group.
- one or more signalsmay include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual.
- one or more signalsmay include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like).
- one or more signalsmay be sent in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent with information that includes a request for a return receipt.
- the transmitting operation 1050may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more pathogens.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the one or more pathogens 106 .
- the one or more signals 126may include numerous types of information associated with one or more pathogens 106 . Examples of such information include the identity of a pathogen 106 , the concentration of a pathogen 106 , drug resistance characteristics of a pathogen 106 , and the like.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the virulence of one or more pathogens 106 . For example, some pathogenic strains of E.
- one or more signalsmay include information related to numerous types of virulence determinants.
- virulence determinantsinclude, but are not limited to, adhesions (e.g., CFAI/CFAII, type 1 fimbriae, P fimbriae, S fimbriae, Intimin), invasions (e.g., hemolysisn, siderophores and siderophore uptake systems, Shigella -like “invasins” for intracellular invasion and spread), toxins (e.g., LT toxin, ST toxin, Shiga-like toxin, cytotoxins, endotoxin LPS), antiphagocytic surface properties (e.g., capsules, K antigens, lipopolysaccharides), somatic antigens, flagellar antigens, and the like.
- one or more signalsmay include information related to numerous types of virulence determinants.
- the transmitting operation 1050may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with where an individual 102 is physically experiencing a pathogen infection (e.g., eye infection, nasal infection, gastrointestinal tract infection, etc).
- a pathogen infectione.g., eye infection, nasal infection, gastrointestinal tract infection, etc.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of the pathogen 106 .
- one or more signals 126may include information that indicates where the pathogen 106 and/or individual 102 who is infected with the pathogen 106 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.).
- the one or more signals 126may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates.
- GPSglobal positioning system
- the transmitting operation 1050may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual 102 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of an individual 102 .
- one or more signals 126may include information that indicates where an individual 102 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.).
- the one or more signals 126may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates.
- GPSglobal positioning system
- FIG. 12illustrates an operational flow 1200 representing examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 12 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the methoddiscussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions of FIGS. 1-1C .
- the various operationsare presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.
- the operational flow 1200includes a receiving operation 1210 involving receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more receiving units 136may be used to receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 determined in response to one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 and input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- the one or more signals 126may include information associated with the identity of one or more agents 142 , the dosage of one or more agents 142 , the method of administration for one or more agents 142 , contraindications associated with the one or more agents 142 , an administration schedule associated with the one or more agents 142 , and the like.
- the one or more signals 126may include information associated with an individual 102 that includes, but is not limited to, physical characteristics of the individual 102 (e.g., height, weight, body composition, heart rate, blood pressure, etc.), mental characteristics of an individual 102 (e.g., mood, depression, mental disorders, predisposition toward suicide, etc.), physiological characteristics (e.g., allergic responses, blood pressure drop in response to medication, etc.), and the like.
- physical characteristics of the individual 102e.g., height, weight, body composition, heart rate, blood pressure, etc.
- mental characteristics of an individual 102e.g., mood, depression, mental disorders, predisposition toward suicide, etc.
- physiological characteristicse.g., allergic responses, blood pressure drop in response to medication, etc.
- the operational flow 1200includes a processing operation 1220 involving processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more processing units 112may be used to process information associated with one or more agents 142 determined in response to one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 and input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- one or more processing units 112may search one or more databases to determine one or more agents 142 that may be utilized to reduce the pathogenicity of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more processing units 112may search one or more databases to determine one or more agents 142 that may be alternatives to an identified agent 142 . In some embodiments, one or more processing units 112 may determine if the cost of one or more agents 142 is covered by a health care plan or insurance of an individual 102 . In some embodiments, one or more processing units 112 may determine if the cost of one or more agents 142 is covered by a health care plan or the insurance of an individual 102 and identify alternative agents 142 that are covered. In some embodiments, one or more processing units 112 may determine if the one or more agents 142 are available in the location of the individual 102 . In some embodiments, one or more processing units 112 may determine alternative agents 142 that are available at the location of the individual 102 .
- FIG. 13illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 1200 of FIG. 12 .
- FIG. 13illustrates example embodiments where the receiving operation 1210 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 1302 , operation 1304 , operation 1306 , operation 1308 , operation 1310 , and/or operation 1312 .
- the receiving operation 1210may include receiving the one or more signals that include an identity of the one or more agents.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include an identity of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the brand name, the generic name, the chemical name, the structure, identifiers associated with an agent 142 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- the receiving operation 1210may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more dosages of the one or more agents.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more dosages of the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more dosagesmay be commercially available dosages.
- the one or more dosagesmay be specific for an individual 102 (e.g., dosages that are determined based on the physical characteristics of the individual 102 , the metabolic characteristics of the individual 102 , etc.).
- the receiving operation 1210may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with the individual.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with an individual 102 .
- One or more signals 126 that include numerous types of information associated with an individual 102may be received. Examples of such information include, but are not limited to, height, weight, age, substances used by an individual 102 (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, prescription medication, non-prescription medication, illicit drugs, etc.), body composition, allergies, physical characteristics (e.g., blood pressure, heart rate, intraocular pressure, etc.), activities, and the like.
- the receiving operation 1210may include receiving one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 through use of a secure connection.
- one or more signalsmay be received that are encrypted.
- one or more signalsmay be received through use of a secure mode.
- one or more signalsmay only be received by a specified individual.
- one or more signalsmay be received by a specified group.
- one or more signalsmay include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual.
- one or more signalsmay include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like).
- one or more signalsmay be received in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, receipt of one or more signals will cause a return receipt to be sent that confirms receipt of the one or more signals.
- the receiving operation 1210may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more agents.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more signals 126may include information associated with a specific pharmaceutical company, pharmaceutical distributor, hospital, pharmacy, health care facility, and the like, that have a supply of one or more agents 142 . Accordingly, in some embodiments, such signals 126 may be transmitted by one or more transmitting units 116 that are associated with one or more processing units 112 that are able to access one or more databases that provide location information for agents 142 .
- the receiving operation 1210may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with the location of the individual.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual 102 .
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of an individual 102 .
- one or more signals 126may include information that indicates where an individual 102 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.).
- the one or more signals 126may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates.
- GPSglobal positioning system
- FIG. 14illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 1200 of FIG. 12 .
- FIG. 14illustrates example embodiments where the processing operation 1220 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 1402 , operation 1404 , operation 1406 , operation 1408 , and/or operation 1410 .
- the processing operation 1220may include determining availability of the one or more agents.
- one or more processing units 112may determine the availability of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more processing units 112may access one or more databases to determine the availability of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more processing units 112may access one or more databases associated with a pharmaceutical company, a pharmacy, a pharmaceutical distributor, a health care facility, a health care provider, and the like, to determine if one or more agents 142 are available.
- the processing operation 1220may include determining one or more alternatives to the one or more agents.
- one or more processing units 112may determine one or more alternatives to one or more agents 142 .
- one or more processing units 112may determine that an identified agent 142 is not available and therefore select an alternative agent 142 that is available. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or more processing units 112 may have access to databases of available agents 142 such as those at pharmacies, hospitals, health care facilities, pharmaceutical distributors, pharmaceutical companies, and the like.
- one or more processing units 112may select an alternative agent 142 based on the insurance or health plan associated with an individual 102 .
- one or more processing units 112may select an alternative agent 142 that does not contraindicate another substance or medication that an individual 102 is using.
- the processing operation 1220may include determining if the one or more agents are covered by insurance carried by the individual.
- one or more processing units 112may determine if the one or more agents 142 are covered by insurance carried by the individual 102 .
- one or more processing units 112may access a database that contains information related to health care plans or insurance policies so that the one or more processing units 112 may be used to determine if the cost of one or more agents 142 will be covered by the plan and/or policy.
- one or more processing units 112may determine that the cost of an agent 142 is not covered by a plan or policy and may therefore determine a suitable alternative agent 142 that is covered by the plan or policy associated with an individual 102 .
- the processing operation 1220may include billing one or more providers for the one or more agents.
- one or more processing units 112may bill one or more providers for the one or more agents 142 .
- Numerous providersmay be billed for one or more agents 142 . Examples of such providers include, but are not limited to, insurance companies, flex spending accounts, Medicare, Blue Cross, Blue Shield, health maintenance organizations, and the like.
- the processing operation 1220may include selecting the one or more agents for delivery to the individual.
- one or more processing units 112may select one or more agents 142 for delivery to an individual 102 .
- one or more processing units 112may select the one or more agents 142 indicated in one or more received signals 126 for delivery to an individual 102 .
- one or more processing units 112may select an alternative to the one or more agents 142 indicated in one or more received signals 126 for delivery to an individual 102 .
- FIG. 15illustrates operational flow 1500 that includes operations 1510 and 1520 , that correspond to operations 1210 and 1220 as illustrated in FIG. 12 , with an optionally included packaging operation 1530 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 15 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the methoddiscussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 1500optionally includes a packaging operation 1530 involving packaging the one or more agents.
- one or more packaging units 138may be used to package one or more agents 142 .
- one or more packaging units 138may be used to package one or more agents 142 in packaging material.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 for administration to an individual 102 .
- one or more packaging units 138may package individual dosages of one or more agents 142 for a specific individual 102 .
- a packaging unit 138may be used for individualized agent 142 packaging.
- FIG. 16illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 1500 of FIG. 15 .
- FIG. 16illustrates example embodiments where the packaging operation 1530 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 1602 , operation 1604 , and/or operation 1606 .
- the packaging operation 1530may include formulating the one or more agents into unit dosage form.
- one or more packaging units 138may formulate one or more agents 142 into unit dosage form.
- a unit dosage formmay include one or more amounts of one or more agents 142 , such as pharmaceutical agents 142 , that are suitable as unitary dosages for an individual 102 with each unit containing a predetermined quantity of at least one agent 142 calculated to produce a desired effect, such as a therapeutic effect, in association with one or more suitable pharmaceutical carriers.
- Such unit dosage formsmay be packaged in numerous configurations that include, but are not limited to, tablets, capsules, ampoules, and other administration forms known in the art and described herein.
- two or more unit dosage forms of one or more agents 142may be packaged into an administration form.
- two unit dosage formsmay be wrapped into an administration form through use of a continuous wrapper such that they are released at different times following administration to an individual 102 .
- two unit dosage formsare included within one administration form.
- the packaging operation 1530may include packaging two or more of the agents into a single administration form.
- one or more packaging units 138may package two or more agents 142 into a single administration form.
- two agents 142may be wrapped into a single administration form through use of a continuous wrapper such that they are released at different times following administration to an individual 102 .
- two unit dosage formsmay be included within one administration form.
- the packaging operation 1530may include formulating the one or more agents into an administration form in response to input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more packaging units 138may formulate one or more agents 142 into an administration form in response to input 120 associated with an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- an individual 102may work at night where an agent 142 may interfere with the individual's function. Accordingly, one or more agents 142 may be formulated to be released during the day when the individual 102 is not working.
- one or more agents 142may be formulated for oral administration according to a preference of an individual 102 . Accordingly, one or more agents 142 may be formulated in numerous ways in response to input 120 associated with an individual 102 .
- FIG. 17illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 1500 of FIG. 15 .
- FIG. 17illustrates example embodiments where the packaging operation 1530 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 1702 , operation 1704 , and/or operation 1706 .
- the packaging operation 1530may include packaging the one or more agents with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
- one or more agents 142e.g., pharmaceuticals
- Such carriers or excipientsinclude, but are not limited to, croscarmellose sodium, providone, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, pregelatinized starch, polymers such as polyethylene glycols, lactose, lactose monohydrate, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, stearic acid and substantially any combination thereof. If a solid carrier is used, the one or more agents 142 may be tableted, placed in a hard gelatin capsule in powder or pellet form, packaged in the form of a troche or lozenge, and the like.
- one or more agents 142may be packaged with a liquid carrier or excipient.
- liquid carriersinclude syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, water, physiologically compatible buffers (i.e., Hanks solution and Ringers solution), physiological saline buffer, and the like. If a liquid carrier is used, the administration form may be in the form of a syrup, emulsion, drop, soft gelatin capsule, sterile injectable solution, suspension in an ampoule or vial, non-aqueous liquid suspension, and the like.
- One or more agents 142may be packaged in stable water-soluble administration forms.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of one or more agents 142may be dissolved in an aqueous solution of an organic or inorganic acid, such as 0.3M solution of succinic acid or citric acid.
- an agent 142may be dissolved in a suitable cosolvent or combination of cosolvents.
- suitable cosolventsinclude, but are not limited to, alcohol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol 300, polysorbate 80, glycerin and the like in concentrations ranging from 0-60% of the total volume.
- one or more agents 142may be dissolved in DMSO and diluted with water.
- the administration formmay also be in the form of a solution of a salt form of one or more agents 142 in an appropriate aqueous vehicle such as water or isotonic saline or dextrose solution.
- agents 142 that are hydrophobicmay be packaged through use of a cosolvent system comprising benzyl alcohol, a nonpolar surfactant, a water-miscible organic polymer, and an aqueous phase.
- the cosolvent systemmay be the VPD co-solvent system.
- VPDis a solution of 3 percent weight/volume benzyl alcohol, 8 percent weight/volume of the nonpolar surfactant polysorbate 80, and 65 percent weight/volume polyethylene glycol 300, made up to volume in absolute ethanol.
- the VPD co-solvent system(VPD:5W) consists of VPD diluted 1:1 with a 5 percent dextrose in water solution.
- This co-solvent systemdissolves hydrophobic agents 142 , and itself produces low toxicity upon systemic administration.
- the proportions of a co-solvent systemmay be varied considerably without destroying its solubility and toxicity characteristics.
- identity of the co-solvent componentsmay be varied: for example, other low-toxicity nonpolar surfactants may be used instead of polysorbate 80; the fraction size of polyethylene glycol may be varied; other biocompatible polymers may replace polyethylene glycol (i.e., polyvinyl pyrrolidone; and other sugars or polysaccharides may substitute for dextrose).
- Many other delivery systemsmay be used to administer hydrophobic agents 142 as well.
- liposomes and emulsionsare well known examples of delivery vehicles or carriers for hydrophobic drugs.
- Certain organic solventssuch as dimethysulfoxide also may be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity.
- agents 142may be packaged as salts with pharmaceutically compatible counter ions.
- Pharmaceutically compatible saltsmay be formed with many acids, including hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts of agents 142 tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free-base forms.
- one or more agents 142may be packaged with pharmaceutically acceptable poloxamers, humectants, binders, disintegrants, fillers, diluents, lubricants, glidants, flow enhancers, compression aids, coloring agents, sweeteners, preservatives, suspending agents, dispersing agents, film formers, coatings, flavoring agents, printing inks, or substantially any combination thereof.
- the packaging operation 1530may include packaging the one or more agents with packaging material.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 with packaging material.
- One or more agents 142e.g., pharmaceuticals
- packaging materialinclude, but are not limited to, containers, boxes, ampoules, vials, syringes, and the like.
- packaging materialmay include advertising.
- packaging materialmay include instructions for administration.
- Such instructionsmay include time for administration, route of administration, the name of the individual 102 to whom the one or more agents 142 are to be administered, the identity of the one or more agents 142 , the dosage of the one or more agents 142 , appropriate buffers for suspension of the one or more agents 142 , the source of the one or more agents 142 , the name of a physician or physicians who prescribed the one or more agents 142 , the date when the one or more agents 142 were prescribed, the date when the one or more agents 142 were packaged, the date when the one or more agents 142 were manufactured, the expiration date of the one or more agents 142 , and the like.
- the packaging operation 1530may include packaging the one or more agents with packaging material and addressing the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 with packaging material and address the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 in one or more dispensing containers (e.g., a box, ampoule, vial, syringe, etc.), and then package the one or more dispensing containers in packaging material (e.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.) that is addressed for delivery to one or more addresses.
- packaging materiale.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more prepackaged agents 142 in one or more shipping containers (e.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.) and addressing the one or more shipping containers for delivery to one or more addresses.
- shipping containerse.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.
- addressesinclude, but are not limited to, addresses to hospitals, military field stations, pharmacies, individuals, health care facilities, and the like.
- FIG. 18illustrates operational flow 1800 that includes operations 1810 , 1820 , and 1830 , that correspond to operations 1510 , 1520 , and 1530 as illustrated in FIG. 15 , with an optionally included shipping operation 1840 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- discussion and explanationmay be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 1800optionally includes a shipping operation 1840 involving shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages that include one or more agents 142 .
- a shipping unit 140may include logic that selects one or more routes that may be used to deliver one or more packages that include one or more agents 142 .
- a shipping unit 140may select a shipping route through the Southern United States in the winter time to avoid shipping delays due to snowfall.
- one or more shipping units 140may select from numerous routes to ship one or more packages.
- a shipping unit 140may select a service to ship a package. Examples of such shipping services include, but are not limited to, United States Postal Service, United Postal Service, Federal Express, and the like.
- FIG. 19illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 1800 of FIG. 18 .
- FIG. 19illustrates example embodiments where the shipping operation 1840 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 1902 , operation 1904 , operation 1906 , and/or operation 1908 .
- the shipping operation 1840may include shipping the one or more packages through use of one or more common carriers.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages through use of one or more common carriers.
- one or more shipping units 140may include logic that selects one or more common carriers for shipping one or more packages. Examples of common carriers include, but are not limited to, airline shipping services, ground shipping services, nautical shipping services, and the like.
- the shipping operation 1840may include shipping the one or more packages to the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages to an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- the shipping operation 1840may include shipping the one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities.
- treatment facilitiesinclude, but are not limited to, hospitals, clinics, military field hospitals, ship infirmaries, and the like.
- the shipping operation 1840may include shipping the one or more packages to one or more pharmacies.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages to one or more pharmacies.
- FIG. 20illustrates an operational flow 2000 representing examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- discussion and explanationmay be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions of FIGS. 1-1C .
- the various operationsare presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.
- the operational flow 2000includes an identifying operation 2010 involving identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips.
- one or more analysis units 110may be used to identify one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips 108 .
- the operational flow 2000includes an accepting operation 2020 involving accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more accepting units 118may be used to accept input 120 associated with an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- the operational flow 2000includes a transmitting operation 2030 involving transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more transmitting units 116may be used to transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips 108 and accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- FIG. 21illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2000 of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 21illustrates example embodiments where the identifying operation 2010 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 2102 , operation 2104 , and/or operation 2106 .
- the identifying operation 2010may include accepting the one or more samples with the one or more microfluidic chips.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 .
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 that include one or more liquids.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 that include one or more solids.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 that include one or more gases.
- one or more microfluidic chips 108may accept one or more samples 104 that include one or more biological samples 104 .
- biological samples 104include, but are not limited to, blood, cerebrospinal fluid, mucus, breath, urine, fecal material, skin, tissue, tears, hair, and the like.
- the identifying operation 2010may include processing the one or more samples with the one or more microfluidic chips to facilitate analysis of one or more pathogen indicators associated with the one or more samples.
- the identifying operation 2010may include processing one or more samples 104 with one or more microfluidic chips 108 through use of polynucleotide interaction, protein interaction, peptide interaction, antibody interaction, chemical interaction, diffusion, filtration, chromatography, aptamer interaction, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, electrophoresis, immunoassay, competition assay, or substantially any combination thereof.
- the identifying operation 2010may include analyzing one or more pathogen indicators with one or more analysis units that are configured to operably associate with the one or more microfluidic chips.
- identifying operation 2010may include analyzing the one or more pathogen indicators with one or more analysis units 110 through use of at least one technique that includes spectroscopy, electrochemical detection, polynucleotide detection, fluorescence anisotropy, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, electron transfer, enzyme assay, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, chromatography, immunoprecipitation, immunoseparation, aptamer binding, electrophoresis, use of a CCD camera, immunoassay, or substantially any combination thereof.
- FIG. 22illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2000 of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 22illustrates example embodiments where the accepting operation 2020 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 2202 , and/or operation 2204 .
- the accepting operation 2020may include accepting input associated with one or more parameters related to the individual.
- one or more accepting units 118may accept input 120 associated with one or more parameters related to an individual 102 .
- the one or more parametersmay be physical parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be psychological parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be financial parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be health care provided related parameters (e.g., physician's name, insurance provider, HMO name, prescription plan, etc.).
- the accepting operation 2020may include accepting input associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or location.
- one or more accepting units 118may accept input 120 associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition (e.g., body mass index, fat percentage), substance use (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, illicit drugs), liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage (e.g., prescription plan, insurance limits, limitations on providers, HMO limitations), pregnancy status (e.g., pregnant, not pregnant, unknown), blood pressure, child bearing plans (e.g., yes, no, time when planning to become pregnant), one or more activities (e.g., travel, athletic activities, occupational activities, driving), location (e.g., travel to foreign nation, local address, town, city), or substantially any combination thereof FIG.
- substance usee.g., alcohol, tobacco, illicit drugs
- liver healthe.g., allergies
- prescription drug usee.g., non-prescription drug use
- insurance coveragee.g., prescription plan, insurance limits, limitations on providers, HMO limitations
- pregnancy statuse.g.,
- FIG. 23illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2000 of FIG. 20 .
- FIG. 23illustrates example embodiments where the transmitting operation 2030 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 2302 , operation 2304 , operation 2306 , and/or operation 2308 .
- the transmitting operation 2030may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with an identity of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with an identity of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with a particular strain of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more pathogens 106 that are resistant to one or more antibiotics.
- the transmitting operation 2030may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with virulence of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with virulence of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- some pathogenic strains of E. coliexhibit increased virulence relative to other strains of E. coli .
- Such virulent strainsmay be identified by the presence of virulence determinants.
- virulence determinantsinclude, but are not limited to, adhesions (e.g., CFAI/CFAII, type 1 fimbriae, P fimbriae, S fimbriae, Intimin), invasions (e.g., hemolysisn, siderophores and siderophore uptake systems, Shigella -like “invasins” for intracellular invasion and spread), toxins (e.g., LT toxin, ST toxin, Shiga-like toxin, cytotoxins, endotoxin LPS), antiphagocytic surface properties (e.g., capsules, K antigens, lipopolysaccharides), somatic antigens, flagellar antigens, and the like. Accordingly, one or more signals may include information related to numerous types of virulence indicators.
- adhesionse.g., CFAI/CFAII, type 1 fimbriae, P fimbriae, S fimbriae
- the transmitting operation 2030may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or location.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, location, or substantially any combination thereof, that is associated with an individual 102 .
- the transmitting operation 2030may include transmitting the one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 through use of a secure connection.
- one or more signalsmay be encrypted.
- one or more signalsmay be sent through use of a secure mode of transmission.
- one or more signalsmay be transmitted to a specified individual.
- one or more signalsmay be transmitted to a specified group.
- one or more signalsmay include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual.
- one or more signalsmay include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like).
- one or more signalsmay be sent in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent with information that includes a request for a return receipt.
- FIG. 24illustrates operational flow 2400 that includes operations 2410 , 2420 , and 2430 , that correspond to operations 2010 , 2020 , and 2030 as illustrated in FIG. 20 , with an optionally included receiving operation 2440 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- discussion and explanationmay be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 2400optionally includes a receiving operation 2440 involving receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include the identity of one or more chemical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one pathogen 106 . Numerous chemical agents 142 may be identified.
- Examples of such chemical agents 142include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, ozone, peroxides, chlorinated compounds, acids, bases, alcohols, and the like (e.g., Merck Index, Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. (2001) and Mosby's Drug Guide, An Imprint of Elsevier, St. Louis, Mo. (2004)).
- such chemical agents 142may be identified that are specific for one or more identified pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 25illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2400 of FIG. 24 .
- FIG. 25illustrates example embodiments where the receiving operation 2440 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 2502 , operation 2504 , operation 2506 , operation 2508 , and/or operation 2510 .
- the receiving operation 2440may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with an identity of at least one of the one or more agents.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with an identity of at least one of the one or more agents 142 .
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the brand name, the generic name, the chemical name, the structure, identifiers associated with an agent 142 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- the receiving operation 2440may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with methods of administration for at least one of the one or more agents.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with methods of administration for at least one of one or more agents 142 .
- methods of administrationinclude, but are not limited to, oral administration, intravenous administration, transdermal administration, intraperitoneal administration, intraocular administration, nasal administration, pulmonary administration, rectal administration, vaginal administration, and the like.
- the receiving operation 2440may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with contraindicators of the one or more agents.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with contraindicators of the one or more agents 142 .
- contraindicatorsmay include prescription pharmaceutical agents 142 (e.g., opiates, psychotropic drugs, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, lithium, alpha-blockers, beta-blockers, antibiotics, cholesterol lowering drugs, heart medications).
- prescription pharmaceutical agents 142e.g., opiates, psychotropic drugs, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, lithium, alpha-blockers, beta-blockers, antibiotics, cholesterol lowering drugs, heart medications.
- contraindicatorsmay include non-prescription pharmaceutical agents 142 (e.g., antacids, acetaminophen, aspirin, cold medications, anti-histamines).
- contraindicatorsmay include substances such as nicotine, alcohol, nutraceuticals, and the like.
- Saint John's Wortmay be indicated as a contraindicator of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors.
- the receiving operation 2440may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with side-effects of the one or more agents.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with side-effects of the one or more agents 142 .
- one or more signals 126may include information associated with lower potassium levels associated with diuretic usage.
- Signals 126may include information associated with numerous side-effects that include mental side-effects (e.g., excitability, depression, irritability), physical side-effects (e.g., drowsiness, insomnia, dizziness, reduced coordination, increased blood pressure), and the like.
- the receiving operation 2440may include receiving the one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 through use of a secure connection.
- one or more signalsmay be received that are encrypted.
- one or more signalsmay be received through use of a secure mode.
- one or more signalsmay only be received by a specified individual.
- one or more signalsmay be received by a specified group.
- one or more signalsmay include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual.
- one or more signalsmay include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like).
- one or more signalsmay be received in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, receipt of one or more signals will cause a return receipt to be sent that confirms receipt of the one or more signals.
- FIG. 26illustrates operational flow 2600 that includes operations 2610 , 2620 , 2630 , and 2640 , that correspond to operations 2410 , 2420 , 2430 , and 2440 as illustrated in FIG. 24 , with an optionally included displaying operation 2650 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- discussion and explanationmay be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 2600optionally includes a displaying operation 2650 involving displaying the information associated with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more display units 114may display information associated with one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 . Numerous types of information may be displayed. Examples of such information include, but are not limited to, the identity of an agent 142 , dosage of an agent 142 , method of administration for an agent 142 , and the like.
- FIG. 27illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2600 of FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 27illustrates example embodiments where the displaying operation 2650 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 2702 , operation 2704 , and/or operation 2706 .
- the displaying operation 2650may include displaying the information on one or more passive displays.
- one or more display units 114may display information on one or more passive displays.
- one or more display units 114may include one or more liquid crystal displays (LCD).
- LCDliquid crystal displays
- the displaying operation 2650may include displaying the information on one or more active displays.
- one or more display units 114may display information on one or more active displays.
- Numerous active display units 114are known and include, but are not limited to, quarter-video graphics array (QVGA), video graphics array (VGA), super video graphics array (SVGA), extended graphics array (XGA), wide extended graphics array (WXGA), super extended graphics array (SXGA), ultra extended graphics array (UXGA), wide super extended graphics array (WSXGA), and wide ultra extended graphics array (WUXGA).
- the displaying operation 2650may include displaying the information in graphical form.
- one or more display units 114may display information in graphical form.
- Numerous types of graphical formatsmay be used. Examples of such graphical formats include, but are not limited to, use of shapes, use of colors, use of symbols (e.g., smiley face, frowny face, thumbs up sign, thumbs down sign, histograms, bar graphs, pie charts, and the like).
- FIG. 28illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2600 of FIG. 26 .
- FIG. 28illustrates example embodiments where the displaying operation 2650 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 2802 , operation 2804 , and/or operation 2806 .
- the displaying operation 2650may include displaying the information in audio form.
- one or more display units 114may display information in audio form.
- one or more display units 114may display information in voice format.
- a human voicemay indicate the identity of one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of one or more pathogens 106 . Numerous types of information may be presented in audio format.
- the displaying operation 2650may include displaying the information in typographical form.
- one or more display units 114may display information in typographical form.
- Informationmay be presented in numerous languages (e.g., Italian, Spanish, English, Japanese).
- the typographical formmay include numbers.
- the displaying operation 2650may include displaying the information in Braille.
- one or more display units 114may display information in Braille.
- one or more display units 114may include a pad on which messages in Braille may be displayed.
- such padsmay be constructed of an elastomeric material that is positioned relative to a series of movable rods such that the rods may be positioned to create messages in Braille.
- one or more display units 114may print information in Braille.
- FIG. 29illustrates an operational flow 2900 representing examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- discussion and explanationmay be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions of FIGS. 1-1C .
- the various operationsare presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.
- the operational flow 2900includes a receiving operation 2910 involving receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual.
- one or more receiving units 136may be used to receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 .
- the operational flow 2900includes a receiving operation 2920 involving receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more receiving units 136may be used to receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with accepting input 120 associated with an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- the operational flow 2900includes a determining operation 2930 involving determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more processing units 112may be used to determine one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 30illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2900 of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 30illustrates example embodiments where the receiving operation 2910 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 3002 , operation 3004 , operation 3006 , operation 3008 , and/or operation 3010 .
- the receiving operation 2910may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with an identity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with an identity of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 . Such information may include information associated with a particular strain of one or more pathogens 106 .
- the receiving operation 2910may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with a concentration of the at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with a concentration of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 .
- such informationmay indicate the severity of a pathogen infection.
- such informationmay be used to track treatment of an infection.
- one or more signals 126may be received at times following the initiation of a treatment schedule. Accordingly, the effectiveness of a treatment scheme may be monitored.
- the receiving operation 2910may include receiving one or more signals that include information associated with drug resistance of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with drug resistance of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more pathogens 106 that are resistant to one or more antibiotics.
- the receiving operation 2910may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with virulence of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with virulence of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- some pathogenic strains of E. coliexhibit increased virulence relative to other strains of E. coli .
- Such virulent strainsmay be identified by the presence of virulence determinants.
- virulence determinantsinclude, but are not limited to, adhesions (e.g., CFAI/CFAII, type 1 fimbriae, P fimbriae, S fimbriae, Intimin), invasions (e.g., hemolysisn, siderophores and siderophore uptake systems, Shigella -like “invasins” for intracellular invasion and spread), toxins (e.g., LT toxin, ST toxin, Shiga-like toxin, cytotoxins, endotoxin LPS), antiphagocytic surface properties (e.g., capsules, K antigens, lipopolysaccharides), somatic antigens, flagellar antigens, and the like. Accordingly, one or more signals may include information related to numerous types of virulence indicators.
- adhesionse.g., CFAI/CFAII, type 1 fimbriae, P fimbriae, S fimbriae
- the receiving operation 2910may include receiving the one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 through use of a secure connection.
- one or more signalsmay be received that are encrypted.
- one or more signalsmay be received through use of a secure mode.
- one or more signalsmay only be received by a specified individual.
- one or more signalsmay be received by a specified group.
- one or more signalsmay include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual.
- one or more signalsmay include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like).
- one or more signalsmay be received in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, receipt of one or more signals will cause a return receipt to be sent that confirms receipt of the one or more signals.
- FIG. 31illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2900 of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 31illustrates example embodiments where the receiving operation 2920 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 3102 , operation 3104 , and/or operation 3106 .
- the receiving operation 2920may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more parameters related to the individual.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more parameters related to an individual 102 .
- the one or more parametersmay be physical parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be psychological parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be financial parameters.
- the one or more parametersmay be health care provided related parameters (e.g., physician's name, insurance provider, HMO name, prescription plan, etc.).
- the receiving operation 2920may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or location.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, location, or substantially any combination thereof.
- the receiving operation 2920may include receiving the one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
- one or more receiving units 136may receive one or more signals 126 through use of a secure connection.
- one or more signalsmay be received that are encrypted.
- one or more signalsmay be received through use of a secure mode.
- one or more signalsmay only be received by a specified individual.
- one or more signalsmay be received by a specified group.
- one or more signalsmay include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual.
- one or more signalsmay include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like).
- one or more signalsmay be received in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, receipt of one or more signals will cause a return receipt to be sent that confirms receipt of the one or more signals.
- FIG. 32illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2900 of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 32illustrates example embodiments where the receiving operation 2930 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 3202 , operation 3204 , operation 3206 , operation 3208 , and/or operation 3210 .
- the determining operation 2930may include identifying the one or more chemical agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more chemical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 that are identified. Numerous chemical agents 142 may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of one or more pathogens 106 .
- Examples of such chemical agents 142include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, ozone, peroxides, chlorinated compounds, acids, bases, alcohols, and the like (e.g., Merck Index, Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. (2001) and Mosby's Drug Guide, An Imprint of Elsevier, St. Louis, Mo. (2004)).
- such chemical agents 142may be specific for one or more identified pathogens 106 .
- the determining operation 2930may include identifying the one or more mechanical agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more mechanical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one or more pathogens 106 that are identified. Examples of such mechanical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, ultraviolet light, irradiation, and the like. In some embodiments, such mechanical agents 142 may be specific for one or more identified pathogens 106 .
- the determining operation 2930may include identifying the one or more bioagents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more bioagents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more bacteriophages that may be used to reduce the disease causing ability of a bacteria.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more invasive recombinant bacteria that may be used to deliver a gene product that may be used to reduce the disease causing ability of one or more pathogens.
- such recombinant bacteriamay be engineered to produce an antibiotic.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more inactivated pathogens (e.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi) that may be used to induce an immune response against one or more pathogens.
- inactivated pathogense.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi
- the determining operation 2930may include identifying the one or more agents that are not contraindicated by one or more substances used by the individual.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that are not contraindicated by one or more substances used by an individual 102 .
- an individual 102may use one or more prescription medications.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that do not contraindicate the one or more prescription medications.
- an individual 102may use one or more substances such as tobacco or alcohol that may contraindicate an agent 142 .
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that are not affected by one or more substances used by an individual 102 and/or that do not affect one or more substances used by an individual 102 . Accordingly, one or more processing units 112 may identify one or more agents 142 with regard to numerous types of substances used by an individual 102 .
- the determining operation 2930may include identifying the one or more additional agents that act synergistically with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more additional agents 142 that act synergistically with the one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more additional agents 142 that increase the effectiveness of one or more antibiotics.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more antibacterial adjuvants (e.g., beta-lactamase inhibitors) that may act synergistically with one or more antibiotics.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that up regulate an immune response against a pathogen that may act synergistically with one or more other agents 142 .
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that down regulate an immune response against a pathogen that may act synergistically with one or more other agents 142 .
- FIG. 33illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 2900 of FIG. 29 .
- FIG. 33illustrates example embodiments where the receiving operation 2930 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 3302 , operation 3304 , and/or operation 3306 .
- the determining operation 2930may include identifying the one or more agents in response to one or more parameters associated with the individual.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 in response to one or more parameters associated with the individual 102 .
- one or more agents 142may be identified for application to a specific individual 102 .
- Such embodimentsprovide for personalized selection and dosing of agents 142 that may be used to treat pathogen infection.
- Numerous parameters associated with an individual 102may be considered. Examples of such parameters include, but are not limited to, size, weight, allergies, body composition, substance use, and the like.
- the determining operation 2930may include identifying the one or more agent in response to at least one parameter associated with the individual that includes age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or child bearing plans.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 in response to at least one parameter associated with the individual 102 that includes age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, or substantially any combination thereof.
- the determining operation 2930may include identifying the one or more agents that reduce the pathogenicity of at least one virus, bacterium, worm, egg, cyst, protozoan, single-celled organism, fungus, algae, pathogenic protein, or microbe.
- one or more processing units 112may identify one or more agents 142 that reduce the pathogenicity of at least one virus, bacterium, worm, egg, cyst, protozoan, single-celled organism, fungus, algae, pathogenic protein, or microbe.
- Numerous agents 142are known that will reduce the pathogenicity of one or more pathogens 106 (The Merck Index, 13th Edition, An Encyclopedia of Chemicals, Drugs, and Biologicals, Merck & Co.
- FIG. 34illustrates operational flow 3400 that includes operations 3410 , 3420 , and 3430 , that correspond to operations 2910 , 2920 , and 2930 as illustrated in FIG. 29 , with an optionally included displaying operation 3440 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- discussion and explanationmay be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 3400optionally includes a displaying operation 3440 involving displaying information associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more display units 114may be used to display information associated with one or more agents 142 .
- Numerous types of display units 114may be used to display information. Examples of such display units 114 include, but are not limited to, liquid crystal displays, light emitting diode displays, audio displays, Braille displays, graphical displays, and the like. Numerous types of information may be displayed.
- Examples of such types of informationinclude, but are not limited to, the identity of one or more agents 142 , the dosage of one or more agents 142 , contraindications associated with the one or more agents 142 , administration method to be used with one or more agents 142 , administration schedule associated with one or more agents 142 , and the like.
- FIG. 35illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 3400 of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 35illustrates example embodiments where the displaying operation 3440 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 3502 , operation 3504 , and/or operation 3506 .
- the displaying operation 3440may include displaying the information on one or more passive displays.
- one or more display units 114may display information on one or more passive displays.
- one or more display units 114may include one or more liquid crystal displays (LCD).
- LCDliquid crystal displays
- the displaying operation 3440may include displaying the information on one or more active displays.
- one or more display units 114may display information on one or more active displays.
- Numerous active display units 114are known and include, but are not limited to, quarter-video graphics array (QVGA), video graphics array (VGA), super video graphics array (SVGA), extended graphics array (XGA), wide extended graphics array (WXGA), super extended graphics array (SXGA), ultra extended graphics array (UXGA), wide super extended graphics array (WSXGA), and wide ultra extended graphics array (WUXGA).
- the displaying operation 3440may include displaying the information in graphical form.
- one or more display units 114may display information in graphical form.
- Numerous types of graphical formatsmay be used. Examples of such graphical formats include, but are not limited to, use of shapes, use of colors, use of symbols (e.g., smiley face, frowny face, thumbs up sign, thumbs down sign, histograms, bar graphs, pie charts, and the like).
- FIG. 36illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 3400 of FIG. 34 .
- FIG. 36illustrates example embodiments where the displaying operation 3440 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 3602 , operation 3604 , and/or operation 3606 .
- the displaying operation 3440may include displaying the information in audio form.
- one or more display units 114may display information in audio form.
- one or more display units 114may display information in voice format.
- a human voicemay indicate the identity of one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of one or more pathogens 106 . Numerous types of information may be presented in audio format.
- the displaying operation 3440may include displaying the information in typographical form.
- one or more display units 114may display information in typographical form.
- Informationmay be presented in numerous languages (e.g., Italian, Spanish, English, Japanese).
- the typographical formmay include numbers.
- the displaying operation 3440may include displaying the information in Braille.
- one or more display units 114may display information in Braille.
- one or more display units 114may include a pad on which messages in Braille may be displayed.
- such padsmay be constructed of an elastomeric material that is positioned relative to a series of movable rods such that the rods may be positioned to create messages in Braille.
- one or more display units 114may print information in Braille.
- FIG. 37illustrates operational flow 3700 that includes operations 3710 , 3720 , 3730 , and 3740 , that correspond to operations 3410 , 3420 , 3430 , and 3440 as illustrated in FIG. 34 , with an optionally included transmitting operation 3750 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 37 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the methoddiscussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 3700optionally includes a transmitting operation 3750 involving transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more transmitting units 116may transmit signals 126 through use of numerous technologies. For example, such signals 126 may be transmitted through use of the internet, radio waves, optical cables, cellular telephone connections, telephone connections, satellite telephone connections, and the like.
- the one or more signals 126may be transmitted to, and received by, numerous types of receivers. For example, one or more signals 126 may be received by pharmacies, hospitals, pharmaceutical companies, health care providers, nutraceutical companies, and the like.
- FIG. 38illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 3700 of FIG. 37 .
- FIG. 38illustrates example embodiments where the transmitting operation 3750 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 3802 , operation 3804 , operation 3806 , operation 3808 , operation 3810 , and/or operation 3812 .
- the transmitting operation 3750may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the identity of one or more agents.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the identity of one or more agents 142 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the brand name, the generic name, the chemical name, the structure, identifiers associated with an agent 142 , or substantially any combination thereof.
- the transmitting operation 3750may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with an individual.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with an individual 102 .
- One or more signals 126 that include numerous types of information associated with an individual 102may be transmitted. Examples of such information include, but are not limited to, height, weight, age, substances used by an individual 102 (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, prescription medication, non-prescription medication, illicit drugs, etc.), body composition, allergies, physical characteristics (e.g., blood pressure, heart rate, intraocular pressure, etc.), activities, and the like.
- the transmitting operation 3750may include transmitting the one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 through use of a secure connection.
- one or more signalsmay be encrypted.
- one or more signalsmay be sent through use of a secure mode of transmission.
- one or more signalsmay be transmitted to a specified individual.
- one or more signalsmay be transmitted to a specified group.
- one or more signalsmay include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual.
- one or more signalsmay include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like).
- one or more signalsmay be sent in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent with information that includes a request for a return receipt.
- the transmitting operation 3750may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more pathogens.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the one or more pathogens 106 .
- the one or more signals 126may include numerous types of information associated with one or more pathogens 106 . Examples of such information include the identity of a pathogen 106 , the concentration of a pathogen 106 , drug resistance characteristics of a pathogen 106 , and the like.
- the transmitting operation 3750may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more pathogens.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with where an individual 102 is physically experiencing a pathogen infection (e.g., eye infection, nasal infection, gastrointestinal tract infection, etc).
- a pathogen infectione.g., eye infection, nasal infection, gastrointestinal tract infection, etc.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of the pathogen 106 .
- one or more signals 126may include information that indicates where the pathogen 106 and/or individual 102 who is infected with the pathogen 106 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.).
- the one or more signals 126may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates.
- GPSglobal positioning system
- the transmitting operation 3750may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual.
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual 102 .
- one or more transmitting units 116may transmit one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of an individual 102 .
- one or more signals 126may include information that indicates where an individual 102 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.).
- the one or more signals 126may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates.
- GPSglobal positioning system
- FIG. 39illustrates operational flow 3900 that includes operations 3910 , 3920 , 3930 , 3940 , and 3950 that correspond to operations 3710 , 3720 , 3730 , 3740 , and 3750 as illustrated in FIG. 37 with an optionally included packaging operation 3960 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 39 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the methoddiscussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts.
- the operational flow 3900optionally includes a packaging operation 3960 involving packaging the one or more agents.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 .
- one or more packaging units 138may be used to package one or more agents 142 in packaging material.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 for administration to an individual 102 .
- one or more packaging units 138may package individual dosages of one or more agents 142 for a specific individual 102 . Accordingly, in such embodiments, a packaging unit 138 may be used for individualized agent 142 packaging.
- FIG. 40illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 3900 of FIG. 39 .
- FIG. 40illustrates example embodiments where the packaging operation 3960 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 4002 , operation 4004 , and/or operation 4006 .
- the packaging operation 3960may include formulating the one or more agents into unit dosage form.
- one or more packaging units 138may formulate one or more agents 142 into unit dosage form.
- a unit dosage formmay include one or more amounts of one or more agents 142 , such as pharmaceutical agents 142 , that are suitable as unitary dosages for an individual 102 with each unit containing a predetermined quantity of at least one agent 142 calculated to produce a desired effect, such as a therapeutic effect, in association with one or more suitable pharmaceutical carriers.
- Such unit dosage formsmay be packaged in numerous configurations that include, but are not limited to, tablets, capsules, ampoules, and other administration forms known in the art and described herein.
- two or more unit dosage forms of one or more agents 142may be packaged into an administration form.
- two unit dosage formsmay be wrapped into an administration form through use of a continuous wrapper such that they are released at different times following administration to an individual 102 .
- two unit dosage formsare included within one administration form.
- the packaging operation 3960may include packaging two or more of the agents into a single administration form.
- one or more packaging units 138may package two or more agents 142 into a single administration form.
- two agents 142may be wrapped into a single administration form through use of a continuous wrapper such that they are released at different times following administration to an individual 102 .
- two unit dosage formsmay be included within one administration form.
- the packaging operation 3960may include formulating the one or more agents into an administration form in response to input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more packaging units 138may formulate one or more agents 142 into an administration form in response to input 120 associated with an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- an individual 102may work at night where an agent 142 may interfere with the individual's function. Accordingly, one or more agents 142 may be formulated to be released during the day when the individual 102 is not working.
- one or more agents 142may be formulated for oral administration according to a preference of an individual 102 . Accordingly, one or more agents 142 may be formulated in numerous ways in response to input 120 associated with an individual 102 .
- FIG. 41illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 3900 of FIG. 39 .
- FIG. 41illustrates example embodiments where the packaging operation 3960 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 4102 , operation 4104 , and/or operation 4106 .
- the packaging operation 3960may include packaging the one or more agents into one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
- one or more agents 142e.g., pharmaceuticals
- Such carriers or excipientsinclude, but are not limited to, croscarmellose sodium, povidone, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, pregelatinized starch, polymers such as polyethylene glycols, lactose, lactose monohydrate, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, stearic acid and substantially any combination thereof. If a solid carrier is used, the one or more agents 142 may be tableted, placed in a hard gelatin capsule in powder or pellet form, packaged in the form of a troche or lozenge, and the like.
- one or more agents 142may be packaged with a liquid carrier or excipient.
- liquid carriersinclude syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, water, physiologically compatible buffers (i.e., Hanks solution and Ringers solution), physiological saline buffer, and the like. If a liquid carrier is used, the administration form may be in the form of a syrup, emulsion, drop, soft gelatin capsule, sterile injectable solution, suspension in an ampoule or vial, non-aqueous liquid suspension, and the like.
- One or more agents 142may be packaged in stable water-soluble administration forms.
- a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of one or more agents 142may be dissolved in an aqueous solution of an organic or inorganic acid, such as 0.3M solution of succinic acid or citric acid.
- an agent 142may be dissolved in a suitable cosolvent or combination of cosolvents.
- suitable cosolventsinclude, but are not limited to, alcohol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol 300, polysorbate 80, glycerin and the like in concentrations ranging from 0-60% of the total volume.
- one or more agents 142may be dissolved in DMSO and diluted with water.
- the administration formmay also be in the form of a solution of a salt form of one or more agents 142 in an appropriate aqueous vehicle such as water or isotonic saline or dextrose solution.
- agents 142 that are hydrophobicmay be packaged through use of a cosolvent system comprising benzyl alcohol, a nonpolar surfactant, a water-miscible organic polymer, and an aqueous phase.
- the cosolvent systemmay be the VPD co-solvent system.
- VPDis a solution of 3 percent weight/volume benzyl alcohol, 8 percent weight/volume of the nonpolar surfactant polysorbate 80, and 65 percent weight/volume polyethylene glycol 300, made up to volume in absolute ethanol.
- the VPD co-solvent system(VPD:5W) consists of VPD diluted 1:1 with a 5 percent dextrose in water solution.
- This co-solvent systemdissolves hydrophobic agents 142 , and itself produces low toxicity upon systemic administration.
- the proportions of a co-solvent systemmay be varied considerably without destroying its solubility and toxicity characteristics.
- identity of the co-solvent componentsmay be varied: for example, other low-toxicity nonpolar surfactants may be used instead of polysorbate 80; the fraction size of polyethylene glycol may be varied; other biocompatible polymers may replace polyethylene glycol (i.e., polyvinyl pyrrolidone; and other sugars or polysaccharides may substitute for dextrose).
- Many other delivery systemsmay be used to administer hydrophobic agents 142 as well.
- liposomes and emulsionsare well known examples of delivery vehicles or carriers for hydrophobic drugs.
- Certain organic solventssuch as dimethysulfoxide also may be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity.
- agents 142may be packaged as salts with pharmaceutically compatible counter ions.
- Pharmaceutically compatible saltsmay be formed with many acids, including hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts of agents 142 tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free-base forms.
- one or more agents 142may be packaged with pharmaceutically acceptable poloxamers, humectants, binders, disintegrants, fillers, diluents, lubricants, glidants, flow enhancers, compression aids, coloring agents, sweeteners, preservatives, suspending agents, dispersing agents, film formers, coatings, flavoring agents, printing inks, or substantially any combination thereof.
- the packaging operation 3960may include packaging the one or more agents into packaging material.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 with packaging material.
- One or more agents 142e.g., pharmaceuticals
- packaging materialinclude, but are not limited to, containers, boxes, ampoules, vials, syringes, and the like.
- packaging materialmay include advertising.
- packaging materialmay include instructions for administration.
- Such instructionsmay include time for administration, route of administration, the name of the individual 102 to whom the one or more agents 142 are to be administered, the identity of the one or more agents 142 , the dosage of the one or more agents 142 , appropriate buffers for suspension of the one or more agents 142 , the source of the one or more agents 142 , the name of a physician or physicians who prescribed the one or more agents 142 , the date when the one or more agents 142 were prescribed, the date when the one or more agents 142 were packaged, the date when the one or more agents 142 were manufactured, the expiration date of the one or more agents 142 , and the like.
- the packaging operation 3960may include packaging the one or more agents into packaging material and addressing the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 with packaging material and address the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more agents 142 in one or more dispensing containers (e.g., a box, ampoule, vial, syringe, etc.), and then package the one or more dispensing containers in packaging material (e.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.) that is addressed for delivery to one or more addresses.
- packaging materiale.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.
- one or more packaging units 138may package one or more prepackaged agents 142 in one or more shipping containers (e.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.) and addressing the one or more shipping containers for delivery to one or more addresses.
- shipping containerse.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.
- addressesinclude, but are not limited to, addresses to hospitals, military field stations, pharmacies, individuals, health care facilities, and the like.
- FIG. 42illustrates operational flow 4200 that includes operations 4210 , 4220 , 4230 , 4240 , 4250 , and 4260 that correspond to operations 3910 , 3920 , 3930 , 3940 , 3950 , and 3960 as illustrated in FIG. 39 with an optionally included shipping operation 4270 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one or more pathogens 106 and determining one or more agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- FIG. 42 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the methoddiscussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples of FIGS.
- the operational flow 4200optionally includes a shipping operation 4270 involving shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
- one or more shipping units 140may ship one or more agents 142 .
- a shipping unit 140may include logic that selects one or more routes that may be used to deliver one or more packages that include one or more agents 142 .
- a shipping unit 140may select a shipping route through the Southern United States in the winter time to avoid shipping delays due to snowfall.
- one or more shipping units 140may select from numerous routes to ship one or more packages.
- a shipping unit 140may select a service to ship a package. Examples of such shipping services include, but are not limited to, United States Postal Service, United Postal Service, Federal Express, and the like.
- FIG. 43illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 4200 of FIG. 42 .
- FIG. 43illustrates example embodiments where the shipping operation 4270 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 4302 , and/or operation 4304 .
- the shipping operation 4270may include shipping the one or more packages through use of one or more common carriers.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages through use of one or more common carriers.
- one or more shipping units 140may include logic that selects one or more common carriers for shipping one or more packages. Examples of common carriers include, but are not limited to, airline shipping services, ground shipping services, nautical shipping services, and the like.
- the shipping operation 4270may include shipping the one or more packages to the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages to an individual 102 from whom one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- FIG. 44illustrates alternative embodiments of the example operational flow 4200 of FIG. 42 .
- FIG. 44illustrates example embodiments where the shipping operation 4270 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation 4402 , and/or operation 4404 .
- the shipping operation 4270may include shipping the one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities.
- treatment facilitiesinclude, but are not limited to, hospitals, clinics, military field hospitals, ship infirmaries, and the like.
- the shipping operation 4270may include shipping the one or more packages to one or more pharmacies.
- one or more shipping units 140may be used to ship one or more packages to one or more pharmacies.
- FIG. 45illustrates a partial view of a system 4500 that includes a computer program 4504 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4500is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4502 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for determining one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4502may include a computer-readable medium 4506 . In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium 4502 may include a recordable medium 4508 . In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium 4502 may include a communications medium 4510 .
- FIG. 45Aillustrates a partial view of a system 4500 that includes a computer program 4504 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4500is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4502 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; and one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4502may include a computer-readable medium 4506 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4502may include a recordable medium 4508 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4502may include a communications medium 4510 .
- FIG. 45Billustrates a partial view of a system 4500 that includes a computer program 4504 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4500is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4502 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4502may include a computer-readable medium 4506 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4502may include a recordable medium 4508 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4502may include a communications medium 4510 .
- FIG. 46illustrates a partial view of a system 4600 that includes a computer program 4604 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4600is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4602 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 determined in response to one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 and input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one or more agents 142 determined in response to one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 and the input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a computer-readable medium 4606 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a recordable medium 4608 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a communications medium 4610 .
- FIG. 46Aillustrates a partial view of a system 4600 that includes a computer program 4604 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4600is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4602 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 determined in response to one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 and input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one or more agents 142 determined in response to one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 and the input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a computer-readable medium 4606 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a recordable medium 4608 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a communications medium 4610 .
- FIG. 46Billustrates a partial view of a system 4600 that includes a computer program 4604 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4600is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4602 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 determined in response to one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 and input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one or more agents 142 determined in response to one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 and the input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a computer-readable medium 4606 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a recordable medium 4608 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4602may include a communications medium 4610 .
- FIG. 47illustrates a partial view of a system 4700 that includes a computer program 4704 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4700is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4702 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips 108 and the accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained.
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a computer-readable medium 4706 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a recordable medium 4708 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a communications medium 4710 .
- FIG. 47Aillustrates a partial view of a system 4700 that includes a computer program 4704 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4700is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4702 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips 108 and the accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a computer-readable medium 4706 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a recordable medium 4708 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a communications medium 4710 .
- FIG. 47Billustrates a partial view of a system 4700 that includes a computer program 4704 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4700is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4702 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual 102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips 108 and the accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; and one
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a computer-readable medium 4706 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a recordable medium 4708 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4702may include a communications medium 4710 .
- FIG. 48illustrates a partial view of a system 4800 that includes a computer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4800is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for determining one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens 106 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a computer-readable medium 4806 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a recordable medium 4808 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a communications medium 4810 .
- FIG. 48Aillustrates a partial view of a system 4800 that includes a computer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4800is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; and one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a computer-readable medium 4806 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a recordable medium 4808 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a communications medium 4810 .
- FIG. 48Billustrates a partial view of a system 4800 that includes a computer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4800is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a computer-readable medium 4806 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a recordable medium 4808 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a communications medium 4810 .
- FIG. 48Cillustrates a partial view of a system 4800 that includes a computer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4800is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents; one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a computer-readable medium 4806 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a recordable medium 4808 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a communications medium 4810 .
- FIG. 48Dillustrates a partial view of a system 4800 that includes a computer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device.
- An embodiment of the system 4800is provided using a signal-bearing medium 4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens 106 present within one or more samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals 126 that include information associated with accepting input 120 associated with the individual 102 from whom the one or more samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one or more agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents; one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals 126 that include information associated with the one or more agents; one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents 142 .
- the one or more instructionsmay be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions.
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a computer-readable medium 4806 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a recordable medium 4808 .
- the signal-bearing medium 4802may include a communications medium 4810 .
- an implementermay opt for a mainly hardware and/or firmware vehicle; alternatively, if flexibility is paramount, the implementer may opt for a mainly software implementation; or, yet again alternatively, the implementer may opt for some combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware.
- any vehicle to be utilizedis a choice dependent upon the context in which the vehicle will be deployed and the specific concerns (e.g., speed, flexibility, or predictability) of the implementer, any of which may vary.
- Those skilled in the artwill recognize that optical aspects of implementations will typically employ optically-oriented hardware, software, and/or firmware.
- Examples of a signal-bearing mediuminclude, but are not limited to, the following: a recordable type medium such as a floppy disk, a hard disk drive, a Compact Disc (CD), a Digital Video Disk (DVD), a digital tape, a computer memory, etc.; and a transmission type medium such as a digital and/or an analog communication medium (e.g., a fiber optic cable, a waveguide, a wired communications link, a wireless communication link, etc.).
- electro-mechanical systemincludes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry operably coupled with a transducer (e.g., an actuator, a motor, a piezoelectric crystal, etc.), electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of random access memory), electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, or optical-electrical equipment), and any non-electrical analog thereto, such as optical or other analogs.
- a transducere.g., an actuator, a motor, a piezo
- electromechanical systemsinclude but are not limited to a variety of consumer electronics systems, as well as other systems such as motorized transport systems, factory automation systems, security systems, and communication/computing systems.
- electro-mechanicalas used herein is not necessarily limited to a system that has both electrical and mechanical actuation except as context may dictate otherwise.
- electrical circuitryincludes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of random access memory), and/or electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, or optical-electrical equipment).
- a computer programe.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein
- electrical circuitry forming a memory device
- examples of such other devices and/or processes and/or systemsmight include—as appropriate to context and application—all or part of devices and/or processes and/or systems of (a) an air conveyance (e.g., an airplane, rocket, hovercraft, helicopter, etc.), (b) a ground conveyance (e.g., a car, truck, locomotive, tank, armored personnel carrier, etc.), (c) a building (e.g., a home, warehouse, office, etc.), (d) an appliance (e.g., a refrigerator, a washing machine, a dryer, etc.), (e) a communications system (e.g., a networked system, a telephone system, a voice-over IP system, etc.), (f) a business entity (e.g., an Internet Service Provider (ISP) entity such as Comcast Cable, Quest, Southwestern Bell, etc), or (g) a wired/wireless services entity (e.g., such as Sprint, C
- ISPInternet Service Provider
- a user 124may be representative of a human user 124 , a robotic user 124 (e.g., computational entity), and/or substantially any combination thereof (e.g., a user 124 may be assisted by one or more robotic).
- a user 124 as set forth herein, although shown as a single entitymay in fact be composed of two or more entities.
- enderand/or other entity-oriented terms as such terms are used herein.
- any two components so associatedcan also be viewed as being “operably connected”, or “operably coupled”, to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated can also be viewed as being “operably couplable”, to each other to achieve the desired functionality.
- operably couplableinclude but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components and/or wirelessly interactable and/or wirelessly interacting components and/or logically interacting and/or logically interactable components.
Landscapes
- Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Life Sciences & Earth Sciences (AREA)
- Immunology (AREA)
- General Health & Medical Sciences (AREA)
- Chemical & Material Sciences (AREA)
- Biomedical Technology (AREA)
- Urology & Nephrology (AREA)
- Hematology (AREA)
- Molecular Biology (AREA)
- Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- General Physics & Mathematics (AREA)
- Analytical Chemistry (AREA)
- Biochemistry (AREA)
- Pathology (AREA)
- Medicinal Chemistry (AREA)
- Medical Informatics (AREA)
- Food Science & Technology (AREA)
- Cell Biology (AREA)
- Biotechnology (AREA)
- Microbiology (AREA)
- Bioethics (AREA)
- Public Health (AREA)
- Epidemiology (AREA)
- Theoretical Computer Science (AREA)
- Primary Health Care (AREA)
- Software Systems (AREA)
- Databases & Information Systems (AREA)
- Computer Hardware Design (AREA)
- Computer Security & Cryptography (AREA)
- Virology (AREA)
- General Engineering & Computer Science (AREA)
- Tropical Medicine & Parasitology (AREA)
- Measuring Or Testing Involving Enzymes Or Micro-Organisms (AREA)
- Medicines That Contain Protein Lipid Enzymes And Other Medicines (AREA)
- Investigating Or Analysing Biological Materials (AREA)
- Peptides Or Proteins (AREA)
- Mobile Radio Communication Systems (AREA)
- Data Exchanges In Wide-Area Networks (AREA)
Abstract
Description
- The present application is related to and claims the benefit of the earliest available effective filing date(s) from the following listed application(s) (the “Related Applications”) (e.g., claims earliest available priority dates for other than provisional patent applications or claims benefits under 35 USC § 119(e) for provisional patent applications, for any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of the Related Application(s)).
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application No. UNKNOWN, entitled SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR PATHOGEN DETECTION AND RESPONSE, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 11 Sep. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application No. UNKNOWN, entitled SYSTEMS AND METHODS FOR TRANSMITTING PATHOGEN RELATED INFORMATION AND RESPONDING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 11 Sep. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/893,608, entitled COMPUTATIONAL SYSTEMS AND METHODS RELATED TO NUTRACEUTICALS, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 15 Aug. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/893,606, entitled COMPUTATIONAL SYSTEMS AND METHODS RELATED TO NUTRACEUTICALS, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 15 Aug. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/893,605, entitled COMPUTATIONAL SYSTEMS AND METHODS RELATED TO NUTRACEUTICALS, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene; and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 15 Aug. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/888,627, entitled COMPUTATIONAL METHODS AND SYSTEMS ASSOCIATED WITH NUTRACEUTICAL RELATED ASSAYS, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene, and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 31 Jul. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/888,614, entitled METHODS AND SYSTEMS RELATED TO RECEIVING NUTRACEUTICAL ASSOCIATED INFORMATION, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene, and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 31 Jul. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/888,613, entitled METHODS AND SYSTEMS RELATED TO TRANSMISSION OF NUTRACEUTICAL ASSOCIATED INFORMATION, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene, and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 31 Jul. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/824,529, entitled COMPUTATIONAL SYSTEMS AND METHODS RELATED TO NUTRACEUTICALS, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene, and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 28 Jun. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/824,604, entitled COMPUTATIONAL SYSTEMS RELATED TO NUTRACEUTICALS, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene, and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 28 Jun. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/799,465, entitled FLUIDIC DEVICES, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 30 Apr. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/799,462, entitled FLUIDIC METHODS, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 30 Apr. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/729,301, entitled METHODS FOR PATHOGEN DETECTION, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 27 Mar. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/729,276, entitled DEVICES FOR PATHOGEN DETECTION, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 27 Mar. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/729,275, entitled MICROFLUIDIC CHIPS FOR PATHOGEN DETECTION, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 27 Mar. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/729,274, entitled SYSTEMS FOR PATHOGEN DETECTION, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 27 Mar. 2007, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/637,638, entitled METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ANALYSIS OF NUTRACEUTICAL ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 11 Dec. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/637,616, entitled METHODS AND SYSTEMS FOR ANALYSIS OF NUTRACEUTICAL ASSOCIATED COMPONENTS, naming Edward, K. Y. Jung, Eric C. Leuthardt, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 11 Dec. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/523,809, entitled COMPUTATIONAL AND/OR CONTROL SYSTEMS AND METHODS RELATED TO NUTRACEUTICAL AGENT SELECTION AND DOSING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 18 Sep. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/523,766, entitled COMPUTATIONAL AND/OR CONTROL SYSTEMS AND METHODS RELATED TO NUTRACEUTICAL AGENT SELECTION AND DOSING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 18 Sep. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/518,540, entitled INDIVIDUALIZED PHARMACEUTICAL SELECTION AND PACKAGING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 8 Sep. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/515,357, entitled COMPUTATIONAL AND/OR CONTROL SYSTEMS AND METHODS RELATED TO NUTRACEUTICAL AGENT SELECTION AND DOSING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 1 Sep. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/486,998, entitled COMPUTATIONAL AND/OR CONTROL SYSTEMS RELATED TO INDIVIDUALIZED PHARMACEUTICAL AND NUTRACEUTICAL SELECTION AND PACKAGING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 14 Jul. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/486,973, entitled COMPUTATIONAL AND/OR CONTROL SYSTEMS RELATED TO INDIVIDUALIZED PHARMACEUTICAL AND NUTRACEUTICAL SELECTION AND PACKAGING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 14 Jul. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/478,341, entitled COMPUTATIONAL AND/OR CONTROL SYSTEMS RELATED TO INDIVIDUALIZED NUTRACEUTICAL SELECTION AND PACKAGING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 28 Jun. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/478,296, entitled COMPUTATIONAL AND/OR CONTROL SYSTEMS RELATED TO INDIVIDUALIZED NUTRACEUTICAL SELECTION AND PACKAGING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 28 Jun. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/474,109, entitled CUSTOMIZED VISUAL MARKING FOR MEDICATION LABELING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 23 Jun. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/453,571, entitled INDIVIDUALIZED PHARMACEUTICAL SELECTION AND PACKAGING, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 14 Jun. 2006, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/314,945, entitled GENERATING A REQUEST FROM A NUTRACEUTICAL INVENTORY, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene, and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 20 Dec. 2005, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- For purposes of the USPTO extra-statutory requirements, the present application constitutes a continuation-in-part of U.S. patent application Ser. No. 11/291,482, entitled GENERATING A NUTRACEUTICAL REQUEST FROM AN INVENTORY, naming Edward K. Y. Jung, Royce A. Levien, Robert W. Lord, Mark A. Malamud, John D. Rinaldo, Jr., Clarence T. Tegreene, and Lowell L. Wood, Jr. as inventors, filed 30 Nov. 2005, which is currently co-pending, or is an application of which a currently co-pending application is entitled to the benefit of the filing date.
- The United States Patent Office (USPTO) has published a notice to the effect that the USPTO's computer programs require that patent applicants reference both a serial number and indicate whether an application is a continuation or continuation-in-part. Stephen G. Kunin, Benefit of Prior-Filed Application, USPTO Official Gazette Mar. 18, 2003, available at http://www.uspto.gov/web/offices/com/sol/og/2003/week11/patbene.htm. The present Applicant Entity (hereinafter “Applicant”) has provided above a specific reference to the application(s) from which priority is being claimed as recited by statute. Applicant understands that the statute is unambiguous in its specific reference language and does not require either a serial number or any characterization, such as “continuation” or “continuation-in-part,” for claiming priority to U.S. patent applications. Notwithstanding the foregoing, Applicant understands that the USPTO's computer programs have certain data entry requirements, and hence Applicant is designating the present application as a continuation-in-part of its parent applications as set forth above, but expressly points out that such designations are not to be construed in any way as any type of commentary and/or admission as to whether or not the present application contains any new matter in addition to the matter of its parent application(s).
- All subject matter of the Related Applications and of any and all parent, grandparent, great-grandparent, etc. applications of the Related Applications is incorporated herein by reference to the extent such subject matter is not inconsistent herewith.
- The present disclosure relates to methods and systems that may be used for detection of one or more pathogens and determining one or more agents in response to pathogen detection.
- In some embodiments one or more methods are provided that include identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. The method may optionally include displaying information associated with the one or more agents. The method may optionally include transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more methods are provided that include receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents, determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained and processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The method may optionally include packaging the one or more agents. The method may optionally include shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more methods are provided that include identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The method may optionally include receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. The method may optionally include displaying the information associated with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more methods are provided that include receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual, receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. The method may optionally include displaying information associated with the one or more agents. The method may optionally include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. The method may optionally include packaging the one or more agents. The method may optionally include shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments a system is provided that includes a signal-bearing medium bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and one or more instructions for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments a system is provided that includes a signal-bearing medium bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments a system is provided that includes a signal-bearing medium bearing one or more instructions for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for displaying the information associated with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments a system is provided that includes a signal-bearing medium bearing one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and one or more instructions for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents. The system may optionally include one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more systems are provided that include means for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, means for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and means for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens responsive to the means for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the means for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include means for displaying information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include means for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more systems are provided that include means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained and means for processing the information associated with the means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include means for packaging the one or more agents. The system may optionally include means for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more systems are provided that include means for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, means for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and means for transmitting one or more signals responsive to the means for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the means for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include means for receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. The system may optionally include means for displaying the information associated with the means for receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more systems are provided that include means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual, means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and means for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens responsive to the means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include means for displaying information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include means for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include means for packaging the one or more agents. The system may optionally include means for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more systems are provided that include circuitry for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, circuitry for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, circuitry for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens responsive to the circuitry for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the circuitry for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include circuitry for displaying information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include circuitry for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more systems are provided that include circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained and circuitry for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include circuitry for packaging the one or more agents. The system may optionally include circuitry for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more systems are provided that include circuitry for identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips, circuitry for accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, circuitry for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. The system may optionally include circuitry for displaying the information associated with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments one or more systems are provided that include circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual, circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained, and circuitry for determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens responsive to the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. The system may optionally include circuitry for displaying information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include circuitry for transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. The system may optionally include circuitry for packaging the one or more agents. The system may optionally include circuitry for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments, means include but are not limited to circuitry and/or programming for effecting the herein referenced functional aspects; the circuitry and/or programming can be virtually any combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein referenced functional aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects means are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present disclosure.
- In some embodiments, related systems include but are not limited to circuitry and/or programming for effecting the herein referenced method aspects; the circuitry and/or programming can be virtually any combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware configured to effect the herein referenced method aspects depending upon the design choices of the system designer. In addition to the foregoing, other system aspects are described in the claims, drawings, and/or text forming a part of the present application.
- The foregoing summary is illustrative only and is not intended to be in any way limiting. In addition to the illustrative aspects, embodiments, and features described above, further aspects, embodiments, and features will become apparent by reference to the drawings, claims, and the following detailed description.
FIG. 1 illustrates anexample system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 1A illustrates anexample system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 1B illustrates anexample system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 1C illustrates anexample system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 2 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 3 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 2 .FIG. 4 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 2 .FIG. 5 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 2 .FIG. 6 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 2 .FIG. 7 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 8 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 7 .FIG. 9 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 7 .FIG. 10 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 11 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 10 .FIG. 12 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 13 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 12 .FIG. 14 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 12 .FIG. 15 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 16 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 15 .FIG. 17 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 15 .FIG. 18 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 19 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 18 .FIG. 20 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 21 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 20 .FIG. 22 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 20 .FIG. 23 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 20 .FIG. 24 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 25 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 24 .FIG. 26 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 27 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 26 .FIG. 28 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 26 .FIG. 29 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 30 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 29 .FIG. 31 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 29 .FIG. 32 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 29 .FIG. 33 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 29 .FIG. 34 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 35 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 34 .FIG. 36 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 34 .FIG. 37 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 38 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 37 .FIG. 39 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 40 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 39 .FIG. 41 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 39 .FIG. 42 illustrates an operational flow representing example operations related to methods and systems responsive to the detection of pathogens.FIG. 43 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 42 .FIG. 44 illustrates alternate embodiments of the example operational flow ofFIG. 42 .FIG. 45 illustrates anexample system 4500 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 45A illustrates anexample system 4500 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 45B illustrates anexample system 4500 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 46 illustrates anexample system 4600 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 46A illustrates anexample system 4600 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 46B illustrates anexample system 4600 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 47 illustrates anexample system 4700 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 47A illustrates anexample system 4700 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 47B illustrates anexample system 4700 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 48 illustrates anexample system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 48A illustrates anexample system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 48B illustrates anexample system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 48C illustrates anexample system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.FIG. 48D illustrates anexample system 4800 in which embodiments may be implemented.- In the following detailed description, reference is made to the accompanying drawings, which form a part hereof. In the drawings, similar symbols typically identify similar components, unless context dictates otherwise. The illustrative embodiments described in the detailed description, drawings, and claims are not meant to be limiting. Other embodiments may be utilized, and other changes may be made, without departing from the spirit or scope of the subject matter presented here.
- While various aspects and embodiments have been disclosed herein, other aspects and embodiments will be apparent to those skilled in the art. The various aspects and embodiments disclosed herein are for purposes of illustration and are not intended to be limiting, with the true scope and spirit being indicated by the following claims.
FIG. 1 illustrates anexample system 100 in which embodiments may be implemented. In some embodiments, thesystem 100 is operable to provide a method that may be used to detect and respond to one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be processed with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be processed with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to analyze one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 associated with an individual102 may be processed. In some embodiments, onesample 104 associated with an individual102 may be processed. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be used to process one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, onemicrofluidic chip 108 may be used to process one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be used to process one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be used to process onesample 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to accept one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include one or more reservoirs. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include one or more reagent inputs. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more centrifugation units. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore transmitting units 116. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, oneanalysis unit 110 may be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may beportable analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may benon-portable analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be hand-heldanalysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one or more user interfaces122. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one user interface122. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one or more user interfaces122 that are operably associated with the one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be operably associated with one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may include one or more user interfaces122. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may include one user interface122. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one or more user inputs. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one or moreaccepting units 118.FIG. 1A illustrates anexample system 100A in which embodiments may be implemented. In some embodiments, thesystem 100A is operable to provide a method that may be used during the detection and response to one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be received by one ormore receiving units 136.Such signals 126 may include numerous types of information. In some embodiments,such signals 126 may include information related toagent information 128,sample information 130,individual information 132,pathogen information 134, and the like. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may be operably associated with one or more: processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may process information received by one ormore receiving units 136. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information received from one ormore receiving units 136. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information received from one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information received from one ormore receiving units 136. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information received from one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112,display units 114, user interfaces122, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one or more user interfaces122 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may receive one ormore signals 126 from one ormore transmitting units 116. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may ship one or more packages that include one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may receive one ormore signals 126 from one ormore transmitting units 116. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, packaging units138, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one or moreaccepting units 118.FIG. 1B illustrates anexample system 100B in which embodiments may be implemented. In some embodiments, thesystem 100B is operable to provide a method that may be used to detect and respond to one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be processed with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be processed with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to analyze one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 associated with an individual102 may be processed. In some embodiments, onesample 104 associated with an individual102 may be processed. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be used to process one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, onemicrofluidic chip 108 may be used to process one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be used to process one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be used to process onesample 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to accept one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include one or more reservoirs. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include one or more reagent inputs. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one or more centrifugation units. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore transmitting units 116. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, oneanalysis unit 110 may be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may beportable analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may benon-portable analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be hand-heldanalysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one or more user interfaces122. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one user interface122. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one or more user interfaces122 that are operably associated with the one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be operably associated with one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may include one or more user interfaces122. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may include one user interface122. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one or more user inputs. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one or moreaccepting units 118. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one ormore display units 114. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one or moreaccepting units 118. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may be operably associated with one or more: processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, or substantially any combination thereof.FIG. 1C illustrates anexample system 100C in which embodiments may be implemented. In some embodiments, thesystem 100C is operable to provide a method that may be used during the detection and response to one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be received by one ormore receiving units 136.Such signals 126 may include numerous types of information. In some embodiments,such signals 126 may include information related tosample information 130,individual information 132,pathogen information 134, and the like. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may be operably associated with one or more: processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may process information received by one ormore receiving units 136. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information received from one ormore receiving units 136. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information received from one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information received from one ormore receiving units 136. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information received from one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112,display units 114, user interfaces122, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one or more user interfaces122 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, packaging units138,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may receive one ormore signals 126 from one ormore transmitting units 116. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122,shipping units 140, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may ship one or more packages that include one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may receive one ormore signals 126 from one ormore transmitting units 116. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be operably associated with one or more: receivingunits 136, processingunits 112,display units 114, transmittingunits 116, user interfaces122, packaging units138, or substantially any combination thereof.- Numerous types of
samples 104 may be analyzed through use ofsystem 100. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be associated with an individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be associated with one ormore individuals 102. In some embodiments, an individual102 may be a human. In some embodiments, an individual102 may be a group of humans who share a common pathogen infection. For example, in some embodiments,system 100 may be used to diagnose an individual102 for infection with one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may include a liquid. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may include a solid. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may include a vapor. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may include a semi-solid. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may include a gas. Examples ofsuch samples 104 include, but are not limited to,samples 104 obtained from humans (e.g., skin, breath, tissue, hair, saliva, blood, mucus, cerebrospinal fluid, urine, fecal material, tears, urogenital associated samples),samples 104 that are associated with, but not limited to, one or more toxins, viruses, bacteria, protozoans, single-celled organisms, fungus, algae, prions, microbes, cyst, eggs, pathogenic proteins, or substantially any combination thereof. Numerous agents 142 may be selected. In some embodiments, anagent 142 may include a substance that may be used in the diagnosis, cure, mitigation, treatment, or prevention of disease in a human or another animal. Such agents are recognized in the official United States Pharmacopeia, official Homeopathic Pharmacopeia of the United States, official National Formulary or any supplement thereof.- In some embodiments, an
agent 142 may include achemical agent 142. For example, in some embodiments, anagent 142 may be an antibiotic, a steroid, an alcohol deterrent, an analgesic, an anesthetic, an antacid, an antihelmintic, an antiallergic, an antiamebic, an antiarteriosclerotic, an antibacterial, an antibacterial adjuvant, an antiharrheal, an antidiuretic, an antifungal, an antimalarial, an antiprotozoal, an antishphilitic, an antitussive, an antiviral, a chelating agent, a choleretic, a CNS stimulant, a decongestant, an antiseptic, a disinfectant, an expectorant, a glucocorticoid, an HIV fusion inhibitor, an HIV protease inhibitor, an immunomodulator, an immunosuppressant, a protease inhibitor, a pulmonary surfactant, a respiratory stimulant, a reverse transcriptase inhibitor, a sedative, a hypnotic, a serotonin noradrenaline reuptake inhibitor, a serotonin receptor agonist, a serotonin receptor antagonist, a serotonin reuptake inhibitor, a topoisomerast I inhibitor, a topoisomerase II inhibitor, a tranquilizer, a vasodilator, a vasoprotectant, and the like.Numerous agents 142 are known and have been described (e.g., Merck Index, Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. (2001); Mosby's Drug Guide, An Imprint of Elsevier, St. Louis, Mo. (2004); The Merck Manual, Seventeenth Edition, Merck Research Laboratories, Whitehouse Station, N.J. (1999); Physician's Desk Reference, 58thEdition, Thomson Montvale, N.J. (2004)). - In some embodiments, an
agent 142 may include amechanical agent 142. Examples ofmechanical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, radiation, ultraviolet light, sonication, phototherapy, and the like. - In some embodiments, an
agent 142 may include a bioagent. In some embodiments, a bioagent may be found in nature. In some embodiments, an bioagent may be synthetic. For example, in some embodiments, a bioagent may be produced through use of recombinant nucleic acid technology. In some embodiments, a bioagent may be assembled in vitro. For example, in some embodiments, a bioagent may be a virus and/or bacteriophage against a pathogen that is found in nature. In some embodiments, a bioagent may be a virus and/or bacteriophage against a pathogen that is assembled in vitro. In some embodiments, a bioagent may be a virus and/or bacteriophage against a pathogen that includes recombinant nucleic acid (e.g., Merrill et al., PNAS (USA), 93:3188 (1996); Brussow, Microbiology, 151:2133-2140 (2005)). In some embodiments, an agent may include a recombinant microbe. For example, in some embodiments,Yersinia, Listeria, Salmonella, and/orShigellamay be used to deliver recombinant products through the intestinal mucosa. - In some embodiment, an
agent 142 may provide a synergistic effect with another agent. In some embodiments, afirst agent 142 may increase the effectiveness of asecond agent 142. For example, in some embodiments, afirst agent 142 may be an antibacterial adjuvant (e.g., a beta-lactamase inhibitor). Numerous pathogens 106 may be processed, analyzed and/or detected through use ofsystem 100. In some embodiments,pathogens 106 includeintact pathogens 106 and components ofpathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments,pathogens 106 may include polynucleotides and/or polypeptides that are associated with apathogen 106. In some embodiments,pathogens 106 may include one or more products of apathogen 106. In some embodiments,pathogens 106 may include products and/or substrates that are associated with the activity of one or more pathogen associated enzymes. Examples ofpathogens 106 that may be processed, analyzed and/or detected through use ofsystem 100 include, but are not limited to,pathogens 106 associated with plants, animals, humans, fish, birds, and the like. Examples ofsuch pathogens 106 include, but are not limited to, viruses, bacteria, prions, protozoans, single-celled organisms, algae, eggs of pathogenic organisms, microbes, cysts, molds, fungus, worms, amoeba, pathogenic proteins, or substantially any combination thereof.Numerous pathogens 106 are known and have been described (e.g., Foodborne Pathogens: Microbiology and Molecular Biology, Caister Academic Press, eds. Fratamico, Bhunia, and Smith (2005); Maizels et al., Parasite Antigens Parasite Genes: A Laboratory Manual for Molecular Parasitology, Cambridge University Press (1991); National Library of Medicine; Physician's Desk Reference, 58thEdition, Thomson PDR, Montvale, N.J. (2004)).- Numerous types of viruses may be identified. Such viruses are known and have been described (e.g., U.S. Patent Appl. No. 20060257852; Field's Virology, Knipe et al, (Fifth Edition) Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, (2006)). Examples of such viruses include, but are not limited to, hepatitis, influenza, avian influenza, severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus (severe acute respiratory syndrome (SARS)), human immunodeficiency virus, herpes viruses, human papilloma virus, rhinovirus, rotavirus, West Nile virus, and the like.
- Examples of bacteria that may be identified include, but are not limited to,Staphylococcus aureus, Staphylococcus epidermidis, Staphylococcussp.,Streptococcus pneumoniae, Streptococcus agalactiae, Streptococcus pyogenes, Enterococcussp.,Bacillus anthracis, Bacillus cereus, Bifidobacterium bifidum, Lactobacillussp.,Listeria monocytogenes, Nocardiasp.,Rhodococcus equi, Erysipelothrix rhusiopathiae, Corynebacterium diptheriae, Propionibacterium acnes, Actinomycessp.,Clostridium botulinum, Clostridium difficile, Clostridium perfringens, Clostridium tetani, Mobiluncussp.,Peptostreptococcussp.,Neisseria gonorrhoeae, Neisseria meningitides, Moraxella catarrhalis, Veillonellasp.,Actinobacillus actinomycetemcomitans, Acinetobacter baumannii, Bordetella pertussis, Brucellasp.,Campylobactersp.,Capnocytophagasp.,Cardiobacterium hominis, Eikenella corrodens, Francisella tularensis, Haemophilus ducreyi, Haemophilus influenzae, Helicobacter pylori, Kingella kingae, Legionella pneumophila, Pasteurella multocida, Klebsiella granulomatis, Enterobacteriaceae,Citrobactersp.,Enterobactersp.,Escherichia coli, Klebsiella pneumoniae, Proteussp.,Salmonella enteriditis, Salmonella typhi, Shigellasp.,Serratia marcescens, Yersinia enterocolitica, Yersinia pestis, Aeromonassp.,Plesiomonas shigelloides, Vibrio cholerae, Vibrio parahaemolyticus, Vibrio vulnificus, Acinetobactersp.,Flavobacteriumsp.,Pseudomonas aeruginosa, Burkholderia cepacia, Burkholderia pseudomallei, Xanthomonas maltophilia, Stenotrophomonas maltophila, Bacteroides fragilis, Bacteroidessp.,Prevotellasp.,Fusobacteriumsp.,Spirillum minus, or substantially any combination thereof.
- Numerous prions may be identified. Examples of such prions include, but are not limited to, bovine prion protein, human prion protein, monkey prion protein, dog prion protein, and the like. The amino acid sequences and/or nucleotide sequences of numerous prions are known and have been reported (e.g., Premzl and Gamulin, BMC Genomics, 8:1 (2007)).
- Numerous pathogenic worms may be identified. Examples of such worms include, but are not limited to, tapeworms, helminths, whipworms, hookworms, ringworms, roundworms, pinworms, ascarids, filarids, and the like.
- In some embodiments, the eggs and/or cysts of
pathogens 106 may be identified. Examples of such eggs and/or cysts include, but are not limited to, eggs and/or cysts of: parasitic worms (e.g.,Heterodera glycines, Trichinella), amoebe (e.g.,Entamoeba histolytica, Acanthamoeba), protozoans (e.g.,Giardia, cryptosporidium, Toxoplasma), and the like. - Numerous protozoans may be identified. Examples of protozoans include, but are not limited to, slime molds, flagellates, ciliates, and the like (e.g.,cryptosporidium, giardia, naegleria fowleri, acanthamoeba, entamoeba histolytica, cryptosporidium parvum, cyclospora cayetanensis, isospora belli, microsporidia) (Marshall et al., Clin, Micro. Rev., 10:67-85 (1997)).
- Examples of pathogenic fungi include, but are not limited to, dimorphic fungi that may assume a mold form but may also adopt a yeast form,histoplasma capsulatum, coccidioides immitis, candida, aspergillus, and the like.
- Pathogenic algae include, but are not limited to, Prototheca members, Helicosporidiu members, Chattonella members (e.g., Chattonella marina), and the like.
- Numerous types of pathogenic proteins may be identified and include, but are not limited to, toxins (e.g., exotoxing, endotoxins), prions, and the like.
- Numerous microbes may be identified. In some embodiments, microbes may be prokaryotes. In some embodiments, microbes may be eukaryotes. Examples of such microbes include, but are not limited to,Giardia, amoeba (e.g.,Entamoeba, Naegleria, Acanthamoeba), trypanosomes,Plasmodium(e.g.,Plasmodium falciparum, Plasmodium vivax, Plasmodium ovale, Plasmodium malariae, Plasmodium knowlesi), Eimeria,Toxoplasma, Neospora, Mycoplasma, Leishmania, Trichomonas, Cryptosporidium, Isospora, Balantidium, protozoans,Mycoplasma hominis, Ureaplasma urealyticum, and the like.
- In some embodiments, a
pathogen 106 may be a member of numerous groups ofpathogens 106. For example, single-celled organisms may include microbes, protozoans, and the like. In some embodiments, apathogen 106 may include an artificial device such an electomechanical machine, a nano-machine, a micro-machine, and the like. - Numerous types of
microfluidic chips 108 may be utilized withinsystem 100. Methods to construct and utilizemicrofluidic chips 108 have been described (e.g., U.S. Statutory Invention Registration No. H201; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,454,945; 6,818,435; 6,812,458; 6,794,196; 6,709,869; 6,582,987; 6,482,306; 5,726,404; 7,118,910; 7,081,192; herein incorporated by reference). - In some embodiments, a
microfluidic chip 108 may be configured to utilize microfluidic principles. Accordingly, in some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may be configured to include one or more channels with at least one dimension that is less than 1 millimeter. However, in some embodiments,microfluidic chips 108 may be configured such that they do not utilize microfluidic principles. Accordingly, in some embodiments,microfluidic chips 108 may be configured such that there are not any components that have a dimension that is less than 1 millimeter. Accordingly, in some embodiments,microfluidic chips 108 may be configured that include components having a dimension that is less than 1 millimeter, while in other embodiments,microfluidic chips 108 may be configured with components having dimensions that are greater than 1 millimeter. In some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may include at least one component that has at least one dimension that is less than 1 millimeter and at least one component having at least one dimension that is greater than 1 millimeter. - For example,
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize a variety of methods to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, nucleic acid (polynucleotide) hybridization based methods, immunological based methods, chromatographic based methods, affinity based methods, extraction based methods, separation based methods, isolation based methods, filtration based methods, enzyme based methods, isoelectric focusing methods, or substantially any combination thereof. Microfluidic chips 108 may utilize numerous methods to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize: chemiluminescent methods (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,090,545 and 5,093,268; herein incorporated by reference), plasmon resonance sensors (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,030,989; herein incorporated by reference), nuclear magnetic resonance detectors (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,194,900; herein incorporated by reference), gradient-based assays (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,112,444; herein incorporated by reference), reporter beads (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,747,349; herein incorporated by reference), transverse electrophoresis (e.g., Macounova et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:1627-1633 (2001)); isoelectric focusing (e.g., Macounova et al., Analytical Chemistry, 72:3745-3751 (2000); Xu et al., Isoelectric focusing of green fluorescent proteins in plastic microfluidic channels. Abstracts of Papers of the American Chemical Society, 219:9-ANYL (2000); Macounova et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:1627-1633 (2001)), diffusion based systems (e.g., Kamholz et al., Biophysical Journal, 80:1967-1972 (2001); Hatch et al., Nature Biotechnology, 19:461-465 (2001); U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,221,677; 5,972,710; herein incorporated by reference), high performance liquid chromatography (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,923,907; herein incorporated by reference), polynucleotide analysis (e.g., Belgrader et al., Biosensors & Bioelectronics, 14:849-852 (2000); Buchholz et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:157-164 (2001); Fan et al., Analytical Chemistry, 71:4851-4859 (1999); Koutny et al., Analytical Chemistry, 72:3388-3391 (2000); Lee et al., Microfabricated plastic chips by hot embossing methods and their applications for DNA separation and detection. Sensors and Actuators B-Chemical, 75:142-148 (2001); U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,216; herein incorporated by reference), capillary electrophoresis (e.g., Kameoka et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:1935-1941 (2001)), immunoassays (e.g., Hatch et al., Nature Biotechnology, 19:461-465 (2001); Eteshola and Leckband, D. Development and characterization of an ELISA assay in PDMS microfluidic channels. Sensors and Actuators B-Chemical 72:129-133 (2001); Cheng et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:1472-1479 (2001); Yang et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:165-169 (2001)), flow cytometry (e.g., Sohn et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 97:10687-10690 (2000)), PCR amplification (e.g., Belgrader et al., Biosensors & Bioelectronics, 14:849-852 (2000); Khandurina et al., Analytical Chemistry, 72:2995-3000 (2000); Lagally et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:565-570 (2001)), cell manipulation (e.g., Glasgow et al., IEEE Transactions On Biomedical Engineering, 48:570-578 (2001)), cell separation (e.g., Yang et al., Analytical Chemistry, 71:911-918 (1999)), cell patterning (e.g., Chiu et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 97:2408-2413 (2000); Folch et al., Journal of Biomedical Materials Research, 52:346-353 (2000)), chemical gradient formation (e.g., Dertinger et al., Analytical Chemistry, 73:1240-1246 (2001); Jeon et al., Langmuir, 16:8311-8316 (2000)), microcantilevers (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,141,385; 6,935,165; 6,926,864; 6,763,705; 6,523,392; 6,325,904; herein incorporated by reference), or substantially any combination thereof.- In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize one or more magnets that may be used during processing and/or analysis of one ormore samples 104. For example, in some embodiments, ferrous metallic particles may be associated with one ormore pathogens 106 that are associated with one or more samples104 (e.g., use of antibodies, aptamers, peptides, polynucleotides, and the like that bind to one or more pathogen indicators and that are coupled to a ferrous metallic particle). The one ormore pathogens 106 may be separated from the remainder of the one ormore samples 104 through use of one or more magnets. In some embodiments, one or more magnets may be used to create eddy currents that may be used to process and/or analyze one ormore samples 104. For example, in some embodiments, non-ferrous metallic particles may be associated with one ormore pathogens 106 that are associated with one or more samples104 (e.g., use of antibodies, aptamers, peptides, polynucleotides, and the like that bind to one or more pathogen indicators and that are coupled to a non-ferrous metallic particle). One or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured such that passage of a non-ferrous metallic particle through a magnetic field will cause an eddy current to impart kinetic energy to the non-ferrous metallic particle and provide for separation of the associatedpathogens 106 from the remainder of the one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, such methods may be combined with additional methods to provide for separation of one ormore pathogens 106 from one ormore samples 104. For example, magnetic separation may be used in combination with one or more methods that may include, but are not limited to, diffusion (e.g., use of an H-filter), filtration, precipitation, immunoassay, immunodiffusion, and the like. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize ferrofluids to separate one ormore pathogens 106 from one ormore samples 104. For example, in some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may include an H-filter where a sample fluid and a ferrofluid flow substantially in parallel (e.g., the sample fluid and the ferrofluid flow side-by-side through the H-filter (horizontal) and/or above and below (vertical)). In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include a ferrofluid having magnetic particles such that ferrous materials contained within the sample fluid are attracted to the ferrofluid and thereby separated from the sample fluid. Accordingly, suchmicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to separate one ormore pathogens 106 from one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include a ferrofluid having ferrous particles such that magnetic materials contained within the sample fluid are attracted to the ferrofluid and thereby separated from the sample fluid. Accordingly, in such embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize ferrofluids to separate one ormore pathogens 106 from one ormore samples 104. Microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process numerous types ofsamples 104. For example, in some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may be configured to sonicate one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may include one or more ultrasonic electronic generators that produce a signal (e.g.,20 kilohertz) that can be used to drive a piezoelectric converter/transducer. This electrical signal may be converted by the transducer to a mechanical vibration due to the characteristics of the internal piezoelectric crystals. This vibration can be amplified and transmitted to one or more probes having tips that expand and contract to provide for sonication of one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may include one or more sonication probes. Such probes may be configured such that are able to operably associate with one or more vibration sources in a detachable manner. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that include one or more probes may be configured to detachably connect with one or more vibration sources that produce a vibration that can be coupled to the one or more probes. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include one or more vibration sources.- In some embodiments, a
microfluidic chip 108 may be configured to mix one ormore samples 104. For example, in some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may include a mixing chamber which includes one or more ferrous mixing members and electromagnets which are configured such that motion may be imparted to the one or more ferrous mixing members. In some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may include one or more mixing chambers that include two or more electromagnets positioned around the one or more mixing chambers and one or more ferrous members positioned within the one or more mixing chambers and between the electromagnets. Accordingly, mixing of one or more materials within the one or more mixing chambers may be facilitated by alternating current between the electromagnets positioned around the mixing chamber. In some embodiments, a mixing chamber may include an elastomeric material that includes a ferrous material (e.g., an elastomeric-ferrous material) such that movement of the elastomeric-ferrous material may be facilitated through use of one or more magnets, such as electromagnets. - In some embodiments, elastomeric-ferrous materials may be utilized to fabricate pumps that are associated with
microfluidic chips 108. For example, in some embodiments, a tube may include an elastomeric material that includes ferrous material such that movement of the elastomeric material may be facilitated through use of one or more magnets. Accordingly, valves and ferrous materials may be associated with the elastomeric tube such that expansion of a portion of the elastomeric tube through the action of a magnet, such as an electromagnetic, will act like a vacuum pump to draw fluids into the expanded portion of the elastomeric tube. In some embodiments, release of the elastomeric material from the magnetic field will cause the expanded portion of the tube to contract and will act to push the fluid from the formerly expanded portion of the elastomeric tubing. In some embodiments, valves may be positioned within the tube to provide for directional flow of fluid through the elastomeric tube. Accordingly, such pumps may be configured as vacuum pumps, propulsion type pumps, and/or both vacuum and propulsion type pumps. - In some embodiments,
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize magnetically actuated fluid handling. In some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may utilize magnetic fluid (e.g., ferrofluid, ferrogel, and the like) to move one or more gases and/or liquids through flow channels. For example, magnetically actuated slugs of magnetic fluid may be moved within channels of amicrofluidic chip 108 to facilitate valving and/or pumping of one or more gases and/or liquids. In some embodiments, the magnets used to control gas and/or liquid movement may be individual magnets that are moved along the flow channels and/or one or more arrays of magnets that may be individually controlled to hold or move one or more magnetic slugs. In some embodiments, an array of electromagnets may be positioned along a flow channel which may be turned on and off in a predetermined pattern to move magnetic fluid slugs in desired paths in one or more flow channels. Methods to construct magnetically actuated fluid handling devices have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,408,884 and 7,110,646; herein incorporated by reference). - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may process one ormore samples 104 through use of polynucleotide interaction. Numerous methods based on polynucleotide interaction may be used. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, those based on polynucleotide hybridization, polynucleotide ligation, polynucleotide amplification, polynucleotide degradation, and the like. Methods that utilize intercalation dyes, FRET analysis, capacitive DNA detection, and nucleic acid amplification have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,118,910 and 6,960,437; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, fluorescence quenching, molecular beacons, electron transfer, electrical conductivity, and the like may be used to analyze polynucleotide interaction. Such methods are known and have been described (e.g., Jarvius, DNA Tools and Microfluidic Systems for Molecular Analysis, Digital Comprehensive Summaries of Uppsala Dissertations from the Faculty of Medicine 161, ACTA UNIVERSITATIS UPSALIENSIS UPPSALA 2006, ISBN: 91-554-6616-8; Singh-Zocchi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:7605-7610 (2003); Wang et al., Anal. Chem., 75:3941-3945 (2003); Fan et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:9134-9137 (2003); U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,958,216; 5,093,268; 6,090,545; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, one or more polynucleotides that include at least one carbon nanotube are combined with one ormore samples 104, and/or one or more partially purified polynucleotides obtained from one ormore samples 104. The one or more polynucleotides that include one or more carbon nanotubes are allowed to hybridize with one or more polynucleotides that may be present within the one ormore samples 104. The one or more carbon nanotubes may be excited (e.g., with an electron beam and/or an ultraviolet laser) and the emission spectra of the excited nanotubes may be correlated with hybridization of the one or more polynucleotides that include at least one carbon nanotube with one or more polynucleotides that are included within the one ormore samples 104. Methods to utilize carbon nanotubes as probes for nucleic acid interaction have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,821,730; herein incorporated by reference). - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of protein interaction. Numerous methods based on protein interaction may be used. In some embodiments, protein interaction may be used to immobilize one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, protein interaction may be used to separate one ormore pathogens 106 from one ormore samples 104. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, those based on ligand binding, protein-protein binding, protein cross-linking, use of green fluorescent protein, phage display, the two-hybrid system, protein arrays, fiber optic evanescent wave sensors, chromatographic techniques, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, regulation of pH to control protein assembly and/or oligomerization, regulation of ion concentration to control protein assembly and/or oligomerization, and the like. Methods that may be used to construct protein arrays have been described (e.g., Warren et al., Anal. Chem., 76:4082-4092 (2004) and Walter et al., Trends Mol. Med., 8:250-253 (2002), U.S. Pat. No. 6,780,582; herein incorporated by reference). - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of peptide interaction. Peptides are generally described as being polypeptides that include less than one hundred amino acids. For example, peptides include dipeptides, tripeptides, and the like. In some embodiments, peptides may include from two to one hundred amino acids. In some embodiments, peptides may include from two to fifty amino acids. In some embodiments, peptides may include from two to one twenty amino acids. In some embodiments, peptides may include from ten to one hundred amino acids. In some embodiments, peptides may include from ten to fifty amino acids. Accordingly, peptides can include numerous numbers of amino acids. Numerous methods based on peptide interaction may be used. In some embodiments, peptide interaction may be used to immobilize one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, peptide interaction may be used to separate one ormore pathogens 106 from one ormore samples 104. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, those based on ligand binding, peptide-protein binding, peptide-peptide binding, peptide-polynucleotide binding, peptide cross-linking, use of a fluorescent protein, phage display, the two-hybrid system, protein arrays, peptide arrays, fiber optic evanescent wave sensors, chromatographic techniques, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, regulation of pH to control peptide and/or protein assembly and/or oligomerization, and the like. Accordingly, virtually any technique that may be used to analyze proteins may be utilized for the analysis of peptides. In some embodiments, high-speed capillary electrophoresis may be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106 through use of fluorescently labeled phosphopeptides as affinity probes (Yang et al., Anal. Chem., 10.1021/acO61936e (2006)). Methods to immobilize proteins and peptides have been reported (Taylor, Protein Immobilization: Fundamentals and Applications, Marcel Dekker, Inc., New York (1991)). - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of antibody interaction. Antibodies may be raised that will bind tonumerous pathogens 106 through use of known methods (e.g., Harlow and Lane, Antibodies: A Laboratory Manual, Cold Spring Harbor Laboratory Press, Cold Spring Harbor, N.Y. (1988)). Antibodies may be configured in numerous ways within one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 to process one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, antibodies may be coupled to a substrate within amicrofluidic chip 108. One ormore samples 104 may be passed over the coupled antibodies to facilitate binding of one ormore pathogens 106 to the one or more antibodies to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes. A labeled detector antibody that binds to the pathogen106 (or the antibody-pathogen complex) may then be passed over the one or more antibody-pathogen complexes such that the labeled detector antibody will label the pathogen106 (or the antibody-pathogen complex). Numerous labels may be used that include, but are not limited to, enzymes, fluorescent molecules, radioactive labels, spin labels, redox labels, and the like. In other embodiments, antibodies may be coupled to a substrate within amicrofluidic chip 108. One ormore samples 104 may be passed over the antibodies to facilitate binding of one ormore pathogens 106 to the one or more antibodies to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes. Such binding provides for detection of the antibody-pathogen complex through use of methods that include, but are not limited to, surface plasmon resonance, conductivity, and the like (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,030,989; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, antibodies may be coupled to a substrate within amicrofluidic chip 108 to provide for a competition assay. One ormore samples 104 may be mixed with one or more reagent mixtures that include one or more labeledpathogens 106. The mixture may then be passed over the antibodies to facilitate binding ofpathogens 106 in thesample 104 and labeledpathogens 106 in the reagent mixture to the antibodies. Theunlabeled pathogens 106 in thesample 104 will compete with the labeledpathogens 106 in the reagent mixture for binding to the antibodies. Accordingly, the amount of label bound to the antibodies will vary in accordance with the concentration ofunlabeled pathogen 106 in thesample 104. In some embodiments, antibody interaction may be used in association with microcantilevers to process one ormore pathogens 106. Methods to construct microcantilevers are known (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,141,385; 6,935,165; 6,926,864; 6,763,705; 6,523,392; 6,325,904; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, one or more antibodies may be used in conjunction with one or more aptamers to process one ormore samples 104. Accordingly, in some embodiments, aptamers and antibodies may be used interchangeably to process one ormore samples 104. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of chemical interaction. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize chemical extraction to process one ormore samples 104. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be mixed with a reagent mixture that includes one or more solvents in which the one ormore pathogens 106 are soluble. Accordingly, the solvent phase containing the one ormore pathogens 106 may be separated from the sample phase to provide for detection of the one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be mixed with a reagent mixture that includes one or more chemicals that cause precipitation of one ormore pathogens 106. Accordingly, the sample phase may be washed away from the one or more precipitatedpathogens 106 to provide for detection of the one ormore pathogens 106. Accordingly, reagent mixtures that include numerous types of chemicals that interact with one ormore pathogens 106 may be used. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of diffusion. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one or morefluid samples 104 through use of an H-filter. For example, amicrofluidic chip 108 may be configured to include a channel through which afluid sample 104 and a second fluid flow such that thefluid sample 104 and the second fluid undergo substantially parallel flow through the channel without significant mixing of the sample fluid and the second fluid. As thefluid sample 104 and the second fluid flow through the channel, one ormore pathogens 106 in thefluid sample 104 may diffuse through thefluid sample 104 into the second fluid. Accordingly, such diffusion provides for the separation of the one ormore pathogens 106 from thesample 104. Methods to construct H-filters have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,742,661; 6,409,832; 6,007,775; 5,974,867; 5,971,158; 5,948,684; 5,932,100; 5,716,852; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, diffusion based methods may be combined with immunoassay based methods to process and detect one ormore pathogens 106. Methods to conduct microscale diffusion immunoassays have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,541,213; herein incorporated by reference). Accordingly,microfluidic chips 108 may be configured in numerous ways to process one ormore pathogens 106 through use of diffusion. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of filtration. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to include one or more filters that have a molecular weight cut-off. For example, a filter may allow molecules of low molecular weight to pass through the filter while disallowing molecules of high molecular weight to pass through the filter. Accordingly, one ormore pathogens 106 that are contained within asample 104 may be allowed to pass through a filter while larger molecules contained within thesample 104 are disallowed from passing through the filter. Accordingly, in some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may include two or more filters that selectively retain, or allow passage, of one ormore pathogens 106 through the filters. Such configurations provide for selective separation of one ormore pathogens 106 from one ormore samples 104. Membranes and filters having numerous molecular weight cut-offs are commercially available (e.g., Millipore, Billerica, Mass.). In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to provide for dialysis of one ormore samples 104. For example, in some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may be configured to contain one ormore samples 104 in one or more sample chambers that are separated from one or more dialysis chambers by a semi-permeable membrane. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore pathogens 106 that are able to pass through the semi-permeable membrane may be collected in the dialysis chamber. In other embodiments, one ormore pathogens 106 may be retained in the one or more sample chambers while other sample components may be separated from the one ormore pathogens 106 by their passage through the semi-permeable membrane into the dialysis chamber. Accordingly, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to include two or more dialysis chambers for selective separation of one ormore pathogens 106 from one ormore samples 104. Semi-permeable membranes and dialysis tubing is available from numerous commercial sources (e.g., Millipore, Billerica, Mass.; Pierce, Rockford, Ill.; Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.). Methods that may be used for microfiltration have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 5,922,210; herein incorporated by reference). - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of chromatography. Numerous chromatographic methods may be used to process one ormore samples 104. Examples of such chromatographic methods include, but are not limited to, ion-exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, gel filtration chromatography, hydroxyapatite chromatography, gas chromatography, reverse phase chromatography, thin layer chromatography, capillary chromatography, size exclusion chromatography, hydrophobic interaction media, and the like. In some embodiments, amicrofluidic chip 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of one or more chromatographic methods. In some embodiments, chromatographic methods may be used to process one ormore samples 104 for one ormore pathogens 106 that include one or more polynucleotides. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be applied to a chromatographic media to which the one or more polynucleotides bind. The remaining components of thesample 104 may be washed from the chromatographic media. The one or more polynucleotides may then be eluted from chromatographic media in a more purified state. Similar methods may be used to process one ormore samples 104 for one ormore pathogens 106 that include one or more proteins or polypeptides (e.g., Mondal and Gupta, Biomol. Eng., 23:59-76 (2006)). Chromatography media able to separate numerous types of molecules is commercially available (e.g., Bio-Rad, Hercules, Calif.; Qiagen, Valencia, Calif.; Pfizer, New York, N.Y.; Millipore, Billerica, Mass.; GE Healthcare Bio-Sciences Corp., Piscataway, N.J.). - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of aptamer interaction. In some embodiments, one or more aptamers may include polynucleotides (e.g., deoxyribonucleic acid; ribonucleic acid; and derivatives of polynucleotides that may include polynucleotides that include modified bases, polynucleotides in which the phosphodiester bond is replaced by a different type of bond, or many other types of modified polynucleotides). In some embodiments, one or more aptamers may include peptide aptamers. Methods to prepare and use aptamers have been described (e.g., Collett et al., Methods, 37:4-15 (2005); Collet et al., Anal. Biochem., 338:113-123 (2005); Cox et al., Nucleic Acids Res., 30:20 e108 (2002); Kirby et al., Anal. Chem., 76:4066-4075 (2004); Ulrich, Handb. Exp. Pharmacol., 173:305-326 (2006); Baines and Colas, Drug Discovery Today, 11:334-341 (2006); Guthrie et al., Methods, 38:324-330 (2006); Geyer et al., Chapter 13: Selection of Genetic Agents from Random Peptide Aptamer Expression Libraries, Methods in Enzymology, Academic Press, pg. 171-208 (2000); U.S. Pat. No. 6,569,630; herein incorporated by reference). Aptamers may be configured in numerous ways within one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 to process one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, aptamers may be coupled to a substrate within amicrofluidic chip 108. One ormore samples 104 may be passed over the aptamers to facilitate binding of one ormore pathogens 106 to the one or more aptamers to form one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes. Labeled detector antibodies and/or aptamers that bind to the pathogen106 (or the aptamer-pathogen complex) may then be passed over the one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes such that the labeled detector antibodies and/or aptamers will label the pathogen106 (or the aptamer-pathogen complex). Numerous labels may be used that include, but are not limited to, enzymes, fluorescent molecules, radioactive labels, spin labels, redox labels, and the like. In other embodiments, aptamers may be coupled to a substrate within amicrofluidic chip 108. One ormore samples 104 may be passed over the aptamers to facilitate binding of one ormore pathogens 106 to the one or more aptamers to form one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes. Such binding provides for detection of the aptamer-pathogen complex through use of methods that include, but are not limited to, surface plasmon resonance, conductivity, and the like (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 7,030,989; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, aptamers may be coupled to a substrate within amicrofluidic chip 108 to provide for a competition assay. One ormore samples 104 may be mixed with one or more reagent mixtures that include one or more labeledpathogens 106. The mixture may then be passed over the aptamers to facilitate binding ofpathogens 106 in thesample 104 and labeledpathogens 106 in the reagent mixture to the aptamers. Theunlabeled pathogens 106 in thesample 104 will compete with the labeledpathogens 106 in the reagent mixture for binding to the aptamers. Accordingly, the amount of label bound to the aptamers will vary in accordance with the concentration ofunlabeled pathogens 106 in thesample 104. In some embodiments, aptamer interaction may be used in association with microcantilevers to process one ormore pathogens 106. Methods to construct microcantilevers are known (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,141,385; 6,935,165; 6,926,864; 6,763,705; 6,523,392; 6,325,904; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, one or more aptamers may be used in conjunction with one or more antibodies to process one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, aptamers and antibodies may be used interchangeably to process one ormore samples 104. Accordingly, in some embodiments, methods and/or systems for processing and/or detecting pathogen indicators may utilize antibodies and aptamers interchangeably and/or in combination. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of electrical conductivity. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be processed through use of magnetism. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be combined with one or more tagged polynucleotides that are tagged with a ferrous material, such as a ferrous bead. The tagged polynucleotides and the polynucleotides in the one ormore samples 104 may be incubated to provide hybridized complexes of the tagged polynucleotides and the sample polynucleotides. Hybridization will serve to couple one or more ferrous beads to the polynucleotides in thesample 104 that hybridize with the tagged polynucleotides. Accordingly, the mixture may be passed over an electromagnet to immobilize the hybridized complexes. Other components in thesample 104 may then be washed away from the hybridized complexes. In some embodiments, a chamber containing the magnetically immobilized hybridized complexes may be heated to release the sample polynucleotides from the magnetically immobilized tagged polynucleotides. The sample polynucleotides may then be collected in a more purified state. In other embodiments, similar methods may be used in conjunction with antibodies, aptamers, peptides, ligands, and the like. Accordingly, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured in numerous ways to utilize magnetism to process one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be processed through use of eddy currents. Eddy current separation uses electromagnetic induction in conducting materials to separate non-ferrous metals by their different electric conductivities. An electrical charge is induced into a conductor by changes in magnetic flux cutting through it. Moving permanent magnets passing a conductor generates the change in magnetic flux. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to include a magnetic rotor such that when conducting particles move through the changing flux of the magnetic rotor, a spiraling current and resulting magnetic field are induced. The magnetic field of the conducting particles may interact with the magnetic field of the magnetic rotor to impart kinetic energy to the conducting particles. The kinetic energy imparted to the conducting particles may then be used to direct movement of the conducting particles. Accordingly, non-ferrous particles, such as metallic beads, may be utilized to process one ormore samples 104. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be combined with one or more tagged polynucleotides that are tagged with a non-ferrous material, such as an aluminum bead. The tagged polynucleotides and the polynucleotides in the one ormore samples 104 may be incubated to provide hybridized complexes of the tagged polynucleotides and the sample polynucleotides. Hybridization will serve to couple one or more ferrous beads to the polynucleotides in thesample 104 that hybridize with the tagged polynucleotides. Accordingly, the mixture may be passed through a magnetic field to impart kinetic energy to the non-ferrous bead. This kinetic energy may then be used to separate the hybridized complex. In other embodiments, similar methods may be used in conjunction with antibodies, aptamers, peptides, ligands, and the like. Accordingly, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured in numerous ways to utilize eddy currents to process one ormore samples 104. One or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured in numerous ways to utilize electrical conductivity to process one ormore samples 104. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of isoelectric focusing. Methods have been described that may be used to construct capillary isoelectric focusing systems (e.g., Herr et al., Investigation of a miniaturized capillary isoelectric focusing (cIEF) system using a full-field detection approach, Mechanical Engineering Department, Stanford University, Stanford, Calif.; Wu and Pawliszyn, Journal of Microcolumn Separations, 4:419-422 (1992); Kilar and Hjerten, Electrophoresis, 10:23-29 (1989); U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,150,813; 7,070,682; 6,730,516; herein incorporated by reference). Such systems may be modified to provide for the processing of one ormore samples 104. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of one-dimensional electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of two-dimensional electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of gradient gel electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of electrophoresis under denaturing conditions. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of electrophoresis under native conditions. One or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize numerous electrophoretic methods. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of immunoassay. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of enzyme linked immunosorbant assay (ELISA). In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of radioimmuno assay (RIA). In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of enzyme immunoassay (EIA). In some embodiments, such methods may utilize antibodies (e.g., monoclonal antibodies, polyclonal antibodies, antibody fragments, single-chain antibodies, and the like), aptamers, or substantially any combination thereof. In some embodiments, a labeled antibody and/or aptamer may be used within an immunoassay. Numerous types of labels may be utilized in association with immunoassays. Examples of such labels include, but are not limited to, radioactive labels, fluorescent labels, enzyme labels, spin labels, magnetic labels, gold labels, colorimetric labels, redox labels, and the like. Numerous immunoassays are known and may be configured for processing one ormore samples 104. - In some embodiments, one or more
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of one or more competition assays. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to process one ormore samples 104 through use of one or more polynucleotide based competition assays. One or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to include one or more polynucleotides coupled to a substrate, such as a polynucleotide array. The one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be further configured so that asample 104 and/or substantially purified polynucleotides obtained from one ormore samples 104, may be mixed with one or more reagent mixtures that include one or more labeled polynucleotides to form an analysis mixture. This analysis mixture is then passed over the substrate such that the labeled polynucleotides and the sample polynucleotides are allowed to hybridize to the polynucleotides that are immobilized on the substrate. The sample polynucleotides and the labeled polynucleotides will compete for binding to the polynucleotides that are coupled on the substrate. Accordingly, the presence and/or concentration of the polynucleotides in thesample 104 can be determined through detection of the label (e.g., the concentration of the polynucleotides in thesample 104 will be inversely related to the amount of label that is bound to the substrate). Numerous labels may be used that include, but are not limited to, enzymes, fluorescent molecules, radioactive labels, spin labels, redox labels, and the like. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to include one or more antibodies, proteins, peptides, and/or aptamers that are coupled to a substrate. The one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be further configured so that asample 104 and/or substantially purified sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides obtained from one ormore samples 104, may be mixed with one or more reagent mixtures that include one or more labeled polypeptides and/or labeled peptides to form an analysis mixture. This analysis mixture can then be passed over the substrate such that the labeled polypeptides and/or labeled peptides and the sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides are allowed to bind to the antibodies, proteins, peptides, and/or aptamers that are immobilized on the substrate. The sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides and the labeled polypeptides and/or sample peptides will compete for binding to the antibodies, proteins, peptides, and/or aptamers that are coupled on the substrate. Accordingly, the presence and/or concentration of the sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides in thesample 104 can be determined through detection of the label (e.g., the concentration of the sample polypeptides and/or sample peptides in thesample 104 will be inversely related to the amount of label that is bound to the substrate). Numerous labels may be used that include, but are not limited to, enzymes, fluorescent molecules, radioactive labels, spin labels, redox labels, and the like.Microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to utilize numerous types of competition assays. - Accordingly,
microfluidic chips 108 may be configured for analysis of numerous types of pathogens106 (e.g.,intact pathogen 106 and/or portion of pathogen). System 100 may include one ormore analysis units 110.Analysis units 110 may be configured for analysis of numerous types ofpathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured for analysis of one or more polynucleotides, polypeptides, polysaccharides, enzyme activities, and the like. In some embodiments, one or more polynucleotides, polypeptides, polysaccharides, enzyme activities, and the like that are associated with one ormore pathogens 106 may be analyzed. In some embodiments, one or more polynucleotides, polypeptides, polysaccharides, enzyme activities, and the like that are associated withpathogen 106 activity may be analyzed.- For example, in some embodiments, one or
more analysis units 110 may be configured for analysis of one or more polypeptides through use of numerous techniques that include, but are not limited to, competition assays, immunological methods (e.g., sandwich assays), and the like. - In other embodiments, one or
more analysis units 110 may be configured for analysis of one or more polynucleotides through use of numerous techniques that include, but are not limited to, competition assays, electron transfer assays, electrical conductivity assays, and the like. - In some embodiments, an
analysis unit 110 may include one or more centrifugation units. In some embodiments, one or more centrifugation units may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or more centrifugation units may be used to facilitate analysis and/or detection of one ormore pathogens 106. Methods to fabricate devices that may be used to drive fluid movement through centripetal acceleration in a microfluidics system have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,709,869; herein incorporated by reference). - For example, in some embodiments, one or more centrifugation units may be used to facilitate the analysis of one or more polynucleotides from one or
more samples 104 that are applied to one or more microfluidic chips108 (e.g., U.S. patent application Ser. Nos. 11/699,770; 11/699,920; 11/699,747; and 11/699,774; herein incorporated by reference). - In some embodiments, one or more centrifugation units may be configured to centrifuge one or more
microfluidic chips 108 to facilitate movement of one ormore samples 104, one or more reagents, one or more fluids, and the like through the one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. - In some embodiments, one or more centrifugation units may be configured to centrifuge one or more
microfluidic chips 108 to create a gradient. In some embodiments, velocity gradients may be created to facilitate analysis of one ormore samples 104. For example, glycerol gradients may be used to separate polypeptides from one ormore samples 104. In other embodiments, density gradients may be created to facilitate analysis of one ormore samples 104. For example, cesium chloride may be used to create a density gradient to facilitate the analysis of one or more polynucleotides. In some embodiments, gradient centrifugation may be used to analyze one or more viral particles. - In some embodiments, one or more centrifugation units may be configured to centrifuge one or more
microfluidic chips 108 to facilitate chromatographic separations of components within one ormore samples 104. For example, chromatographic media may be packed within amicrofluidic chip 108 to facilitate the separation of components, such aspathogens 106, from one ormore samples 104. Such chromatographic media is commercially available (e.g., Qiagen Sciences, Germantown, Md. and Pfizer, New York, N.Y.). - In some embodiments, an
analysis unit 110 may include one or more reagent delivery units. In some embodiments, one or more reagent delivery units may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or more reagent delivery units may be configured to contain one or more reagents that may be used within one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 to analyze and/or detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one or more reagent delivery units may include one or more pumps to facilitate delivery of one or more reagents. Numerous types of pumps may be used within a reagent delivery unit. In some embodiments, one or more reagent delivery units may be configured to operably associate with one or more centrifugation units. Accordingly, reagents may be delivered through use of centrifugal force. Reagent delivery units may be configured in numerous ways. For example, in some embodiments, reagent delivery units may include one or more reagent reservoirs, one or more waste reservoirs or substantially any combination thereof. Reagent delivery units may be configured to contain and/or deliver numerous types of reagents. Examples of such reagents include, but are not limited to, phenol, chloroform, alcohol, salt solutions, detergent solutions, solvents, reagents used for polynucleotide precipitation, reagents used for polypeptide precipitation, reagents used for polynucleotide extraction, reagents used for polypeptide extraction, reagents used for chemical extractions, and the like. Accordingly, reagent delivery units may be configured to contain and/or deliver virtually any reagent that may be used for the analysis of one ormore pathogens 106. - In some embodiments, one or
more analysis units 110 may be configured to facilitate detection of one ormore pathogens 106 with at least one technique that includes spectroscopy, electrochemical detection, polynucleotide detection, fluorescence anisotropy, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, electron transfer, enzyme assay, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, chromatography, immunoprecipitation, immunoseparation, aptamer binding, filtration, electrophoresis, use of a CCD camera, immunoassay, or substantially any combination thereof. - In some embodiments, one or
more analysis units 110 may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. For example, in some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include a window (e.g., a quartz window, a cuvette analog, and/or the like) through which one ormore analysis units 110 may determine if one ormore pathogens 106 are present and/or determine the concentration of one ormore pathogens 106. In such embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to utilize numerous techniques, such as visible light spectroscopy, ultraviolet light spectroscopy, infrared spectroscopy, fluorescence spectroscopy, and the like, to detect one ormore pathogens 106. - In some embodiments, one or
more analysis units 110 may be configured to facilitate detection and/or analysis of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of surface plasmon resonance. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include one or more antibodies, aptamers, proteins, peptides, polynucleotides, and the like, that are bound to a substrate (e.g., a metal film) that is associated with a prism through which one ormore analysis units 110 may shine light to detect one ormore pathogens 106 that interact with the one or more antibodies, aptamers, proteins, peptides, polynucleotides, and the like, that are bound to a substrate. - In some embodiments, one or
more analysis units 110 may be configured to facilitate detection and/or analysis of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of nuclear magnetic resonance (NMR). In such embodiments, theanalysis units 110 may be configured to accept an NMR probe and are configured to detect one ormore pathogens 106 through use of NMR spectroscopy. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of spectroscopy. Numerous types of spectroscopic methods may be used. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, ultraviolet spectroscopy, visible light spectroscopy, infrared spectroscopy, x-ray spectroscopy, fluorescence spectroscopy, mass spectroscopy, plasmon resonance (e.g., Chemf et al., Clinical Chemistry, 52:255-262 (2006) and U.S. Pat. No. 7,030,989; herein incorporated by reference), nuclear magnetic resonance spectroscopy, Raman spectroscopy, fluorescence quenching, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, intrinsic fluorescence, ligand fluorescence, and the like. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of electrochemical detection. In some embodiments, one or more polynucleotides may be analyzed through use of electrochemical detection. For example, in some embodiments, a polynucleotide that includes a redox label, such as ferrocene is coupled to a gold electrode. The labeled polynucleotide forms a stem-loop structure that can self-assemble onto a gold electrode by means of facile gold-thiol chemistry. Hybridization of a sample polynucleotide induces a large conformational change in the surface-confined polynucleotide structure, which in turn alters the electron-transfer tunneling distance between the electrode and the redoxable label. The resulting change in electron transfer efficiency may be measured by cyclic voltammetry (Fan et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:9134-9137 (2003); Wang et al., Anal. Chem., 75:3941-3945 (2003); Singh-Zocchi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:7605-7610 (2003)). Such methods may be used to analyze numerous polynucleotides, such as messenger ribonucleic acid, genomic deoxyribonucleic acid, fragments thereof, and the like. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of polynucleotide analysis. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to use polynucleotide analysis. Numerous methods may be used to analyze one or more polynucleotides. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, those based on polynucleotide hybridization, polynucleotide ligation, polynucleotide amplification, polynucleotide degradation, and the like. Methods that utilize intercalation dyes, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, capacitive deoxyribonucleic acid detection, and nucleic acid amplification have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,118,910 and 6,960,437; herein incorporated by reference). Such methods may be adapted to provide for analysis of one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, fluorescence quenching, molecular beacons, electron transfer, electrical conductivity, and the like may be used to analyze polynucleotide interaction. Such methods are known and have been described (e.g., Jarvius, DNA Tools and Microfluidic Systems for Molecular Analysis, Digital Comprehensive Summaries of Uppsala Dissertations from the Faculty of Medicine 161, ACTA UNIVERSITATIS UPSALIENSIS UPPSALA 2006, ISBN: 91-554-6616-8; Singh-Zocchi et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:7605-7610 (2003); Wang et al., Anal. Chem., 75:3941-3945 (2003); Fan et al., Proc. Natl. Acad. Sci., 100:9134-9137 (2003); U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,958,216; 5,093,268; 6,090,545; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, one or more polynucleotides that include at least one carbon nanotube may be combined with one ormore samples 104, and/or one or more partially purified polynucleotides obtained from one ormore samples 104. The one or more polynucleotides that include one or more carbon nanotubes are allowed to hybridize with one or more polynucleotides that may be present within the one ormore samples 104. The one or more carbon nanotubes may be excited (e.g., with an electron beam and/or an ultraviolet laser) and the emission spectra of the excited nanotubes may be correlated with hybridization of the one or more polynucleotides that include at least one carbon nanotube with one or more polynucleotides that are included within the one ormore samples 104. Accordingly, polynucleotides that hybridize to one ormore pathogens 106 may include one or more carbon nanotubes. Methods to utilize carbon nanotubes as probes for nucleic acid interaction have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,821,730; herein incorporated by reference). Numerous other methods based on polynucleotide analysis may be used to analyze one ormore pathogens 106. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of fluorescence anisotropy. Fluorescence anisotropy is based on measuring the steady state polarization of sample fluorescence imaged in a confocal arrangement. A linearly polarized laser excitation source preferentially excites fluorescent target molecules with transition moments aligned parallel to the incident polarization vector. The resultant fluorescence is collected and directed into two channels that measure the intensity of the fluorescence polarized both parallel and perpendicular to that of the excitation beam. With these two measurements, the fluorescence anisotropy, r, can be determined from the equation: r=(Intensity parallel−Intensity perpendicular)/(Intensity parallel+2(Intensity perpendicular)) where the I terms indicate intensity measurements parallel and perpendicular to the incident polarization. Fluorescence anisotropy detection of fluorescent molecules has been described. Accordingly, fluorescence anisotropy may be coupled to numerous fluorescent labels as have been described herein and as have been described. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of fluorescence resonance energy transfer (FRET). Fluorescence resonance energy transfer refers to an energy transfer mechanism between two fluorescent molecules. A fluorescent donor is excited at its fluorescence excitation wavelength. This excited state is then nonradiatively transferred to a second molecule, the fluorescent acceptor. Fluorescence resonance energy transfer may be used within numerous configurations to detected and/or analyze one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, an antibody may be labeled with a fluorescent donor and one ormore pathogens 106 may be labeled with a fluorescent acceptor. Accordingly, such labeled antibodies andpathogens 106 may be used within competition assays to facilitate detection and/or the determination of the concentration of one ormore pathogens 106 in one ormore samples 104. Numerous combinations of fluorescent donors and fluorescent acceptors may be used to analyze one ormore pathogens 106. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to include a window (e.g., quartz) through which fluorescent light may pass to provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of fluorescence resonance energy transfer. Accordingly, fluorescence resonance energy transfer may be used in conjunction with competition assays and/or numerous other types of assays to analyze and/or detect one ormore pathogens 106. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of electron transfer. Electron transfer is the process by which an electron moves from an electron donor to an electron acceptor causing the oxidation states of the electron donor and the electron acceptor to change. In some embodiments, electron transfer may occur when an electron is transferred from one or more electron donors to an electrode. In some embodiments, electron transfer may be utilized within competition assays to analyze one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may include one or more polynucleotides that may be immobilized on one or more electrodes. The immobilized polynucleotides may be incubated with a reagent mixture that includes sample polynucleotides and polynucleotides that are tagged with an electron donor. Hybridization of the tagged polynucleotides to the immobilized polynucleotides allows the electron donor to transfer an electron to the electrode to produce adetectable signal 126. Accordingly, a decrease in signal due to the presence of one or more polynucleotides that arepathogens 106 in the reagent mixture indicates the presence of apathogen 106 in thesample 104. Such methods may be used in conjunction with polynucleotides, polypeptides, peptides, antibodies, aptamers, and the like. One ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 to utilize numerous electron transfer based assays to provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of one or more enzyme assays. Numerous enzyme assays may be used to provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106. Examples of such enzyme assays include, but are not limited to, beta-galactosidase assays, peroxidase assays, catalase assays, alkaline phosphatase assays, and the like. In some embodiments, enzyme assays may be configured such that an enzyme will catalyze a reaction involving an enzyme substrate that produces a fluorescent product. Accordingly, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to facilitate detection of fluorescence resulting from the fluorescent product. Enzymes and fluorescent enzyme substrates are known and are commercially available (e.g., Sigma-Aldrich, St. Louis, Mo.). In some embodiments, enzyme assays may be configured as binding assays that provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to include a substrate to which is coupled one or more antibodies, aptamers, peptides, proteins, polynucleotides, ligands, and the like, that will interact with one ormore pathogens 106. One ormore samples 104 may be passed across the substrate such that one ormore pathogens 106 present within the one ormore samples 104 will interact with the one or more antibodies, aptamers, peptides, proteins, polynucleotides, ligands, and the like, and be immobilized on the substrate. One or more antibodies, aptamers, peptides, proteins, polynucleotides, ligands, and the like, that are labeled with an enzyme may then be passed across the substrate such that the one or more labeled antibodies, aptamers, peptides, proteins, polynucleotides, ligands, and the like, will bind to the one or moreimmobilized pathogens 106. An enzyme substrate may then be introduced to the one or more immobilized enzymes such that the enzymes are able to catalyze a reaction involving the enzyme substrate to produce a fluorescent product. Such assays are often referred to as sandwich assays. Accordingly, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to provide for detection of one or more products of enzyme catalysis to provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of electrical conductivity. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of electrical conductivity. In some embodiments,microfluidic chips 108 may be configured to operably associate with one ormore analysis units 110 such that the one ormore analysis units 110 can detect one ormore pathogens 106 through use of electrical conductivity. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may be configured to include two or more electrodes that are each coupled to one or more detector polynucleotides. Interaction of a pathogen associated polynucleotide, such as hybridization, with two detector polynucleotides that are coupled to two different electrodes will complete an electrical circuit. This completed circuit will provide for the flow of a detectable electrical current between the two electrodes and thereby provide for detection of one or more pathogen associated polynucleotides that indicate the presence of one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, the electrodes may be carbon nanotubes (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 6,958,216; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, electrodes may include, but are not limited to, one or more conductive metals, such as gold, copper, iron, silver, platinum, and the like; one or more conductive alloys; one or more conductive ceramics; and the like. In some embodiments, electrodes may be selected and configured according to protocols typically used in the computer industry that include, but are not limited to, photolithography, masking, printing, stamping, and the like. In some embodiments, other molecules and complexes that interact with one ormore pathogens 106 may be used to detect the one ormore pathogens 106 through use of electrical conductivity. Examples of such molecules and complexes include, but are not limited to, proteins, peptides, antibodies, aptamers, and the like. For example, in some embodiments, two or more antibodies may be immobilized on one or more electrodes such that contact of the two or more antibodies with apathogen 106, such as a spore, a bacterium, a virus, an egg, a worm, a cyst, a protozoan, a single-celled organism, a fungus, an algae, and the like, will complete an electrical circuit and facilitate the production of a detectable electrical current. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of isoelectric focusing. In some embodiments,analysis units 110 may be configured to provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of isoelectric focusing. In such embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to utilize isoelectric focusing to detect and/or analyze one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, native isoelectric focusing may be utilized. In some embodiments, denaturing isoelectric focusing may be utilized. Methods to construct microfluidic channels that may be used for isoelectric focusing have been reported (e.g., Macounova et al., Anal Chem., 73:1627-1633 (2001); Macounova et al., Anal Chem., 72:3745-3751 (2000); Herr et al., Investigation of a miniaturized capillary isoelectric focusing (clEF) system using a full-field detection approach, Mechanical Engineering Department, Stanford University, Stanford, Calif.; Wu and Pawliszyn, Journal of Microcolumn Separations, 4:419-422 (1992); Kilar and Hjerten, Electrophoresis, 10:23-29 (1989); U.S. Pat. Nos. 7,150,813; 7,070,682; 6,730,516; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to include one or more CCD cameras that can be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106 that are analyzed through isoelectric focusing. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to include one or more spectrometers that can be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106. Numerous types of spectrometers may be utilized to detect one ormore pathogens 106 following isoelectric focusing. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to utilize refractive index to detect one ormore pathogens 106. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of chromatographic methodology alone or in combination with additional analysis and/or detection methods. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured for use with chromatographic methods. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 and detect one ormore pathogens 106 that were analyzed through use of chromatographic methods. In some embodiments, the one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 and supply solvents and other reagents to the one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include pumps and solvent/buffer reservoirs that are configured to supply solvent/buffer flow through chromatographic media (e.g., a chromatographic column) that is operably associated with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. Numerous types of chromatographic methods and media may be used to analyze one ormore samples 104 and provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106. Chromatographic methods include, but are not limited to, low pressure liquid chromatography, high pressure liquid chromatography (HPLC), microcapillary low pressure liquid chromatography, microcapillary high pressure liquid chromatography, ion exchange chromatography, affinity chromatography, gel filtration chromatography, size exclusion chromatography, thin layer chromatography, paper chromatography, gas chromatography, and the like. Methods that may be used to prepare microcapillary HPLC columns (e.g., columns with a 100 micrometer-500 micrometer inside diameter) have been described (e.g., Davis et al., Methods, A Companion to Methods in Enzymology, 6: Micromethods for Protein Structure Analysis, ed. by John E. Shively, Academic Press, Inc., San Diego, 304-314 (1994); Swiderek et al., Trace Structural Analysis of Proteins. Methods of Enzymology, ed. by Barry L. Karger & William S. Hancock, Spectrum, Publisher Services, 271, Chap. 3, 68-86 (1996); Moritz and Simpson, J. Chromatogr., 599:119-130 (1992)). Methods to prepare affinity columns have been described. Briefly, a biotinylated site may be engineered into a polypeptide, peptide, aptamer, antibody, or the like. The biotinylated protein may then be incubated with avidin coated polystyrene beads and slurried in Tris buffer. The slurry may then be packed into a capillary affinity column through use of high pressure packing. Affinity columns may be prepared that may include one or more molecules and/or complexes that interact with one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one or more aptamers that bind to one ormore pathogens 106 may be used to construct an affinity column. Accordingly, numerous chromatographic methods may be used alone, or in combination with additional methods, to process and detect one ormore pathogens 106. Numerous detection methods may be used in combination with numerous types of chromatographic methods. Accordingly, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to utilize numerous detection methods to detect one ormore pathogens 106 that are analyzed through use of one or more chromatographic methods. Examples of such detection methods include, but are not limited to, conductivity detection, use of ion-specific electrodes, refractive index detection, calorimetric detection, radiological detection, detection by retention time, detection through use of elution conditions, spectroscopy, and the like. For example, in some embodiments, one or more chromatographic markers may be added to one ormore samples 104 prior to thesamples 104 being applied to a chromatographic column. One ormore analysis units 110 that are operably associated with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that include a chromatographic column may be configured to detect the one or more chromatographic markers and use the elution time and/or position of the chromatographic markers as a calibration tool for use in detecting one ormore pathogens 106. Accordingly, chromatographic methods may be used in combination with additional methods and in combination with numerous types of detection methods. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of immunoprecipitation. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106 through use of immunoprecipitation. In some embodiments, ananalysis unit 110 may be configured to associated with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to utilize immunoprecipitation to analyze one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, immunoprecipitation may be utilized in combination with additional analysis and/or detection methods to analyze and/or detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to analyze one ormore samples 104 through use of immunoprecipitation. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be combined with one or more antibodies that bind to one ormore pathogens 106 to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes. An insoluble form of an antibody binding constituent, such as protein A (e.g., protein A-sepharose bead, protein A-magnetic bead, protein A-ferrous bead, protein A-non-ferrous bead, and the like), Protein G, a second antibody, an aptamer, and the like, may then be mixed with the antibody-pathogen complex such that the insoluble antibody binding constituent binds to the antibody-pathogen complex and provides for precipitation of the antibody-pathogen complex. Such complexes may be separated from other sample components to provide for detection of one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, sample components may be washed away from the precipitated antibody-pathogen complexes. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 that are configured for immunoprecipitation may include one or more centrifugation units to assist in precipitating one or more antibody-pathogen complexes. In some embodiments, aptamers (polypeptide and/or polynucleotide) may be used in combination with antibodies or in place of antibodies. Accordingly, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to detect one ormore pathogens 106 through use of numerous detection methods in combination with immunoprecipitation based methods. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be analyzed through use of immunoseparation. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to analyze one ormore pathogens 106 through use of immunoseparation. For example, in some embodiments, ananalysis unit 110 may be configured to associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to analyze one ormore pathogens 106 through use of immunoseparation. In some embodiments, immunoseparation may be utilized in combination with additional analysis and/or detection methods to detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to analyze one ormore samples 104 through use of immunoseparation. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be combined with one or more antibodies that bind to one ormore pathogens 106 to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes. An antibody binding constituent may be added that binds to the antibody-pathogen complex. Examples of such antibody binding constituents that may be used alone or in combination include, but are not limited to, protein A (e.g., protein A-sepharose bead, protein A-magnetic bead, protein A-ferrous bead, protein A-non-ferrous bead, and the like), Protein G, a second antibody, an aptamer, and the like. Such antibody binding constituents may be mixed with an antibody-pathogen complex such that the antibody binding constituent binds to the antibody-pathogen complex and provides for separation of the antibody-pathogen complex. In some embodiments, the antibody binding constituent may include a tag that allows the antibody binding constituent and complexes that include the antibody binding constituent to be separated from other components in one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, the antibody binding constituent may include a ferrous material. Accordingly, antibody-pathogen complexes may be separated from other sample components through use of a magnet, such as an electromagnet. In some embodiments, an antibody binding constituent may include a non-ferrous metal. Accordingly, antibody-pathogen complexes may be separated from other sample components through use of an eddy current to direct movement of one or more antibody-pathogen complexes. In some embodiments, two or more forms of an antibody binding constituents may be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, a first antibody binding constituent may be coupled to a ferrous material and a second antibody binding constituent may be coupled to a non-ferrous material. Accordingly, the first antibody binding constituent and the second antibody binding constituent may be mixed with antibody-pathogen complexes such that the first antibody binding constituent and the second antibody binding constituent bind to antibody-pathogen complexes that includedifferent pathogens 106. Accordingly, in such embodiments,different pathogens 106 from asingle sample 104 and/or a combination ofsamples 104 may be separated through use of direct magnetic separation in combination with eddy current based separation. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be combined with one or more antibodies that bind to one ormore pathogens 106 to form one or more antibody-pathogen complexes. In some embodiments, the one or more antibodies may include one or more tags that provide for separation of the antibody-pathogen complexes. For example, in some embodiments, an antibody may include a tag that includes one or more magnetic beads, a ferrous material, a non-ferrous metal, an affinity tag, a size exclusion tag (e.g., a large bead that is excluded from entry into chromatographic media such that antibody-pathogen complexes pass through a chromatographic column in the void volume), and the like. Accordingly, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to analyze one ormore pathogens 106 through use of numerous analysis methods in combination with immunoseparation based methods. In some embodiments, aptamers (polypeptide and/or polynucleotide) may be used in combination with antibodies or in place of antibodies. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be analyzed through use of aptamer binding. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to analyze one ormore pathogens 106 through use of aptamer binding. In some embodiments, aptamer binding may be utilized in combination with additional analysis and/or detection methods to detect one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be combined with one or more aptamers that bind to one ormore pathogens 106 to form one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes. Such complexes may be detected through use of numerous methods that include, but are not limited to, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, fluorescence quenching, surface plasmon resonance, and the like. In some embodiments, aptamer binding constituents may be added that bind to the aptamer-pathogen complex. Numerous aptamer binding constituents may be utilized. For example, in some embodiments, one or more aptamers may include one or more tags to which one or more aptamer binding constituents may bind. Examples of such tags include, but are not limited to, biotin, avidin, streptavidin, histidine tags, nickel tags, ferrous tags, non-ferrous tags, and the like. In some embodiments, one or more tags may be conjugated with a label to provide for detection of one or more complexes. Examples of such tag-label conjugates include, but are not limited to, Texas red conjugated avidin, alkaline phosphatase conjugated avidin, CY2 conjugated avidin, CY3 conjugated avidin, CY3.5 conjugated avidin, CY5 conjugated avidin, CY5.5 conjugated avidin, fluorescein conjugated avidin, glucose oxidase conjugated avidin, peroxidase conjugated avidin, rhodamine conjugated avidin, agarose conjugated anti-protein A, alkaline phosphatase conjugated protein A, anti-protein A, fluorescein conjugated protein A, IRDye® 800 conjugated protein A, peroxidase conjugated protein A, sepharose protein A, alkaline phosphatase conjugated streptavidin, AMCA conjugated streptavidin, anti-streptavidin (Streptomyces avidinii) (rabbit) IgG Fraction, beta-galactosidase conjugated streptavidin, CY2 conjugated streptavidin, CY3 conjugated streptavidin, CY3.5 conjugated streptavidin, CY5 conjugated streptavidin, CY5.5 conjugated streptavidin, fluorescein conjugated streptavidin, IRDye® 700DX conjugated streptavidin, IRDye® 800 conjugated streptavidin, IRDye® 800CW conjugated streptavidin, peroxidase conjugated streptavidin, phycoerythrin conjugated streptavidin, rhodamine conjugated streptavidin, Texas red conjugated streptavidin, alkaline phosphatase conjugated biotin, anti-biotin (rabbit) IgG fraction, beta-galactosidase conjugated biotin, glucose oxidase conjugated biotin, peroxidase conjugated biotin, alkaline phosphatase conjugated protein G, anti-protein G (rabbit) Agarose conjugated, anti-protein G (Rabbit) IgG fraction, fluorescein conjugated protein G, IRDye® 800 conjugated protein G, peroxidase conjugated protein G, and the like. Many such labeled tags are commercially available (e.g., Rockland Immunochemicals, Inc., Gilbertsville, Pa.). Such labels may also be used in association with other methods to analyze and detect one ormore pathogens 106. Aptamer binding constituents may be mixed with an aptamer-pathogen complex such that the aptamer binding constituent binds to the aptamer-pathogen complex and provides for separation of the aptamer-pathogen complex. In some embodiments, the aptamer binding constituent may include a tag that allows the aptamer binding constituent and complexes that include the aptamer binding constituent to be separated from other components in one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, the aptamer binding constituent may include a ferrous material. Accordingly, aptamer-pathogen complexes may be separated from other sample components through use of a magnet, such as an electromagnet. In some embodiments, an aptamer binding constituent may include a non-ferrous metal. Accordingly, aptamer-pathogen complexes may be separated from other sample components through use of an eddy current to direct movement of one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes. In some embodiments, two or more forms of aptamer binding constituents may be used to analyze one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, a first aptamer binding constituent may be coupled to a ferrous material and a second aptamer binding constituent may be coupled to a non-ferrous material. Accordingly, the first aptamer binding constituent and the second aptamer binding constituent may be mixed with aptamer-pathogen complexes such that the first aptamer binding constituent and the second aptamer binding constituent bind to aptamer-pathogen complexes that includedifferent pathogens 106. Accordingly, in such embodiments,different pathogens 106 from asingle sample 104 and/or a combination ofsamples 104 may be separated through use of direct magnetic separation in combination with eddy current based separation. In some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be combined with one or more aptamers that bind to one ormore pathogens 106 to form one or more aptamer-pathogen complexes. In some embodiments, the one or more aptamers may include one or more tags that provide for separation of the aptamer-pathogen complexes. For example, in some embodiments, an aptamer may include a tag that includes one or more magnetic beads, a ferrous material, a non-ferrous metal, an affinity tag, a size exclusion tag (e.g., a large bead that is excluded from entry into chromatographic media such that antibody-pathogen complexes pass through a chromatographic column in the void volume), and the like. Accordingly, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to detect one ormore pathogens 106 in combination with numerous analysis methods. In some embodiments, antibodies may be used in combination with aptamers and/or in place of aptamers. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be analyzed through use of electrophoresis. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to analyze one ormore samples 104 through use of electrophoresis. In some embodiments, such analysis units10 may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to detect and/or analyze one ormore pathogens 106 through use of electrophoresis. Numerous electrophoretic methods may be utilized to analyze and/or detect one ormore pathogens 106. Examples of such electrophoretic methods include, but are not limited to, capillary electrophoresis, one-dimensional electrophoresis, two-dimensional electrophoresis, native electrophoresis, denaturing electrophoresis, polyacrylamide gel electrophoresis, agarose gel electrophoresis, and the like. Numerous detection methods may be used in combination with one or more electrophoretic methods to detect one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore pathogens 106 may be detected according to the position to which the one ormore pathogens 106 migrate within an electrophoretic field (e.g., a capillary and/or a gel). In some embodiments, the position of one ormore pathogens 106 may be compared to one or more standards. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore samples 104 may be mixed with one or more molecular weight markers prior to gel electrophoresis. The one ormore samples 104 that include the one or more molecular weight markers, may be subjected to electrophoresis and then the gel may be stained. In some embodiments, refraction, absorbance, and/or fluorescence may be used to determine the position of sample components within a gel. In such embodiments, the molecular weight markers may be used as a reference to detect one ormore pathogens 106 present within the one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or more components that are known to be present within one ormore samples 104 may be used as a reference to detect one ormore pathogens 106 present within the one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, gel shift assays may be used to detect one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, a sample104 (e.g., asingle sample 104 or combination of multiple samples104) may be split into afirst sample 104 and asecond sample 104. Thefirst sample 104 may be mixed with an antibody, aptamer, ligand, or other molecule and/or complex that binds to the one ormore pathogens 106. The first andsecond samples 104 may then be subjected to electrophoresis. The gels corresponding to thefirst sample 104 and thesecond sample 104 may then be analyzed to determine if one ormore pathogens 106 are present within the one ormore samples 104.Analysis units 110 may be configured in numerous ways to analyze and detect one ormore pathogens 106 through use of electrophoresis. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be detected and/or analyzed through use of one or more charge-coupled device (CCD) cameras. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 that include one or more CCD cameras may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108.Such analysis units 110 may be utilized in combination with numerous analysis methods. Examples of such methods include, but are not limited to, electrophoresis; competition assays; methods based on polynucleotide interaction, protein interaction, peptide interaction, antibody interaction, aptamer interaction, immunoprecipitation, immunoseparation, and the like. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to analyze one ormore samples 104 through use of immunoprecipitation. In some embodiments, one or more antibodies may be conjugated to a fluorescent label such that binding of one or more labeled antibodies to one ormore pathogens 106 included within one ormore samples 104 will form a fluorescently labeled antibody-pathogen complex. One or more insoluble pathogen binding constituents, such as a sepharose bead that includes an antibody or aptamer that binds to the one ormore pathogens 106, may be bound to the fluorescently labeled antibody-pathogen complex and used to precipitate the complex. One ormore analysis units 110 that include a CCD camera that is configured to detect fluorescent emission from the one or more fluorescent labels may be used to detect the one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one or more CCD cameras may be configured to utilize dark frame subtraction to cancel background and increase sensitivity of the camera. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include one or more filters to select and/or filter wavelengths of energy that can be detected by one or more CCD cameras (e.g., U.S. Pat. No. 3,971,065; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may include polarized lenses. One ormore analysis units 110 may be configured in numerous ways to utilize one or more CCD cameras to detect one ormore pathogens 106. - In some embodiments, one or
more pathogens 106 may be analyzed through use of immunoassay. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to analyze one ormore samples 104 through use of immunoassay. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be configured to operably associate with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 that are configured to analyze one ormore samples 104 through use of immunoassay. Numerous types of detection methods may be used in combination with immunoassay based methods. In some embodiments, a label may be used within one or more immunoassays that may be detected by one ormore analysis units 110. Examples of such labels include, but are not limited to, fluorescent labels, spin labels, fluorescence resonance energy transfer labels, radiolabels, electrochemiluminescent labels (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 5,093,268; 6,090,545; herein incorporated by reference), and the like. In some embodiments, electrical conductivity may be used in combination with immunoassay based methods. - In some embodiments, an
analysis unit 110 may be configured to utilize numerous detection methods. Examples of such detection methods include, but are not limited to, calorimetric methods, spectroscopic methods, resonance based methods, electron transfer based methods (redox), conductivity based methods, gravimetric based assays, turbidity based methods, ion-specific based methods, refractive index based methods, radiological based methods, or substantially any combination thereof. - The
system 100 may include one ormore processing units 112. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may include memory and/or one or more databases that include information related toagents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may access memory and/or one or more databases that include information related toagents 142. Such information may include: identities ofagents 142, contraindications ofagents 142, dosages for use ofagents 142, administration schedules foragents 142, methods of administration foragents 142, cost ofagents 142, coverage ofagents 142 by insurance companies, coverage ofagents 142 by health care providers, chemical structures foragents 142, generic names foragents 142, brand names foragents 142, geographical distributions foragents 142, regulatory restrictions related toagents 142, alternatives toagents 142, side-effects ofagents 142,agents 142 that reduce the pathogenicity ofpathogens 106, stability ofagents 142, shelf-life ofagents 142, recommended shipping procedures foragents 142, and the like. Accordingly, one ormore processing units 112 may access memory and/or one or more databases to determine one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of one or more detectedpathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may access one or more remote databases. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may access one or more databases at pharmaceutical companies, pharmacies, health care facilities, and the like. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may include a computer. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may perform numerous types of calculations. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may calculate one or more dosages of one ormore agents 142 for administration to one ormore individuals 102. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may perform numerous types of calculations in response to information related to one ormore individuals 102. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may calculate dosages of one ormore agents 142 for administration to one or morespecific individuals 102. - The
system 100 may include one ormore display units 114. Numerous types ofdisplay units 114 may be used in association withsystem 100. Examples ofsuch display units 114 include, but are not limited to, liquid crystal displays, printers, audible displays, cathode ray displays, plasma display panels, Braille displays, passive displays, chemical displays, active displays, and the like. In some embodiments,display units 114 may display information in numerous languages. Examples of such languages include, but are not limited to, English, Spanish, German, Japanese, Chinese, Italian, and the like. In some embodiments,display units 114 may display information pictographically, calorimetrically, and/or physically, such as displaying information in Braille. - In some embodiments, one or
more display units 114 may be physically coupled to one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be remotely coupled to one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be physically coupled to one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be remotely coupled to one ormore analysis units 110. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be physically coupled to one or more detection units. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be remotely coupled to one or more detection units. Accordingly, one ormore display units 114 may be positioned in one or more locations that are remote from the position where analysis of one ormore pathogens 106 takes place. Examples of such remote locations include, but are not limited to, the offices of physicians, nurses, pharmacists, and the like. - Numerous types of
signals 126 may be used in association withsystem 100. Examples ofsuch signals 126 include, but are not limited to,optical signals 126, radio signals126, wireless signals126,hardwired signals 126,infrared signals 126,ultrasonic signals 126, and the like. - In some embodiments, one or
more signals 126 may not be encrypted. In some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be encrypted. In some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be sent through use of a secure mode of transmission. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be transmitted to a specified individual. In some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be transmitted to a specified group. In some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one ormore signals 126 may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient. In some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals126 (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like). In some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be sent in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be transmitted in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. - The
system 100 may include one ormore transmitting units 116. Numerous types of transmittingunits 116 may be used in association withsystem 100. Examples of such transmittingunits 116 include, but are not limited to, transmitters that transmit one or more optical signals, radio signals, wireless signals, hardwired signals, infrared signals, ultrasonic signals, and the like (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. RE39,785; 7,260,768; 7,260,764; 7,260,402; 7,257,327; 7,215,887; 7,218,900; herein incorporated by reference). In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that are encrypted. Numerous types of transmitters are known and have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. and Published U.S. Patent Applications 7,236,595; 7,260,155; 7,227,956; US2006/0280307; herein incorporated by reference). - The
system 100 may include one ormore receiving units 136. Numerous types of receivingunits 136 may be used in association withsystem 100. Examples of such receivingunits 136 include, but are not limited to, receivers that receive one or more optical signals, radio signals, wireless signals, hardwired signals, infrared signals, ultrasonic signals, and the like. Such receivers are known and have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. RE39,785; 7,218,900; 7,254,160; 7,245,894; 7,206,605; herein incorporated by reference). - The
system 100 may include one or moreaccepting units 118. In some embodiments, one or moreaccepting units 118 may acceptinput 120 from one or more users124. In some embodiments, the user124 may be an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. In some embodiments, the user124 may be someone other than an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. In some embodiments,input 120 may be entered into one or moreaccepting units 118 through use of a user interface122. For example, in some embodiments,input 120 may be entered into an acceptingunit 118 through use of a keyboard, a keypad, an audio based system, a wireless system, and the like. In some embodiments, one or more users124 may enterinput 120 into an acceptingunit 118 through use of a wireless device, such as a mobile telephone, personal data assistant, a radio transmitter, and the like. In some embodiments, one or moreaccepting units 118 may include a touch screen on which informational choices are displayed. For example, a touch screen may display a series of questions that a user124 may answer. Such questions may include questions pertaining to an individual's102 height, weight, blood pressure, exercise habits, substance use habits, sleep habits, occupation, insurance provider, health care provider, financial information, location, cholesterol level, metabolic indicators, and the like. In some embodiments, an acceptingunit 118 may include memory in whichinput 120 may be stored. In some embodiments, an acceptingunit 118 may include a database in whichinput 120 may be stored. In some embodiments, an acceptingunit 118 may include a receiver that is configured to receive wireless signals126. In some embodiments, an acceptingunit 118 may include a receiver that is configured to operably connect to a telephone connection, a data port, a digital cable, an optical cable, and the like. - Numerous types of
input 120 may be entered intosystem 100. Examples ofsuch input 120 include, but are not limited to, an individual's102 height, weight, blood pressure, exercise habits, substance use habits, sleep habits, occupation, insurance provider, health care provider, financial information, location, cholesterol level, metabolic indicators, and the like. - The
system 100 may include one or more packaging units138. In some embodiments, packaging units138 may be configured to package one ormore agents 142 in unit dosage form. In some embodiments, packaging units138 may be configured to package one ormore agents 142 in numerous types of administration forms. For example, in some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 in packaging material that provides for release of the one ormore agents 142 at selected positions within an individual102 (e.g., stomach, intestine, eye, nose, lungs, etc.). In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 in packaging material that provides for administration of the one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 for interperitoneal administration, nasal administration, pulmonary administration, intravenous administration, intraperitoneal administration, and the like. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers or excipients. - The
system 100 may include one ormore shipping units 140. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may address one or more packages for delivery to a destination. Examples of such destinations include, but are not limited to, the residence of an individual102, a hospital, a medical field station, a ship, a health care facility, a pharmacy, and the like. In some embodiments, ashipping unit 140 may include circuitry and program instructions that provide for access to shipping schedules and routes used by shipping companies. Accordingly, in some embodiments, ashipping unit 140 may determine a route for shipping one or more packages that is responsive to the identity of one ormore agents 142 that are to be shipped. For example, in some embodiments, anagent 142 may need to be packaged in dry ice to preserve theagent 142. Accordingly, ashipping unit 140 may select overnight delivery to a destination to preserve the integrity of theagent 142. Accordingly, one ormore shipping units 140 may select a schedule and route that is appropriate for anagent 142 that is to be shipped. - Numerous types of users124 may interact with
system 100. In some embodiments, a user124 may be human. In some embodiments, a user124 may be non-human. In some embodiments, a user124 may interact with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108, one or more reagent delivery units, one or more centrifugation units, one ormore analysis units 110, one or more detection units, one ormore display units 114, one or more user interfaces122, or substantially any combination thereof. The user can interact through use of numerous types of user interfaces122. For example, one or more users124 may interact through use of numerous user interfaces122 that utilize hardwired methods, such as through use of a keyboard, use of wireless methods, use of the internet, and the like. In some embodiments, a user124 may be a health-care worker. Examples of such health-care workers include, but are not limited to, physicians, nurses, pharmacists, and the like. In some embodiments, a user124 may be a hiker, a farmer, a food inspector, a cook, a traveler, and the like. FIG. 2 illustrates anoperational flow 200 representing examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 2 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 200 includes an identifyingoperation 210 involving identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be used to identify one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. - After a start operation, the
operational flow 200 includes an acceptingoperation 220 involving accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one or moreaccepting units 118 may be used to acceptinput 120 associated with an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. - After a start operation, the
operational flow 200 includes a determiningoperation 230 involving determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be used to determine one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106. FIG. 3 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 200 ofFIG. 2 .FIG. 3 illustrates example embodiments where the identifyingoperation 210 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 302,operation 304, and/oroperation 306.- At
operation 302, the identifyingoperation 210 may include accepting the one or more samples with the one or more microfluidic chips. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104 that include one or more liquids. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104 that include one or more solids. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104 that include one or more gases. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104 that include one or morebiological samples 104. Examples ofbiological samples 104 include, but are not limited to, blood, cerebrospinal fluid, mucus, breath, urine, fecal material, skin, tissue, tears, hair, and the like. - At
operation 304, the identifyingoperation 210 may include processing the one or more samples with the one or more microfluidic chips to facilitate analysis of one or more pathogen indicators associated with the one or more samples. In some embodiments, the identifyingoperation 210 may include processing one ormore samples 104 with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 through use of polynucleotide interaction, protein interaction, peptide interaction, antibody interaction, chemical interaction, diffusion, filtration, chromatography, aptamer interaction, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, electrophoresis, immunoassay, competition assay, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 306, the identifyingoperation 210 may include analyzing one or more pathogen indicators with one or more analysis units that are configured to operably associate with the one or more microfluidic chips. In some embodiments, identifyingoperation 210 may include analyzing the one or more pathogen indicators with one ormore analysis units 110 through use of at least one technique that includes spectroscopy, electrochemical detection, polynucleotide detection, fluorescence anisotropy, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, electron transfer, enzyme assay, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, chromatography, immunoprecipitation, immunoseparation, aptamer binding, electrophoresis, use of a CCD camera, immunoassay, or substantially any combination thereof. FIG. 4 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 200 ofFIG. 2 .FIG. 4 illustrates example embodiments where the acceptingoperation 220 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 402, and/or operation404.- At
operation 402, the acceptingoperation 220 may include accepting input associated with one or more parameters related to the individual. In some embodiments, one or moreaccepting units 118 may acceptinput 120 associated with one or more parameters related to an individual102. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be physical parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be psychological parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be financial parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be health care provided related parameters (e.g., physician's name, insurance provider, HMO name, prescription plan, etc.). - At operation404, the accepting
operation 220 may include accepting input associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or location. In some embodiments, one or moreaccepting units 118 may acceptinput 120 associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition (e.g., body mass index, fat percentage), substance use (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, illicit drugs), liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage (e.g., prescription plan, insurance limits, limitations on providers, HMO limitations), pregnancy status (e.g., pregnant, not pregnant, unknown), blood pressure, child bearing plans (e.g., yes, no, time when planning to become pregnant), one or more activities (e.g., travel, athletic activities, occupational activities, driving), location (e.g., travel to foreign nation, local address, town, city), or substantially any combination thereof. FIG. 5 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 200 ofFIG. 2 .FIG. 5 illustrates example embodiments where the determiningoperation 230 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation502,operation 504,operation 506, operation508, and/oroperation 510.- At operation502, the determining
operation 230 may include identifying one or more chemical agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or morechemical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least onepathogen 106 that is identified. Numerouschemical agents 142 may be identified. Examples of suchchemical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, ozone, peroxides, chlorinated compounds, acids, bases, alcohols, and the like (e.g., Merck Index, Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. (2001) and Mosby's Drug Guide, An Imprint of Elsevier, St. Louis, Mo. (2004)). In some embodiments, suchchemical agents 142 may be identified that are specific for one or more identifiedpathogens 106. - At
operation 504, the determiningoperation 230 may include identifying one or more mechanical agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or moremechanical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least onepathogen 106 that is identified. Numerousmechanical agents 142 may be identified. Examples of suchmechanical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, ultraviolet light, irradiation, and the like. In some embodiments, suchmechanical agents 142 may be identified that are specific for one or more identifiedpathogens 106. - At
operation 506, the determiningoperation 230 may include identifying the one or more bioagents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more bioagents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106 that are identified. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more bacteriophages that may be used to reduce the disease causing ability of a bacteria. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more invasive recombinant bacteria that may be used to deliver a gene product that may be used to reduce the disease causing ability of one or more pathogens. For example, in some embodiments, such recombinant bacteria may be engineered to produce an antibiotic. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more inactivated pathogens (e.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi) that may be used to induce an immune response against one or more pathogens. - At operation508, the determining
operation 230 may include identifying the one or more agents that are not contraindicated by one or more substances used by the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that are not contraindicated by one or more substances used by an individual102. For example, in some embodiments, an individual102 may use one or more prescription medications. In such embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that do not contraindicate the one or more prescription medications. In some embodiments, an individual102 may use one or more substances such as tobacco or alcohol that may contraindicate anagent 142. Accordingly, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that are not affected by one or more substances used by an individual102 and/or that do not affect one or more substances used by an individual102. Accordingly, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 with regard to numerous types of substances used by an individual102. - At
operation 510, the determiningoperation 230 may include identifying the one or more additional agents that act synergistically with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or moreadditional agents 142 that act synergistically with the one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or moreadditional agents 142 that increase the effectiveness of one or more antibiotics. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more antibacterial adjuvants (e.g., beta-lactamase inhibitors) that may act synergistically with one or more antibiotics. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that up regulate an immune response against a pathogen that may act synergistically with one or moreother agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that down regulate an immune response against a pathogen that may act synergistically with one or moreother agents 142. FIG. 6 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 200 ofFIG. 2 .FIG. 6 illustrates example embodiments where the determiningoperation 230 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 602, operation604, and/or operation606.- At
operation 602, the determiningoperation 230 may include identifying the one or more agents in response to one or more parameters associated with the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 in response to one or more parameters associated with the individual102. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore agents 142 may be identified for application to aspecific individual 102. Such embodiments provide for personalized selection and dosing ofagents 142 that may be used to treat pathogen infection. Numerous parameters associated with an individual102 may be considered. Examples of such parameters include, but are not limited to, size, weight, allergies, body composition, substance use, and the like. - At operation604, the determining
operation 230 may include identifying one or more agents in response to at least one parameter associated with the individual that includes age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or child bearing plans. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 in response to at least one parameter associated with the individual102 that includes age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, or substantially any combination thereof. - At operation606, the determining
operation 230 may include identifying one or more agents that reduce the pathogenicity of at least one virus, bacterium, worm, egg, cyst, protozoan, single-celled organism, fungus, algae, pathogenic protein, or microbe. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that reduce the pathogenicity of at least one virus, bacterium, worm, egg, cyst, protozoan, single-celled organism, fungus, algae, pathogenic protein, or microbe.Numerous agents 142 are known that will reduce the pathogenicity of one or more pathogens106 (The Merck Index, 13th Edition, An Encyclopedia of Chemicals, Drugs, and Biologicals, Merck & Co. Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. 2001; Mosby's Drug Guide, Mosby, Inc., St. Louis, Mo. 2004; Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, Pa. 2000; Physicians' Desk Reference, 58th Edition, Thompson, PDR, Montvale, N.J. 2004). FIG. 7 illustratesoperational flow 700 that includesoperations operations FIG. 2 , with an optionally included displayingoperation 740 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 7 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 700 optionally includes a displayingoperation 740 involving displaying information associated with the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be used to display information associated with one ormore agents 142. Numerous types ofdisplay units 114 may be used to display information. Examples ofsuch display units 114 include, but are not limited to, liquid crystal displays, light emitting diode displays, audio displays, Braille displays, graphical displays, and the like. Numerous types of information may be displayed. Examples of such types of information include, but are not limited to, the identity of one ormore agents 142, the dosage of one ormore agents 142, contraindications associated with the one ormore agents 142, administration method to be used with one ormore agents 142, administration schedule associated with one ormore agents 142, and the like. FIG. 8 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 700 ofFIG. 7 .FIG. 8 illustrates example embodiments where the displayingoperation 740 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 802,operation 804, and/or operation806.- At
operation 802, the displayingoperation 740 may include displaying an identity of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be used to display an identity of one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display the identity of one ormore agents 142 in numerous languages (e.g., English, French, Spanish, Italian, Japanese, etc.). In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display the identity of one ormore agents 142 according to chemical name, brand name, generic name, name according to location (e.g., name in a given country), and the like. - At
operation 804, the displayingoperation 740 may include displaying dosage information associated with the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be used to display dosage information associated with one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, dosage may be displayed with reference to a schedule. For example, in some embodiments, anagent 142 may be administered more often at a lower dosage while in other embodiments theagent 142 may be administered less often at a higher dose. In some embodiments, a dosage of one ormore agents 142 may depend upon the method used to administer the one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, anagent 142 may be administered orally, intravenously, or nasally. Accordingly, the dosage that is displayed may depend on the methods used to administer theagent 142. - At operation806, the displaying
operation 740 may include displaying instructions associated with use of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be used to display instructions associated with use of one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display a schedule for administration of one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display instructions with regard to routes for administration of one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display instructions for food and/or beverage consumption during administration of one ormore agents 142. Accordingly, numerous types of information may be displayed by one ormore display units 114. FIG. 9 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 700 ofFIG. 7 .FIG. 9 illustrates example embodiments where the displayingoperation 740 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 902,operation 904, and/oroperation 906.- At
operation 902, the displayingoperation 740 may include displaying information associated with cost of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be used to display information associated with the cost of one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display a combination ofagents 142 based on the combined cost of theagents 142. For example, in some embodiments, two ormore agents 142 may be displayed that are compatible with each other and an individual102 as well as providing the lowest cost when compared to othercomparable agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display a group ofagents 142 and their associated cost. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display a group ofagents 142 and information related to whether the cost of theagents 142 will be paid by an individual's health care plan or insurance. Numerous types of information may be displayed with regard to the cost of one ormore agents 142. - At
operation 904, the displayingoperation 740 may include displaying information associated with insurance coverage related to the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be used to display information associated with insurance coverage related to one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display a group ofagents 142 and information related to which of theagents 142 are included within a health care or insurance plan. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display alternative health care or insurance plans under which the cost of one ormore agents 142 will be covered. Accordingly, in such embodiments, an individual102 may be presented with information that allows the individual102 to select an insurance or health care plan under which the cost of one ormore agents 142 will be covered. - At
operation 906, the displayingoperation 740 may include displaying one or more contraindications associated with the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be used to display one or more contraindications associated with one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display one or more selectedagents 142 andadditional agents 142 that contraindicate the selectedagents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display activities that are contraindicated by one or more selectedagents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may indicate that an individual102 should not drive or operate machinery following administration of one ormore agents 142. Accordingly, numerous types of information may be displayed. FIG. 10 illustratesoperational flow 1000 that includesoperations operations FIG. 7 with an optionally included transmittingoperation 1050 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 10 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 1000 optionally includes atransmitting operation 1050 involving transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be used to transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142. The one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmitsignals 126 through use of numerous technologies. For example,such signals 126 may be transmitted through use of the internet, radio waves, optical cables, cellular telephone connections, telephone connections, satellite telephone connections, and the like. The one ormore signals 126 may be transmitted to, and received by, numerous types of receivers. For example, one ormore signals 126 may be received by pharmacies, hospitals, pharmaceutical companies, health care providers, nutraceutical companies, and the like. FIG. 11 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 1000 ofFIG. 10 .FIG. 11 illustrates example embodiments where the transmittingoperation 1050 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 1102,operation 1104,operation 1106,operation 1108,operation 1110, and/oroperation 1112.- At
operation 1102, the transmittingoperation 1050 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the identity of one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the identity of one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the brand name, the generic name, the chemical name, the structure, identifiers associated with anagent 142, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 1104, the transmittingoperation 1050 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with an individual102. One ormore signals 126 that include numerous types of information associated with an individual102 may be transmitted. Examples of such information include, but are not limited to, height, weight, age, substances used by an individual102 (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, prescription medication, non-prescription medication, illicit drugs, etc.), body composition, allergies, physical characteristics (e.g., blood pressure, heart rate, intraocular pressure, etc.), activities, and the like. - At
operation 1106, the transmittingoperation 1050 may include transmitting the one or more signals through use of a secure connection. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 through use of a secure connection. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent through use of a secure mode of transmission. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted to a specified individual. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted to a specified group. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one or more signals may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like). In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent with information that includes a request for a return receipt. - At
operation 1108, the transmittingoperation 1050 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the one ormore pathogens 106. The one ormore signals 126 may include numerous types of information associated with one ormore pathogens 106. Examples of such information include the identity of apathogen 106, the concentration of apathogen 106, drug resistance characteristics of apathogen 106, and the like. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the virulence of one ormore pathogens 106. For example, some pathogenic strains ofE. coliexhibit increased virulence relative to other strains ofE. coli. Such virulent strains may be identified by the presence of virulence determinants. Examples of such virulence determinants include, but are not limited to, adhesions (e.g., CFAI/CFAII,type 1 fimbriae, P fimbriae, S fimbriae, Intimin), invasions (e.g., hemolysisn, siderophores and siderophore uptake systems,Shigella-like “invasins” for intracellular invasion and spread), toxins (e.g., LT toxin, ST toxin, Shiga-like toxin, cytotoxins, endotoxin LPS), antiphagocytic surface properties (e.g., capsules, K antigens, lipopolysaccharides), somatic antigens, flagellar antigens, and the like. Accordingly, one or more signals may include information related to numerous types of virulence indicators. - At
operation 1110, the transmittingoperation 1050 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with where an individual102 is physically experiencing a pathogen infection (e.g., eye infection, nasal infection, gastrointestinal tract infection, etc). In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of thepathogen 106. For example, one ormore signals 126 may include information that indicates where thepathogen 106 and/orindividual 102 who is infected with thepathogen 106 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.). In some embodiments, the one ormore signals 126 may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates. - At
operation 1112, the transmittingoperation 1050 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of an individual102. For example, one ormore signals 126 may include information that indicates where an individual102 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.). In some embodiments, the one ormore signals 126 may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates. FIG. 12 illustrates anoperational flow 1200 representing examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 12 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 1200 includes a receivingoperation 1210 involving receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may be used to receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142 determined in response to one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 andinput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained. In some embodiments, the one ormore signals 126 may include information associated with the identity of one ormore agents 142, the dosage of one ormore agents 142, the method of administration for one ormore agents 142, contraindications associated with the one ormore agents 142, an administration schedule associated with the one ormore agents 142, and the like. In some embodiments, the one ormore signals 126 may include information associated with an individual102 that includes, but is not limited to, physical characteristics of the individual102 (e.g., height, weight, body composition, heart rate, blood pressure, etc.), mental characteristics of an individual102 (e.g., mood, depression, mental disorders, predisposition toward suicide, etc.), physiological characteristics (e.g., allergic responses, blood pressure drop in response to medication, etc.), and the like. - After a start operation, the
operational flow 1200 includes aprocessing operation 1220 involving processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be used to process information associated with one ormore agents 142 determined in response to one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 andinput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may search one or more databases to determine one ormore agents 142 that may be utilized to reduce the pathogenicity of the one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may search one or more databases to determine one ormore agents 142 that may be alternatives to an identifiedagent 142. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determine if the cost of one ormore agents 142 is covered by a health care plan or insurance of an individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determine if the cost of one ormore agents 142 is covered by a health care plan or the insurance of an individual102 and identifyalternative agents 142 that are covered. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determine if the one ormore agents 142 are available in the location of the individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determinealternative agents 142 that are available at the location of the individual102. FIG. 13 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 1200 ofFIG. 12 .FIG. 13 illustrates example embodiments where the receivingoperation 1210 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 1302,operation 1304,operation 1306,operation 1308,operation 1310, and/oroperation 1312.- At
operation 1302, the receivingoperation 1210 may include receiving the one or more signals that include an identity of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include an identity of one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the brand name, the generic name, the chemical name, the structure, identifiers associated with anagent 142, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 1304, the receivingoperation 1210 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more dosages of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more dosages of the one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, the one or more dosages may be commercially available dosages. In some embodiments, the one or more dosages may be specific for an individual102 (e.g., dosages that are determined based on the physical characteristics of the individual102, the metabolic characteristics of the individual102, etc.). - At
operation 1306, the receivingoperation 1210 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with an individual102. One ormore signals 126 that include numerous types of information associated with an individual102 may be received. Examples of such information include, but are not limited to, height, weight, age, substances used by an individual102 (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, prescription medication, non-prescription medication, illicit drugs, etc.), body composition, allergies, physical characteristics (e.g., blood pressure, heart rate, intraocular pressure, etc.), activities, and the like. - At
operation 1308, the receivingoperation 1210 may include receiving one or more signals through use of a secure connection. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 through use of a secure connection. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received that are encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received through use of a secure mode. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may only be received by a specified individual. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received by a specified group. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one or more signals may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like). In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, receipt of one or more signals will cause a return receipt to be sent that confirms receipt of the one or more signals. - At
operation 1310, the receivingoperation 1210 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may include information associated with a specific pharmaceutical company, pharmaceutical distributor, hospital, pharmacy, health care facility, and the like, that have a supply of one ormore agents 142. Accordingly, in some embodiments,such signals 126 may be transmitted by one ormore transmitting units 116 that are associated with one ormore processing units 112 that are able to access one or more databases that provide location information foragents 142. - At
operation 1312, the receivingoperation 1210 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with the location of the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of an individual102. For example, one ormore signals 126 may include information that indicates where an individual102 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.). In some embodiments, the one ormore signals 126 may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates. FIG. 14 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 1200 ofFIG. 12 .FIG. 14 illustrates example embodiments where theprocessing operation 1220 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 1402,operation 1404,operation 1406,operation 1408, and/oroperation 1410.- At
operation 1402, theprocessing operation 1220 may include determining availability of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determine the availability of one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may access one or more databases to determine the availability of one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may access one or more databases associated with a pharmaceutical company, a pharmacy, a pharmaceutical distributor, a health care facility, a health care provider, and the like, to determine if one ormore agents 142 are available. - At
operation 1404, theprocessing operation 1220 may include determining one or more alternatives to the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determine one or more alternatives to one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determine that an identifiedagent 142 is not available and therefore select analternative agent 142 that is available. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may have access to databases ofavailable agents 142 such as those at pharmacies, hospitals, health care facilities, pharmaceutical distributors, pharmaceutical companies, and the like. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may select analternative agent 142 based on the insurance or health plan associated with an individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may select analternative agent 142 that does not contraindicate another substance or medication that an individual102 is using. - At
operation 1406, theprocessing operation 1220 may include determining if the one or more agents are covered by insurance carried by the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determine if the one ormore agents 142 are covered by insurance carried by the individual102. For example, one ormore processing units 112 may access a database that contains information related to health care plans or insurance policies so that the one ormore processing units 112 may be used to determine if the cost of one ormore agents 142 will be covered by the plan and/or policy. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may determine that the cost of anagent 142 is not covered by a plan or policy and may therefore determine a suitablealternative agent 142 that is covered by the plan or policy associated with an individual102. - At
operation 1408, theprocessing operation 1220 may include billing one or more providers for the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may bill one or more providers for the one ormore agents 142. Numerous providers may be billed for one ormore agents 142. Examples of such providers include, but are not limited to, insurance companies, flex spending accounts, Medicare, Blue Cross, Blue Shield, health maintenance organizations, and the like. - At
operation 1410, theprocessing operation 1220 may include selecting the one or more agents for delivery to the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may select one ormore agents 142 for delivery to an individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may select the one ormore agents 142 indicated in one or morereceived signals 126 for delivery to an individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may select an alternative to the one ormore agents 142 indicated in one or morereceived signals 126 for delivery to an individual102. FIG. 15 illustratesoperational flow 1500 that includesoperations operations FIG. 12 , with an optionally includedpackaging operation 1530 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 15 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 1500 optionally includes apackaging operation 1530 involving packaging the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may be used to package one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may be used to package one ormore agents 142 in packaging material. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 for administration to an individual102. For example, in some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package individual dosages of one ormore agents 142 for aspecific individual 102. Accordingly, in such embodiments, a packaging unit138 may be used forindividualized agent 142 packaging. FIG. 16 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 1500 ofFIG. 15 .FIG. 16 illustrates example embodiments where thepackaging operation 1530 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 1602,operation 1604, and/oroperation 1606.- At
operation 1602, thepackaging operation 1530 may include formulating the one or more agents into unit dosage form. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may formulate one ormore agents 142 into unit dosage form. In some embodiments, a unit dosage form may include one or more amounts of one ormore agents 142, such aspharmaceutical agents 142, that are suitable as unitary dosages for an individual102 with each unit containing a predetermined quantity of at least oneagent 142 calculated to produce a desired effect, such as a therapeutic effect, in association with one or more suitable pharmaceutical carriers. Such unit dosage forms may be packaged in numerous configurations that include, but are not limited to, tablets, capsules, ampoules, and other administration forms known in the art and described herein. In some embodiments, two or more unit dosage forms of one ormore agents 142 may be packaged into an administration form. For example, in some embodiments, two unit dosage forms may be wrapped into an administration form through use of a continuous wrapper such that they are released at different times following administration to an individual102. In such an example, two unit dosage forms are included within one administration form. - At
operation 1604, thepackaging operation 1530 may include packaging two or more of the agents into a single administration form. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package two ormore agents 142 into a single administration form. For example, in some embodiments, twoagents 142 may be wrapped into a single administration form through use of a continuous wrapper such that they are released at different times following administration to an individual102. In some examples, two unit dosage forms may be included within one administration form. - At
operation 1606, thepackaging operation 1530 may include formulating the one or more agents into an administration form in response to input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may formulate one ormore agents 142 into an administration form in response to input120 associated with an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. For example, in some embodiments, an individual102 may work at night where anagent 142 may interfere with the individual's function. Accordingly, one ormore agents 142 may be formulated to be released during the day when the individual102 is not working. In some embodiments, one ormore agents 142 may be formulated for oral administration according to a preference of an individual102. Accordingly, one ormore agents 142 may be formulated in numerous ways in response to input120 associated with an individual102. FIG. 17 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 1500 ofFIG. 15 .FIG. 17 illustrates example embodiments where thepackaging operation 1530 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 1702,operation 1704, and/oroperation 1706.- At
operation 1702, thepackaging operation 1530 may include packaging the one or more agents with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In some embodiments, one or more agents142 (e.g., pharmaceuticals) may be packaged with one or more solid or gel phase carriers or excipients. Examples of such carriers or excipients include, but are not limited to, croscarmellose sodium, providone, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, pregelatinized starch, polymers such as polyethylene glycols, lactose, lactose monohydrate, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, stearic acid and substantially any combination thereof. If a solid carrier is used, the one ormore agents 142 may be tableted, placed in a hard gelatin capsule in powder or pellet form, packaged in the form of a troche or lozenge, and the like. - In some embodiments, one or
more agents 142 may be packaged with a liquid carrier or excipient. Examples of such liquid carriers include syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, water, physiologically compatible buffers (i.e., Hanks solution and Ringers solution), physiological saline buffer, and the like. If a liquid carrier is used, the administration form may be in the form of a syrup, emulsion, drop, soft gelatin capsule, sterile injectable solution, suspension in an ampoule or vial, non-aqueous liquid suspension, and the like. - One or
more agents 142 may be packaged in stable water-soluble administration forms. For example, in some embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of one ormore agents 142 may be dissolved in an aqueous solution of an organic or inorganic acid, such as 0.3M solution of succinic acid or citric acid. If a soluble salt form is not available, anagent 142 may be dissolved in a suitable cosolvent or combination of cosolvents. Examples of suitable cosolvents include, but are not limited to, alcohol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol 300, polysorbate 80, glycerin and the like in concentrations ranging from 0-60% of the total volume. In some embodiments, one ormore agents 142 may be dissolved in DMSO and diluted with water. The administration form may also be in the form of a solution of a salt form of one ormore agents 142 in an appropriate aqueous vehicle such as water or isotonic saline or dextrose solution. - In some embodiments,
agents 142 that are hydrophobic may be packaged through use of a cosolvent system comprising benzyl alcohol, a nonpolar surfactant, a water-miscible organic polymer, and an aqueous phase. The cosolvent system may be the VPD co-solvent system. VPD is a solution of 3 percent weight/volume benzyl alcohol, 8 percent weight/volume of the nonpolar surfactant polysorbate 80, and 65 percent weight/volume polyethylene glycol 300, made up to volume in absolute ethanol. The VPD co-solvent system (VPD:5W) consists of VPD diluted 1:1 with a 5 percent dextrose in water solution. This co-solvent system dissolveshydrophobic agents 142, and itself produces low toxicity upon systemic administration. The proportions of a co-solvent system may be varied considerably without destroying its solubility and toxicity characteristics. Furthermore, the identity of the co-solvent components may be varied: for example, other low-toxicity nonpolar surfactants may be used instead of polysorbate 80; the fraction size of polyethylene glycol may be varied; other biocompatible polymers may replace polyethylene glycol (i.e., polyvinyl pyrrolidone; and other sugars or polysaccharides may substitute for dextrose). Many other delivery systems may be used to administerhydrophobic agents 142 as well. For example, liposomes and emulsions are well known examples of delivery vehicles or carriers for hydrophobic drugs. Certain organic solvents such as dimethysulfoxide also may be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity. - Some
agents 142 may be packaged as salts with pharmaceutically compatible counter ions. Pharmaceutically compatible salts may be formed with many acids, including hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts ofagents 142 tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free-base forms. - Numerous carriers and excipients are known and are commercially available (i.e., The Merck Index, 13th Edition, An Encyclopedia of Chemicals, Drugs, and Biologicals, Merck & Co. Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. 2001; Mosby's Drug Guide, Mosby, Inc., St. Louis, Mo. 2004; Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, Pa. 2000; Physicians' Desk Reference, 58th Edition, Thompson, PDR, Montvale, N.J. 2004; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,773,721; 7,053,107; 7,049,312 and Published U.S. Patent Application No. 20040224916; herein incorporated by reference).
- In addition, in some embodiments, one or
more agents 142 may be packaged with pharmaceutically acceptable poloxamers, humectants, binders, disintegrants, fillers, diluents, lubricants, glidants, flow enhancers, compression aids, coloring agents, sweeteners, preservatives, suspending agents, dispersing agents, film formers, coatings, flavoring agents, printing inks, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 1704, thepackaging operation 1530 may include packaging the one or more agents with packaging material. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 with packaging material. One or more agents142 (e.g., pharmaceuticals) may be packaged in numerous types of packaging material. Examples of packaging material include, but are not limited to, containers, boxes, ampoules, vials, syringes, and the like. In some embodiments, packaging material may include advertising. In some embodiments, packaging material may include instructions for administration. Such instructions may include time for administration, route of administration, the name of the individual102 to whom the one ormore agents 142 are to be administered, the identity of the one ormore agents 142, the dosage of the one ormore agents 142, appropriate buffers for suspension of the one ormore agents 142, the source of the one ormore agents 142, the name of a physician or physicians who prescribed the one ormore agents 142, the date when the one ormore agents 142 were prescribed, the date when the one ormore agents 142 were packaged, the date when the one ormore agents 142 were manufactured, the expiration date of the one ormore agents 142, and the like. - At
operation 1706, thepackaging operation 1530 may include packaging the one or more agents with packaging material and addressing the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 with packaging material and address the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses. For example, in some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 in one or more dispensing containers (e.g., a box, ampoule, vial, syringe, etc.), and then package the one or more dispensing containers in packaging material (e.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.) that is addressed for delivery to one or more addresses. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one or moreprepackaged agents 142 in one or more shipping containers (e.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.) and addressing the one or more shipping containers for delivery to one or more addresses. Numerous addresses could be used. Examples of such addresses include, but are not limited to, addresses to hospitals, military field stations, pharmacies, individuals, health care facilities, and the like. FIG. 18 illustratesoperational flow 1800 that includesoperations operations FIG. 15 , with an optionally includedshipping operation 1840 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 18 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 1800 optionally includes ashipping operation 1840 involving shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages that include one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, ashipping unit 140 may include logic that selects one or more routes that may be used to deliver one or more packages that include one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, ashipping unit 140 may select a shipping route through the Southern United States in the winter time to avoid shipping delays due to snowfall. Accordingly, one ormore shipping units 140 may select from numerous routes to ship one or more packages. In some embodiments, ashipping unit 140 may select a service to ship a package. Examples of such shipping services include, but are not limited to, United States Postal Service, United Postal Service, Federal Express, and the like. FIG. 19 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 1800 ofFIG. 18 .FIG. 19 illustrates example embodiments where theshipping operation 1840 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation1902,operation 1904,operation 1906, and/oroperation 1908.- At operation1902, the
shipping operation 1840 may include shipping the one or more packages through use of one or more common carriers. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages through use of one or more common carriers. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may include logic that selects one or more common carriers for shipping one or more packages. Examples of common carriers include, but are not limited to, airline shipping services, ground shipping services, nautical shipping services, and the like. - At
operation 1904, theshipping operation 1840 may include shipping the one or more packages to the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages to an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. - At
operation 1906, theshipping operation 1840 may include shipping the one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities. Examples of treatment facilities include, but are not limited to, hospitals, clinics, military field hospitals, ship infirmaries, and the like. - At
operation 1908, theshipping operation 1840 may include shipping the one or more packages to one or more pharmacies. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages to one or more pharmacies. FIG. 20 illustrates anoperational flow 2000 representing examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 20 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 2000 includes an identifyingoperation 2010 involving identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips. In some embodiments, one ormore analysis units 110 may be used to identify one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or moremicrofluidic chips 108. - After a start operation, the
operational flow 2000 includes an acceptingoperation 2020 involving accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one or moreaccepting units 118 may be used to acceptinput 120 associated with an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. - After a start operation, the
operational flow 2000 includes atransmitting operation 2030 involving transmitting one or more signals that include information associated with the identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual through use of one or more microfluidic chips and the accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may be used to transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 and acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained. FIG. 21 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2000 ofFIG. 20 .FIG. 21 illustrates example embodiments where the identifyingoperation 2010 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 2102,operation 2104, and/oroperation 2106.- At
operation 2102, the identifyingoperation 2010 may include accepting the one or more samples with the one or more microfluidic chips. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104 that include one or more liquids. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104 that include one or more solids. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104 that include one or more gases. In some embodiments, one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 may accept one ormore samples 104 that include one or morebiological samples 104. Examples ofbiological samples 104 include, but are not limited to, blood, cerebrospinal fluid, mucus, breath, urine, fecal material, skin, tissue, tears, hair, and the like. - At
operation 2104, the identifyingoperation 2010 may include processing the one or more samples with the one or more microfluidic chips to facilitate analysis of one or more pathogen indicators associated with the one or more samples. In some embodiments, the identifyingoperation 2010 may include processing one ormore samples 104 with one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 through use of polynucleotide interaction, protein interaction, peptide interaction, antibody interaction, chemical interaction, diffusion, filtration, chromatography, aptamer interaction, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, electrophoresis, immunoassay, competition assay, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 2106, the identifyingoperation 2010 may include analyzing one or more pathogen indicators with one or more analysis units that are configured to operably associate with the one or more microfluidic chips. In some embodiments, identifyingoperation 2010 may include analyzing the one or more pathogen indicators with one ormore analysis units 110 through use of at least one technique that includes spectroscopy, electrochemical detection, polynucleotide detection, fluorescence anisotropy, fluorescence resonance energy transfer, electron transfer, enzyme assay, electrical conductivity, isoelectric focusing, chromatography, immunoprecipitation, immunoseparation, aptamer binding, electrophoresis, use of a CCD camera, immunoassay, or substantially any combination thereof. FIG. 22 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2000 ofFIG. 20 .FIG. 22 illustrates example embodiments where the acceptingoperation 2020 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 2202, and/or operation2204.- At
operation 2202, the acceptingoperation 2020 may include accepting input associated with one or more parameters related to the individual. In some embodiments, one or moreaccepting units 118 may acceptinput 120 associated with one or more parameters related to an individual102. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be physical parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be psychological parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be financial parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be health care provided related parameters (e.g., physician's name, insurance provider, HMO name, prescription plan, etc.). - At operation2204, the accepting
operation 2020 may include accepting input associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or location. In some embodiments, one or moreaccepting units 118 may acceptinput 120 associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition (e.g., body mass index, fat percentage), substance use (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, illicit drugs), liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage (e.g., prescription plan, insurance limits, limitations on providers, HMO limitations), pregnancy status (e.g., pregnant, not pregnant, unknown), blood pressure, child bearing plans (e.g., yes, no, time when planning to become pregnant), one or more activities (e.g., travel, athletic activities, occupational activities, driving), location (e.g., travel to foreign nation, local address, town, city), or substantially any combination thereofFIG. 23 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2000 ofFIG. 20 .FIG. 23 illustrates example embodiments where the transmittingoperation 2030 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 2302, operation2304, operation2306, and/oroperation 2308. - At
operation 2302, the transmittingoperation 2030 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with an identity of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with an identity of one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with a particular strain of one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore pathogens 106 that are resistant to one or more antibiotics. - At operation2304, the transmitting
operation 2030 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with virulence of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with virulence of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. For example, some pathogenic strains ofE. coliexhibit increased virulence relative to other strains ofE. coli. Such virulent strains may be identified by the presence of virulence determinants. Examples of such virulence determinants include, but are not limited to, adhesions (e.g., CFAI/CFAII,type 1 fimbriae, P fimbriae, S fimbriae, Intimin), invasions (e.g., hemolysisn, siderophores and siderophore uptake systems,Shigella-like “invasins” for intracellular invasion and spread), toxins (e.g., LT toxin, ST toxin, Shiga-like toxin, cytotoxins, endotoxin LPS), antiphagocytic surface properties (e.g., capsules, K antigens, lipopolysaccharides), somatic antigens, flagellar antigens, and the like. Accordingly, one or more signals may include information related to numerous types of virulence indicators. - At operation2306, the transmitting
operation 2030 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or location. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, location, or substantially any combination thereof, that is associated with an individual102. - At
operation 2308, the transmittingoperation 2030 may include transmitting the one or more signals through use of a secure connection. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 through use of a secure connection. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent through use of a secure mode of transmission. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted to a specified individual. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted to a specified group. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one or more signals may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like). In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent with information that includes a request for a return receipt. FIG. 24 illustratesoperational flow 2400 that includesoperations operations FIG. 20 , with an optionally included receivingoperation 2440 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 24 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 2400 optionally includes a receivingoperation 2440 involving receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include the identity of one or morechemical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least onepathogen 106. Numerouschemical agents 142 may be identified. Examples of suchchemical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, ozone, peroxides, chlorinated compounds, acids, bases, alcohols, and the like (e.g., Merck Index, Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. (2001) and Mosby's Drug Guide, An Imprint of Elsevier, St. Louis, Mo. (2004)). In some embodiments, suchchemical agents 142 may be identified that are specific for one or more identifiedpathogens 106. FIG. 25 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2400 ofFIG. 24 .FIG. 25 illustrates example embodiments where the receivingoperation 2440 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 2502,operation 2504,operation 2506,operation 2508, and/oroperation 2510.- At
operation 2502, the receivingoperation 2440 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with an identity of at least one of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with an identity of at least one of the one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the brand name, the generic name, the chemical name, the structure, identifiers associated with anagent 142, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 2504, the receivingoperation 2440 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with methods of administration for at least one of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with methods of administration for at least one of one ormore agents 142. Examples of methods of administration include, but are not limited to, oral administration, intravenous administration, transdermal administration, intraperitoneal administration, intraocular administration, nasal administration, pulmonary administration, rectal administration, vaginal administration, and the like. - At
operation 2506, the receivingoperation 2440 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with contraindicators of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with contraindicators of the one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, contraindicators may include prescription pharmaceutical agents142 (e.g., opiates, psychotropic drugs, selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors, lithium, alpha-blockers, beta-blockers, antibiotics, cholesterol lowering drugs, heart medications). In some embodiments, contraindicators may include non-prescription pharmaceutical agents142 (e.g., antacids, acetaminophen, aspirin, cold medications, anti-histamines). In some embodiments, contraindicators may include substances such as nicotine, alcohol, nutraceuticals, and the like. For example, in some embodiments, Saint John's Wort may be indicated as a contraindicator of selective serotonin reuptake inhibitors. - At
operation 2508, the receivingoperation 2440 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with side-effects of the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with side-effects of the one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may include information associated with lower potassium levels associated with diuretic usage.Signals 126 may include information associated with numerous side-effects that include mental side-effects (e.g., excitability, depression, irritability), physical side-effects (e.g., drowsiness, insomnia, dizziness, reduced coordination, increased blood pressure), and the like. - At
operation 2510, the receivingoperation 2440 may include receiving the one or more signals through use of a secure connection. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 through use of a secure connection. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received that are encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received through use of a secure mode. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may only be received by a specified individual. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received by a specified group. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one or more signals may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like). In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, receipt of one or more signals will cause a return receipt to be sent that confirms receipt of the one or more signals. FIG. 26 illustratesoperational flow 2600 that includesoperations operations FIG. 24 , with an optionally included displayingoperation 2650 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 26 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 2600 optionally includes a displayingoperation 2650 involving displaying the information associated with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information associated with one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106. Numerous types of information may be displayed. Examples of such information include, but are not limited to, the identity of anagent 142, dosage of anagent 142, method of administration for anagent 142, and the like. FIG. 27 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2600 ofFIG. 26 .FIG. 27 illustrates example embodiments where the displayingoperation 2650 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 2702,operation 2704, and/oroperation 2706.- At
operation 2702, the displayingoperation 2650 may include displaying the information on one or more passive displays. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information on one or more passive displays. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may include one or more liquid crystal displays (LCD). Methods to construct passive displays have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,807,967; 4,729,636; 4,436,378; 4,257,041; herein incorporated by reference). - At
operation 2704, the displayingoperation 2650 may include displaying the information on one or more active displays. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information on one or more active displays. Numerousactive display units 114 are known and include, but are not limited to, quarter-video graphics array (QVGA), video graphics array (VGA), super video graphics array (SVGA), extended graphics array (XGA), wide extended graphics array (WXGA), super extended graphics array (SXGA), ultra extended graphics array (UXGA), wide super extended graphics array (WSXGA), and wide ultra extended graphics array (WUXGA). - At
operation 2706, the displayingoperation 2650 may include displaying the information in graphical form. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in graphical form. Numerous types of graphical formats may be used. Examples of such graphical formats include, but are not limited to, use of shapes, use of colors, use of symbols (e.g., smiley face, frowny face, thumbs up sign, thumbs down sign, histograms, bar graphs, pie charts, and the like). FIG. 28 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2600 ofFIG. 26 .FIG. 28 illustrates example embodiments where the displayingoperation 2650 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 2802,operation 2804, and/oroperation 2806.- At
operation 2802, the displayingoperation 2650 may include displaying the information in audio form. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in audio form. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in voice format. For example, in some embodiments, a human voice may indicate the identity of one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of one ormore pathogens 106. Numerous types of information may be presented in audio format. - At
operation 2804, the displayingoperation 2650 may include displaying the information in typographical form. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in typographical form. Information may be presented in numerous languages (e.g., Italian, Spanish, English, Japanese). In some embodiments, the typographical form may include numbers. - At
operation 2806, the displayingoperation 2650 may include displaying the information in Braille. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in Braille. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may include a pad on which messages in Braille may be displayed. In some embodiments, such pads may be constructed of an elastomeric material that is positioned relative to a series of movable rods such that the rods may be positioned to create messages in Braille. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may print information in Braille. FIG. 29 illustrates anoperational flow 2900 representing examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 29 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 2900 includes a receivingoperation 2910 involving receiving one or more signals that include information associated with identifying one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may be used to receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102. - After a start operation, the
operational flow 2900 includes a receivingoperation 2920 involving receiving one or more signals that include information associated with accepting input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may be used to receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with acceptinginput 120 associated with an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. - After a start operation, the
operational flow 2900 includes a determiningoperation 2930 involving determining one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may be used to determine one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106. FIG. 30 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2900 ofFIG. 29 .FIG. 30 illustrates example embodiments where the receivingoperation 2910 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 3002,operation 3004, operation3006,operation 3008, and/oroperation 3010.- At
operation 3002, the receivingoperation 2910 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with an identity of the at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with an identity of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106. Such information may include information associated with a particular strain of one ormore pathogens 106. - At
operation 3004, the receivingoperation 2910 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with a concentration of the at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with a concentration of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106. In some embodiments, such information may indicate the severity of a pathogen infection. In some embodiments, such information may be used to track treatment of an infection. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore signals 126 may be received at times following the initiation of a treatment schedule. Accordingly, the effectiveness of a treatment scheme may be monitored. - At operation3006, the receiving
operation 2910 may include receiving one or more signals that include information associated with drug resistance of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with drug resistance of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore pathogens 106 that are resistant to one or more antibiotics. - At
operation 3008, the receivingoperation 2910 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with virulence of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with virulence of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. For example, some pathogenic strains ofE. coliexhibit increased virulence relative to other strains ofE. coli. Such virulent strains may be identified by the presence of virulence determinants. Examples of such virulence determinants include, but are not limited to, adhesions (e.g., CFAI/CFAII,type 1 fimbriae, P fimbriae, S fimbriae, Intimin), invasions (e.g., hemolysisn, siderophores and siderophore uptake systems,Shigella-like “invasins” for intracellular invasion and spread), toxins (e.g., LT toxin, ST toxin, Shiga-like toxin, cytotoxins, endotoxin LPS), antiphagocytic surface properties (e.g., capsules, K antigens, lipopolysaccharides), somatic antigens, flagellar antigens, and the like. Accordingly, one or more signals may include information related to numerous types of virulence indicators. - At
operation 3010, the receivingoperation 2910 may include receiving the one or more signals through use of a secure connection. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 through use of a secure connection. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received that are encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received through use of a secure mode. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may only be received by a specified individual. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received by a specified group. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one or more signals may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like). In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, receipt of one or more signals will cause a return receipt to be sent that confirms receipt of the one or more signals. FIG. 31 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2900 ofFIG. 29 .FIG. 31 illustrates example embodiments where the receivingoperation 2920 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 3102, operation3104, and/oroperation 3106.- At
operation 3102, the receivingoperation 2920 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more parameters related to the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more parameters related to an individual102. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be physical parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be psychological parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be financial parameters. In some embodiments, the one or more parameters may be health care provided related parameters (e.g., physician's name, insurance provider, HMO name, prescription plan, etc.). - At operation3104, the receiving
operation 2920 may include receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or location. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more parameters related to age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, one or more activities, location, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 3106, the receivingoperation 2920 may include receiving the one or more signals through use of a secure connection. In some embodiments, one ormore receiving units 136 may receive one ormore signals 126 through use of a secure connection. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received that are encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received through use of a secure mode. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may only be received by a specified individual. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received by a specified group. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one or more signals may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like). In some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be received in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, receipt of one or more signals will cause a return receipt to be sent that confirms receipt of the one or more signals. FIG. 32 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2900 ofFIG. 29 .FIG. 32 illustrates example embodiments where the receivingoperation 2930 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 3202, operation3204,operation 3206,operation 3208, and/oroperation 3210.- At
operation 3202, the determiningoperation 2930 may include identifying the one or more chemical agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or morechemical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106 that are identified. Numerouschemical agents 142 may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of one ormore pathogens 106. Examples of suchchemical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, antibiotics, ozone, peroxides, chlorinated compounds, acids, bases, alcohols, and the like (e.g., Merck Index, Thirteenth Edition, Merck & Co., Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. (2001) and Mosby's Drug Guide, An Imprint of Elsevier, St. Louis, Mo. (2004)). In some embodiments, suchchemical agents 142 may be specific for one or more identifiedpathogens 106. - At operation3204, the determining
operation 2930 may include identifying the one or more mechanical agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or moremechanical agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of one ormore pathogens 106 that are identified. Examples of suchmechanical agents 142 include, but are not limited to, ultraviolet light, irradiation, and the like. In some embodiments, suchmechanical agents 142 may be specific for one or more identifiedpathogens 106. - At
operation 3206, the determiningoperation 2930 may include identifying the one or more bioagents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more bioagents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens that are identified. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more bacteriophages that may be used to reduce the disease causing ability of a bacteria. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more invasive recombinant bacteria that may be used to deliver a gene product that may be used to reduce the disease causing ability of one or more pathogens. For example, in some embodiments, such recombinant bacteria may be engineered to produce an antibiotic. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more inactivated pathogens (e.g., viruses, bacteria, fungi) that may be used to induce an immune response against one or more pathogens. - At
operation 3208, the determiningoperation 2930 may include identifying the one or more agents that are not contraindicated by one or more substances used by the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that are not contraindicated by one or more substances used by an individual102. For example, in some embodiments, an individual102 may use one or more prescription medications. In such embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that do not contraindicate the one or more prescription medications. In some embodiments, an individual102 may use one or more substances such as tobacco or alcohol that may contraindicate anagent 142. Accordingly, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that are not affected by one or more substances used by an individual102 and/or that do not affect one or more substances used by an individual102. Accordingly, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 with regard to numerous types of substances used by an individual102. - At
operation 3210, the determiningoperation 2930 may include identifying the one or more additional agents that act synergistically with the one or more agents that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or moreadditional agents 142 that act synergistically with the one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or moreadditional agents 142 that increase the effectiveness of one or more antibiotics. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one or more antibacterial adjuvants (e.g., beta-lactamase inhibitors) that may act synergistically with one or more antibiotics. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that up regulate an immune response against a pathogen that may act synergistically with one or moreother agents 142. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that down regulate an immune response against a pathogen that may act synergistically with one or moreother agents 142. FIG. 33 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 2900 ofFIG. 29 .FIG. 33 illustrates example embodiments where the receivingoperation 2930 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 3302, operation3304, and/or operation3306.- At
operation 3302, the determiningoperation 2930 may include identifying the one or more agents in response to one or more parameters associated with the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 in response to one or more parameters associated with the individual102. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore agents 142 may be identified for application to aspecific individual 102. Such embodiments provide for personalized selection and dosing ofagents 142 that may be used to treat pathogen infection. Numerous parameters associated with an individual102 may be considered. Examples of such parameters include, but are not limited to, size, weight, allergies, body composition, substance use, and the like. - At operation3304, the determining
operation 2930 may include identifying the one or more agent in response to at least one parameter associated with the individual that includes age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, environmental exposure, diagnosed disease, disease status, treatment history, family history, genetic markers, disease predisposition, or child bearing plans. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 in response to at least one parameter associated with the individual102 that includes age, weight, height, body composition, substance use, liver health, allergies, prescription drug use, non-prescription drug use, insurance coverage, pregnancy status, blood pressure, child bearing plans, or substantially any combination thereof. - At operation3306, the determining
operation 2930 may include identifying the one or more agents that reduce the pathogenicity of at least one virus, bacterium, worm, egg, cyst, protozoan, single-celled organism, fungus, algae, pathogenic protein, or microbe. In some embodiments, one ormore processing units 112 may identify one ormore agents 142 that reduce the pathogenicity of at least one virus, bacterium, worm, egg, cyst, protozoan, single-celled organism, fungus, algae, pathogenic protein, or microbe.Numerous agents 142 are known that will reduce the pathogenicity of one or more pathogens106 (The Merck Index, 13th Edition, An Encyclopedia of Chemicals, Drugs, and Biologicals, Merck & Co. Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. 2001; Mosby's Drug Guide, Mosby, Inc., St. Louis, Mo. 2004; Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, Pa. 2000; Physicians' Desk Reference, 58th Edition, Thompson, PDR, Montvale, N.J. 2004). FIG. 34 illustratesoperational flow 3400 that includesoperations operations FIG. 29 , with an optionally included displayingoperation 3440 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 34 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 3400 optionally includes a displayingoperation 3440 involving displaying information associated with the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may be used to display information associated with one ormore agents 142. Numerous types ofdisplay units 114 may be used to display information. Examples ofsuch display units 114 include, but are not limited to, liquid crystal displays, light emitting diode displays, audio displays, Braille displays, graphical displays, and the like. Numerous types of information may be displayed. Examples of such types of information include, but are not limited to, the identity of one ormore agents 142, the dosage of one ormore agents 142, contraindications associated with the one ormore agents 142, administration method to be used with one ormore agents 142, administration schedule associated with one ormore agents 142, and the like. FIG. 35 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 3400 ofFIG. 34 .FIG. 35 illustrates example embodiments where the displayingoperation 3440 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 3502,operation 3504, and/oroperation 3506.- At
operation 3502, the displayingoperation 3440 may include displaying the information on one or more passive displays. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information on one or more passive displays. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may include one or more liquid crystal displays (LCD). Methods to construct passive displays have been described (e.g., U.S. Pat. Nos. 4,807,967; 4,729,636; 4,436,378; 4,257,041; herein incorporated by reference). - At
operation 3504, the displayingoperation 3440 may include displaying the information on one or more active displays. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information on one or more active displays. Numerousactive display units 114 are known and include, but are not limited to, quarter-video graphics array (QVGA), video graphics array (VGA), super video graphics array (SVGA), extended graphics array (XGA), wide extended graphics array (WXGA), super extended graphics array (SXGA), ultra extended graphics array (UXGA), wide super extended graphics array (WSXGA), and wide ultra extended graphics array (WUXGA). - At
operation 3506, the displayingoperation 3440 may include displaying the information in graphical form. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in graphical form. Numerous types of graphical formats may be used. Examples of such graphical formats include, but are not limited to, use of shapes, use of colors, use of symbols (e.g., smiley face, frowny face, thumbs up sign, thumbs down sign, histograms, bar graphs, pie charts, and the like). FIG. 36 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 3400 ofFIG. 34 .FIG. 36 illustrates example embodiments where the displayingoperation 3440 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 3602,operation 3604, and/oroperation 3606.- At
operation 3602, the displayingoperation 3440 may include displaying the information in audio form. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in audio form. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in voice format. For example, in some embodiments, a human voice may indicate the identity of one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of one ormore pathogens 106. Numerous types of information may be presented in audio format. - At
operation 3604, the displayingoperation 3440 may include displaying the information in typographical form. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in typographical form. Information may be presented in numerous languages (e.g., Italian, Spanish, English, Japanese). In some embodiments, the typographical form may include numbers. - At
operation 3606, the displayingoperation 3440 may include displaying the information in Braille. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may display information in Braille. Accordingly, in some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may include a pad on which messages in Braille may be displayed. In some embodiments, such pads may be constructed of an elastomeric material that is positioned relative to a series of movable rods such that the rods may be positioned to create messages in Braille. In some embodiments, one ormore display units 114 may print information in Braille. FIG. 37 illustratesoperational flow 3700 that includesoperations operations FIG. 34 , with an optionally included transmittingoperation 3750 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 37 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 3700 optionally includes atransmitting operation 3750 involving transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142. The one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmitsignals 126 through use of numerous technologies. For example,such signals 126 may be transmitted through use of the internet, radio waves, optical cables, cellular telephone connections, telephone connections, satellite telephone connections, and the like. The one ormore signals 126 may be transmitted to, and received by, numerous types of receivers. For example, one ormore signals 126 may be received by pharmacies, hospitals, pharmaceutical companies, health care providers, nutraceutical companies, and the like. FIG. 38 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 3700 ofFIG. 37 .FIG. 38 illustrates example embodiments where the transmittingoperation 3750 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 3802,operation 3804,operation 3806,operation 3808,operation 3810, and/oroperation 3812.- At
operation 3802, the transmittingoperation 3750 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the identity of one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the identity of one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the brand name, the generic name, the chemical name, the structure, identifiers associated with anagent 142, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 3804, the transmittingoperation 3750 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with an individual. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with an individual102. One ormore signals 126 that include numerous types of information associated with an individual102 may be transmitted. Examples of such information include, but are not limited to, height, weight, age, substances used by an individual102 (e.g., alcohol, tobacco, prescription medication, non-prescription medication, illicit drugs, etc.), body composition, allergies, physical characteristics (e.g., blood pressure, heart rate, intraocular pressure, etc.), activities, and the like. - At
operation 3806, the transmittingoperation 3750 may include transmitting the one or more signals through use of a secure connection. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 through use of a secure connection. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be encrypted. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent through use of a secure mode of transmission. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted to a specified individual. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted to a specified group. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include code that is specific for an individual. In some embodiments, such code may include anonymous code that is specific for an individual. Accordingly, information included within one or more signals may be protected against being accessed by others who are not the intended recipient. In some embodiments, one or more signals may include information that includes statements regarding non-disclosure of information included within the one or more signals (e.g., statements against copying information, statements against unauthorized dissemination of information, statements about unauthorized opening of an information packet by an unintended recipient, and the like). In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent in a manner that conforms with privacy regulations as set forth by law. For example, in some embodiments, one or more signals may be transmitted in accordance with the Health Information Privacy and Protection Act. In some embodiments, one or more signals may be sent with information that includes a request for a return receipt. - At
operation 3808, the transmittingoperation 3750 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the one ormore pathogens 106. The one ormore signals 126 may include numerous types of information associated with one ormore pathogens 106. Examples of such information include the identity of apathogen 106, the concentration of apathogen 106, drug resistance characteristics of apathogen 106, and the like. - At
operation 3810, the transmittingoperation 3750 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more pathogens. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the one ormore pathogens 106. For example, in some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with where an individual102 is physically experiencing a pathogen infection (e.g., eye infection, nasal infection, gastrointestinal tract infection, etc). In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of thepathogen 106. For example, one ormore signals 126 may include information that indicates where thepathogen 106 and/orindividual 102 who is infected with thepathogen 106 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.). In some embodiments, the one ormore signals 126 may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates. - At
operation 3812, the transmittingoperation 3750 may include transmitting the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one or more locations of the individual102. In some embodiments, one ormore transmitting units 116 may transmit one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the geographical location of an individual102. For example, one ormore signals 126 may include information that indicates where an individual102 is located (e.g., United States, Canada, Europe, Asia, Middle East, etc.). In some embodiments, the one ormore signals 126 may include global positioning system (GPS) coordinates. FIG. 39 illustratesoperational flow 3900 that includesoperations operations FIG. 37 with an optionally includedpackaging operation 3960 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 39 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 3900 optionally includes apackaging operation 3960 involving packaging the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may be used to package one ormore agents 142 in packaging material. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 for administration to an individual102. For example, in some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package individual dosages of one ormore agents 142 for aspecific individual 102. Accordingly, in such embodiments, a packaging unit138 may be used forindividualized agent 142 packaging. FIG. 40 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 3900 ofFIG. 39 .FIG. 40 illustrates example embodiments where thepackaging operation 3960 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 4002,operation 4004, and/oroperation 4006.- At
operation 4002, thepackaging operation 3960 may include formulating the one or more agents into unit dosage form. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may formulate one ormore agents 142 into unit dosage form. In some embodiments, a unit dosage form may include one or more amounts of one ormore agents 142, such aspharmaceutical agents 142, that are suitable as unitary dosages for an individual102 with each unit containing a predetermined quantity of at least oneagent 142 calculated to produce a desired effect, such as a therapeutic effect, in association with one or more suitable pharmaceutical carriers. Such unit dosage forms may be packaged in numerous configurations that include, but are not limited to, tablets, capsules, ampoules, and other administration forms known in the art and described herein. In some embodiments, two or more unit dosage forms of one ormore agents 142 may be packaged into an administration form. For example, in some embodiments, two unit dosage forms may be wrapped into an administration form through use of a continuous wrapper such that they are released at different times following administration to an individual102. In such an example, two unit dosage forms are included within one administration form. - At
operation 4004, thepackaging operation 3960 may include packaging two or more of the agents into a single administration form. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package two ormore agents 142 into a single administration form. For example, in some embodiments, twoagents 142 may be wrapped into a single administration form through use of a continuous wrapper such that they are released at different times following administration to an individual102. In some examples, two unit dosage forms may be included within one administration form. - At
operation 4006, thepackaging operation 3960 may include formulating the one or more agents into an administration form in response to input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may formulate one ormore agents 142 into an administration form in response to input120 associated with an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. For example, in some embodiments, an individual102 may work at night where anagent 142 may interfere with the individual's function. Accordingly, one ormore agents 142 may be formulated to be released during the day when the individual102 is not working. In some embodiments, one ormore agents 142 may be formulated for oral administration according to a preference of an individual102. Accordingly, one ormore agents 142 may be formulated in numerous ways in response to input120 associated with an individual102. FIG. 41 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 3900 ofFIG. 39 .FIG. 41 illustrates example embodiments where thepackaging operation 3960 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 4102,operation 4104, and/oroperation 4106.- At
operation 4102, thepackaging operation 3960 may include packaging the one or more agents into one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers. In some embodiments, one or more agents142 (e.g., pharmaceuticals) may be packaged with one or more solid or gel phase carriers or excipients. Examples of such carriers or excipients include, but are not limited to, croscarmellose sodium, povidone, microcrystalline cellulose, calcium carbonate, calcium phosphate, various sugars, starches, cellulose derivatives, gelatin, pregelatinized starch, polymers such as polyethylene glycols, lactose, lactose monohydrate, sucrose, talc, gelatin, agar, pectin, acacia, magnesium stearate, stearic acid and substantially any combination thereof. If a solid carrier is used, the one ormore agents 142 may be tableted, placed in a hard gelatin capsule in powder or pellet form, packaged in the form of a troche or lozenge, and the like. - In some embodiments, one or
more agents 142 may be packaged with a liquid carrier or excipient. Examples of such liquid carriers include syrup, peanut oil, olive oil, water, physiologically compatible buffers (i.e., Hanks solution and Ringers solution), physiological saline buffer, and the like. If a liquid carrier is used, the administration form may be in the form of a syrup, emulsion, drop, soft gelatin capsule, sterile injectable solution, suspension in an ampoule or vial, non-aqueous liquid suspension, and the like. - One or
more agents 142 may be packaged in stable water-soluble administration forms. For example, in some embodiments, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of one ormore agents 142 may be dissolved in an aqueous solution of an organic or inorganic acid, such as 0.3M solution of succinic acid or citric acid. If a soluble salt form is not available, anagent 142 may be dissolved in a suitable cosolvent or combination of cosolvents. Examples of suitable cosolvents include, but are not limited to, alcohol, propylene glycol, polyethylene glycol 300, polysorbate 80, glycerin and the like in concentrations ranging from 0-60% of the total volume. In some embodiments, one ormore agents 142 may be dissolved in DMSO and diluted with water. The administration form may also be in the form of a solution of a salt form of one ormore agents 142 in an appropriate aqueous vehicle such as water or isotonic saline or dextrose solution. - In some embodiments,
agents 142 that are hydrophobic may be packaged through use of a cosolvent system comprising benzyl alcohol, a nonpolar surfactant, a water-miscible organic polymer, and an aqueous phase. The cosolvent system may be the VPD co-solvent system. VPD is a solution of 3 percent weight/volume benzyl alcohol, 8 percent weight/volume of the nonpolar surfactant polysorbate 80, and 65 percent weight/volume polyethylene glycol 300, made up to volume in absolute ethanol. The VPD co-solvent system (VPD:5W) consists of VPD diluted 1:1 with a 5 percent dextrose in water solution. This co-solvent system dissolveshydrophobic agents 142, and itself produces low toxicity upon systemic administration. The proportions of a co-solvent system may be varied considerably without destroying its solubility and toxicity characteristics. Furthermore, the identity of the co-solvent components may be varied: for example, other low-toxicity nonpolar surfactants may be used instead of polysorbate 80; the fraction size of polyethylene glycol may be varied; other biocompatible polymers may replace polyethylene glycol (i.e., polyvinyl pyrrolidone; and other sugars or polysaccharides may substitute for dextrose). Many other delivery systems may be used to administerhydrophobic agents 142 as well. For example, liposomes and emulsions are well known examples of delivery vehicles or carriers for hydrophobic drugs. Certain organic solvents such as dimethysulfoxide also may be employed, although usually at the cost of greater toxicity. - Some
agents 142 may be packaged as salts with pharmaceutically compatible counter ions. Pharmaceutically compatible salts may be formed with many acids, including hydrochloric, sulfuric, acetic, lactic, tartaric, malic, succinic, etc. Salts ofagents 142 tend to be more soluble in aqueous or other protonic solvents than are the corresponding free-base forms. - Numerous carriers and excipients are known and are commercially available (i.e., The Merck Index, 13th Edition, An Encyclopedia of Chemicals, Drugs, and Biologicals, Merck & Co. Inc., Whitehouse Station, N.J. 2001; Mosby's Drug Guide, Mosby, Inc., St. Louis, Mo. 2004; Remington: The Science and Practice of Pharmacy, 20th Edition, Lippincott Williams & Wilkins, Philadelphia, Pa. 2000; Physicians' Desk Reference, 58th Edition, Thompson, PDR, Montvale, N.J. 2004; U.S. Pat. Nos. 6,773,721; 7,053,107; 7,049,312 and Published U.S. Patent Application No. 20040224916; herein incorporated by reference). In addition, in some embodiments, one or
more agents 142 may be packaged with pharmaceutically acceptable poloxamers, humectants, binders, disintegrants, fillers, diluents, lubricants, glidants, flow enhancers, compression aids, coloring agents, sweeteners, preservatives, suspending agents, dispersing agents, film formers, coatings, flavoring agents, printing inks, or substantially any combination thereof. - At
operation 4104, thepackaging operation 3960 may include packaging the one or more agents into packaging material. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 with packaging material. One or more agents142 (e.g., pharmaceuticals) may be packaged in numerous types of packaging material. Examples of packaging material include, but are not limited to, containers, boxes, ampoules, vials, syringes, and the like. In some embodiments, packaging material may include advertising. In some embodiments, packaging material may include instructions for administration. Such instructions may include time for administration, route of administration, the name of the individual102 to whom the one ormore agents 142 are to be administered, the identity of the one ormore agents 142, the dosage of the one ormore agents 142, appropriate buffers for suspension of the one ormore agents 142, the source of the one ormore agents 142, the name of a physician or physicians who prescribed the one ormore agents 142, the date when the one ormore agents 142 were prescribed, the date when the one ormore agents 142 were packaged, the date when the one ormore agents 142 were manufactured, the expiration date of the one ormore agents 142, and the like. - At
operation 4106, thepackaging operation 3960 may include packaging the one or more agents into packaging material and addressing the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 with packaging material and address the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses. For example, in some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one ormore agents 142 in one or more dispensing containers (e.g., a box, ampoule, vial, syringe, etc.), and then package the one or more dispensing containers in packaging material (e.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.) that is addressed for delivery to one or more addresses. In some embodiments, one or more packaging units138 may package one or moreprepackaged agents 142 in one or more shipping containers (e.g., boxes, crates, envelopes, pouches, etc.) and addressing the one or more shipping containers for delivery to one or more addresses. Numerous addresses could be used. Examples of such addresses include, but are not limited to, addresses to hospitals, military field stations, pharmacies, individuals, health care facilities, and the like. FIG. 42 illustratesoperational flow 4200 that includesoperations operations FIG. 39 with an optionally includedshipping operation 4270 and represents examples of operations that are related to the performance of a method for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 and determining one ormore agents 142 that may be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. InFIG. 42 and in following figures that include various examples of operations used during performance of the method, discussion and explanation may be provided with respect to any one or combination of the above-described examples ofFIGS. 1-1C , and/or with respect to other examples and contexts. However, it should be understood that the operations may be executed in a number of other environments and contexts, and/or modified versions ofFIGS. 1-1C . Also, although the various operations are presented in the sequence(s) illustrated, it should be understood that the various operations may be performed in other orders than those which are illustrated, or may be performed concurrently.- After a start operation, the
operational flow 4200 optionally includes ashipping operation 4270 involving shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may ship one ormore agents 142. In some embodiments, ashipping unit 140 may include logic that selects one or more routes that may be used to deliver one or more packages that include one ormore agents 142. For example, in some embodiments, ashipping unit 140 may select a shipping route through the Southern United States in the winter time to avoid shipping delays due to snowfall. Accordingly, one ormore shipping units 140 may select from numerous routes to ship one or more packages. In some embodiments, ashipping unit 140 may select a service to ship a package. Examples of such shipping services include, but are not limited to, United States Postal Service, United Postal Service, Federal Express, and the like. FIG. 43 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 4200 ofFIG. 42 .FIG. 43 illustrates example embodiments where theshipping operation 4270 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include an operation4302, and/oroperation 4304.- At operation4302, the
shipping operation 4270 may include shipping the one or more packages through use of one or more common carriers. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages through use of one or more common carriers. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may include logic that selects one or more common carriers for shipping one or more packages. Examples of common carriers include, but are not limited to, airline shipping services, ground shipping services, nautical shipping services, and the like. - At
operation 4304, theshipping operation 4270 may include shipping the one or more packages to the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages to an individual102 from whom one ormore samples 104 were obtained. FIG. 44 illustrates alternative embodiments of the exampleoperational flow 4200 ofFIG. 42 .FIG. 44 illustrates example embodiments where theshipping operation 4270 may include at least one additional operation. Additional operations may include anoperation 4402, and/oroperation 4404.- At
operation 4402, theshipping operation 4270 may include shipping the one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities. Examples of treatment facilities include, but are not limited to, hospitals, clinics, military field hospitals, ship infirmaries, and the like. - At
operation 4404, theshipping operation 4270 may include shipping the one or more packages to one or more pharmacies. In some embodiments, one ormore shipping units 140 may be used to ship one or more packages to one or more pharmacies. FIG. 45 illustrates a partial view of asystem 4500 that includes acomputer program 4504 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4500 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4502 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for determining one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include a computer-readable medium 4506. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include arecordable medium 4508. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include a communications medium4510.FIG. 45A illustrates a partial view of asystem 4500 that includes acomputer program 4504 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4500 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4502 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; and one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one ormore agents 142. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include a computer-readable medium 4506. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include arecordable medium 4508. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include a communications medium4510.FIG. 45B illustrates a partial view of asystem 4500 that includes acomputer program 4504 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4500 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4502 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for transmitting one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the one ormore agents 142. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include a computer-readable medium 4506. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include arecordable medium 4508. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4502 may include a communications medium4510.FIG. 46 illustrates a partial view of asystem 4600 that includes acomputer program 4604 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4600 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4602 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142 determined in response to one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 andinput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one ormore agents 142 determined in response to one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 and theinput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include a computer-readable medium 4606. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include arecordable medium 4608. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include acommunications medium 4610.FIG. 46A illustrates a partial view of asystem 4600 that includes acomputer program 4604 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4600 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4602 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142 determined in response to one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 andinput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one ormore agents 142 determined in response to one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 and theinput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for packaging the one ormore agents 142. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include a computer-readable medium 4606. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include arecordable medium 4608. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include acommunications medium 4610.FIG. 46B illustrates a partial view of asystem 4600 that includes acomputer program 4604 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4600 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4602 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142 determined in response to one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 andinput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one ormore agents 142 determined in response to one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 and theinput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one ormore agents 142. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include a computer-readable medium 4606. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include arecordable medium 4608. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4602 may include acommunications medium 4610.FIG. 47 illustrates a partial view of asystem 4700 that includes acomputer program 4704 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4700 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4702 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for transmitting one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 and the acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include a computer-readable medium 4706. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include arecordable medium 4708. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include a communications medium4710.FIG. 47A illustrates a partial view of asystem 4700 that includes acomputer program 4704 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4700 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4702 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for transmitting one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 and the acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include a computer-readable medium 4706. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include arecordable medium 4708. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include a communications medium4710.FIG. 47B illustrates a partial view of asystem 4700 that includes acomputer program 4704 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4700 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4702 bearing one or more instructions for identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or more microfluidic chips; one or more instructions for acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for transmitting one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual102 through use of one or moremicrofluidic chips 108 and the acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; and one or more instructions for displaying the information associated with the one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include a computer-readable medium 4706. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include arecordable medium 4708. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4702 may include a communications medium4710.FIG. 48 illustrates a partial view of asystem 4800 that includes acomputer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4800 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; and one or more instructions for determining one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one ormore pathogens 106. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include a computer-readable medium 4806. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include arecordable medium 4808. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include acommunications medium 4810.FIG. 48A illustrates a partial view of asystem 4800 that includes acomputer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4800 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; and one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one ormore agents 142. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include a computer-readable medium 4806. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include arecordable medium 4808. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include acommunications medium 4810.FIG. 48B illustrates a partial view of asystem 4800 that includes acomputer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4800 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for transmitting one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the one ormore agents 142. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include a computer-readable medium 4806. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include arecordable medium 4808. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include acommunications medium 4810.FIG. 48C illustrates a partial view of asystem 4800 that includes acomputer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4800 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents; one or more instructions for transmitting one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for packaging the one ormore agents 142. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include a computer-readable medium 4806. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include arecordable medium 4808. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include acommunications medium 4810.FIG. 48D illustrates a partial view of asystem 4800 that includes acomputer program 4804 for executing a computer process on a computing device. An embodiment of thesystem 4800 is provided using a signal-bearing medium4802 bearing one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with identifying one ormore pathogens 106 present within one ormore samples 104 obtained from an individual; one or more instructions for receiving one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with acceptinginput 120 associated with the individual102 from whom the one ormore samples 104 were obtained; one or more instructions for determining one ormore agents 142 that can be used to reduce the pathogenicity of at least one of the one or more pathogens; one or more instructions for displaying information associated with the one or more agents; one or more instructions for transmitting one ormore signals 126 that include information associated with the one or more agents; one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents; and one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one ormore agents 142. The one or more instructions may be, for example, computer executable and/or logic-implemented instructions. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include a computer-readable medium 4806. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include arecordable medium 4808. In some embodiments, the signal-bearing medium4802 may include acommunications medium 4810.- With respect to the use of substantially any plural and/or singular terms herein, those having skill in the art can translate from the plural to the singular and/or from the singular to the plural as is appropriate to the context and/or application. The various singular/plural permutations are not expressly set forth herein for sake of clarity.
- While particular aspects of the present subject matter described herein have been shown and described, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that, based upon the teachings herein, changes and modifications may be made without departing from the subject matter described herein and its broader aspects and, therefore, the appended claims are to encompass within their scope all such changes and modifications as are within the true spirit and scope of the subject matter described herein. Furthermore, it is to be understood that the invention is defined by the appended claims. It will be understood by those within the art that, in general, terms used herein, and especially in the appended claims (e.g., bodies of the appended claims) are generally intended as “open” terms (e.g., the term “including” should be interpreted as “including but not limited to,” the term “having” should be interpreted as “having at least,” the term “includes” should be interpreted as “includes but is not limited to,” etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is intended, such an intent will be explicitly recited in the claim, and in the absence of such recitation no such intent is present. For example, as an aid to understanding, the following appended claims may contain usage of the introductory phrases “at least one” and “one or more” to introduce claim recitations. However, the use of such phrases should not be construed to imply that the introduction of a claim recitation by the indefinite articles “a” or “an” limits any particular claim containing such introduced claim recitation to inventions containing only one such recitation, even when the same claim includes the introductory phrases “one or more” or “at least one” and indefinite articles such as “a” or “an” (e.g., “a” and/or “an” should typically be interpreted to mean “at least one” or “one or more”); the same holds true for the use of definite articles used to introduce claim recitations. In addition, even if a specific number of an introduced claim recitation is explicitly recited, those skilled in the art will recognize that such recitation should typically be interpreted to mean at least the recited number (e.g., the bare recitation of “two recitations,” without other modifiers, typically means at least two recitations, or two or more recitations). Furthermore, in those instances where a convention analogous to “at least one of A, B, and C, etc.” is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one of A, B, and C” would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). In those instances where a convention analogous to “at least one of A, B, or C, etc.” is used, in general such a construction is intended in the sense one having skill in the art would understand the convention (e.g., “a system having at least one of A, B, or C” would include but not be limited to systems that have A alone, B alone, C alone, A and B together, A and C together, B and C together, and/or A, B, and C together, etc.). It will be further understood by those within the art that virtually any disjunctive word and/or phrase presenting two or more alternative terms, whether in the description, claims, or drawings, should be understood to contemplate the possibilities of including one of the terms, either of the terms, or both terms. For example, the phrase “A or B” will be understood to include the possibilities of “A” or “B” or “A and B.”
- Those having skill in the art will recognize that the state of the art has progressed to the point where there is little distinction left between hardware and software implementations of aspects of systems; the use of hardware or software is generally (but not always, in that in certain contexts the choice between hardware and software can become significant) a design choice representing cost vs. efficiency tradeoffs. Those having skill in the art will appreciate that there are various vehicles by which processes and/or systems and/or other technologies described herein can be effected (e.g., hardware, software, and/or firmware), and that the preferred vehicle will vary with the context in which the processes and/or systems and/or other technologies are deployed. For example, if an implementer determines that speed and accuracy are paramount, the implementer may opt for a mainly hardware and/or firmware vehicle; alternatively, if flexibility is paramount, the implementer may opt for a mainly software implementation; or, yet again alternatively, the implementer may opt for some combination of hardware, software, and/or firmware. Hence, there are several possible vehicles by which the processes and/or devices and/or other technologies described herein may be effected, none of which is inherently superior to the other in that any vehicle to be utilized is a choice dependent upon the context in which the vehicle will be deployed and the specific concerns (e.g., speed, flexibility, or predictability) of the implementer, any of which may vary. Those skilled in the art will recognize that optical aspects of implementations will typically employ optically-oriented hardware, software, and/or firmware.
- The foregoing detailed description has set forth various embodiments of the devices and/or processes via the use of block diagrams, flowcharts, and/or examples. Insofar as such block diagrams, flowcharts, and/or examples contain one or more functions and/or operations, it will be understood by those within the art that each function and/or operation within such block diagrams, flowcharts, or examples can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, or virtually any combination thereof. In one embodiment, several portions of the subject matter described herein may be implemented via Application Specific Integrated Circuits (ASICs), Field Programmable Gate Arrays (FPGAs), digital signal processors (DSPs), or other integrated formats. However, those skilled in the art will recognize that some aspects of the embodiments disclosed herein, in whole or in part, can be equivalently implemented in integrated circuits, as one or more computer programs running on one or more computers (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more computer systems), as one or more programs running on one or more processors (e.g., as one or more programs running on one or more microprocessors), as firmware, or as virtually any combination thereof, and that designing the circuitry and/or writing the code for the software and or firmware would be well within the skill of one of skill in the art in light of this disclosure. In addition, those skilled in the art will appreciate that the mechanisms of the subject matter described herein are capable of being distributed as a program product in a variety of forms, and that an illustrative embodiment of the subject matter described herein applies regardless of the particular type of signal-bearing medium used to actually carry out the distribution. Examples of a signal-bearing medium include, but are not limited to, the following: a recordable type medium such as a floppy disk, a hard disk drive, a Compact Disc (CD), a Digital Video Disk (DVD), a digital tape, a computer memory, etc.; and a transmission type medium such as a digital and/or an analog communication medium (e.g., a fiber optic cable, a waveguide, a wired communications link, a wireless communication link, etc.).
- In a general sense, those skilled in the art will recognize that the various embodiments described herein can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by various types of electromechanical systems having a wide range of electrical components such as hardware, software, firmware, or virtually any combination thereof; and a wide range of components that may impart mechanical force or motion such as rigid bodies, spring or torsional bodies, hydraulics, and electro-magnetically actuated devices, or virtually any combination thereof. Consequently, as used herein “electro-mechanical system” includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry operably coupled with a transducer (e.g., an actuator, a motor, a piezoelectric crystal, etc.), electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of random access memory), electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, or optical-electrical equipment), and any non-electrical analog thereto, such as optical or other analogs. Those skilled in the art will also appreciate that examples of electromechanical systems include but are not limited to a variety of consumer electronics systems, as well as other systems such as motorized transport systems, factory automation systems, security systems, and communication/computing systems. Those skilled in the art will recognize that electro-mechanical as used herein is not necessarily limited to a system that has both electrical and mechanical actuation except as context may dictate otherwise.
- In a general sense, those skilled in the art will recognize that the various aspects described herein which can be implemented, individually and/or collectively, by a wide range of hardware, software, firmware, or any combination thereof can be viewed as being composed of various types of “electrical circuitry.” Consequently, as used herein “electrical circuitry” includes, but is not limited to, electrical circuitry having at least one discrete electrical circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one integrated circuit, electrical circuitry having at least one application specific integrated circuit, electrical circuitry forming a general purpose computing device configured by a computer program (e.g., a general purpose computer configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein, or a microprocessor configured by a computer program which at least partially carries out processes and/or devices described herein), electrical circuitry forming a memory device (e.g., forms of random access memory), and/or electrical circuitry forming a communications device (e.g., a modem, communications switch, or optical-electrical equipment). Those having skill in the art will recognize that the subject matter described herein may be implemented in an analog or digital fashion or some combination thereof.
- Those skilled in the art will recognize that it is common within the art to implement devices and/or processes and/or systems in the fashion(s) set forth herein, and thereafter use engineering and/or business practices to integrate such implemented devices and/or processes and/or systems into more comprehensive devices and/or processes and/or systems. That is, at least a portion of the devices and/or processes and/or systems described herein can be integrated into other devices and/or processes and/or systems via a reasonable amount of experimentation. Those having skill in the art will recognize that examples of such other devices and/or processes and/or systems might include—as appropriate to context and application—all or part of devices and/or processes and/or systems of (a) an air conveyance (e.g., an airplane, rocket, hovercraft, helicopter, etc.), (b) a ground conveyance (e.g., a car, truck, locomotive, tank, armored personnel carrier, etc.), (c) a building (e.g., a home, warehouse, office, etc.), (d) an appliance (e.g., a refrigerator, a washing machine, a dryer, etc.), (e) a communications system (e.g., a networked system, a telephone system, a voice-over IP system, etc.), (f) a business entity (e.g., an Internet Service Provider (ISP) entity such as Comcast Cable, Quest, Southwestern Bell, etc), or (g) a wired/wireless services entity (e.g., such as Sprint, Cingular, Nextel, etc.), etc.
- Although user170 is shown/described herein as a single illustrated figure, those skilled in the art will appreciate that a user124 may be representative of a human user124, a robotic user124 (e.g., computational entity), and/or substantially any combination thereof (e.g., a user124 may be assisted by one or more robotic). In addition, a user124 as set forth herein, although shown as a single entity may in fact be composed of two or more entities. Those skilled in the art will appreciate that, in general, the same may be said of “sender” and/or other entity-oriented terms as such terms are used herein.
- The herein described subject matter sometimes illustrates different components contained within, or connected with, different other components. It is to be understood that such depicted architectures are merely exemplary, and that in fact many other architectures can be implemented which achieve the same functionality. In a conceptual sense, any arrangement of components to achieve the same functionality is effectively “associated” such that the desired functionality is achieved. Hence, any two components herein combined to achieve a particular functionality can be seen as “associated with” each other such that the desired functionality is achieved, irrespective of architectures or intermedial components. Likewise, any two components so associated can also be viewed as being “operably connected”, or “operably coupled”, to each other to achieve the desired functionality, and any two components capable of being so associated can also be viewed as being “operably couplable”, to each other to achieve the desired functionality. Specific examples of operably couplable include but are not limited to physically mateable and/or physically interacting components and/or wirelessly interactable and/or wirelessly interacting components and/or logically interacting and/or logically interactable components.
- All publications, patents and patent applications cited herein are incorporated herein by reference. The foregoing specification has been described in relation to certain embodiments thereof, and many details have been set forth for purposes of illustration, however, it will be apparent to those skilled in the art that the invention is susceptible to additional embodiments and that certain of the details described herein may be varied considerably without departing from the basic principles of the invention.
Claims (54)
1. A method comprising:
receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and
processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
2. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
receiving the one or more signals that include an identity of the one or more agents.
3. (canceled)
4. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with the individual.
5. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
receiving one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
6. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more agents.
7. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with the location of the individual.
8. (canceled)
9. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
determining one or more alternatives to the one or more agents.
10. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
determining if the one or more agents are covered by insurance carried by the individual.
11. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
billing one or more providers for the one or more agents.
12. The method ofclaim 1 , wherein the processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
selecting the one or more agents for delivery to the individual.
13. The method ofclaim 1 , further comprising:
packaging the one or more agents.
14. The method ofclaim 13 , wherein the packaging the one or more agents comprises:
formulating the one or more agents into unit dosage form.
15. The method ofclaim 13 , wherein the packaging the one or more agents comprises:
packaging two or more of the agents into a single administration form.
16. (canceled)
17. The method ofclaim 13 , wherein the packaging the one or more agents comprises:
packaging the one or more agents with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
18. (canceled)
19. The method ofclaim 13 , wherein the packaging the one or more agents comprises:
packaging the one or more agents with packaging material and addressing the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses.
20. The method ofclaim 13 , further comprising:
shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
21-22. (canceled)
23. The method ofclaim 20 , wherein the shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents comprises:
shipping the one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities.
24. The method ofclaim 20 , wherein the shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents comprises:
shipping the one or more packages to one or more pharmacies.
25. A system comprising:
a signal-bearing medium bearing:
one or more instructions for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and
one or more instructions for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
26. The system ofclaim 25 , further comprising:
one or more instructions for packaging the one or more agents.
27. The system ofclaim 26 , further comprising:
one or more instructions for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
28-30. (canceled)
31. A system comprising:
means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and
means for processing the information associated with the means for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
32. The system ofclaim 31 , further comprising:
means for packaging the one or more agents.
33. The system ofclaim 32 , further comprising:
means for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
34. A system comprising:
circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained; and
circuitry for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained.
35. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for receiving the one or more signals that include an identity of the one or more agents.
36. (canceled)
37. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for receiving one or more signals through use of a secure connection.
38. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with the individual.
39. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with one or more locations of the one or more agents.
40. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for receiving one or more signals that include information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for receiving the one or more signals that include information associated with the location of the individual.
41. (canceled)
42. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for determining one or more alternatives to the one or more agents.
43. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for determining if the one or more agents are covered by insurance carried by the individual.
44. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for billing one or more providers for the one or more agents.
45. The system ofclaim 34 , wherein the circuitry for processing the information associated with one or more agents determined in response to one or more pathogens present within one or more samples obtained from an individual and the input associated with the individual from whom the one or more samples were obtained comprises:
circuitry for selecting the one or more agents for delivery to the individual.
46. The system ofclaim 34 , further comprising:
circuitry for packaging the one or more agents.
47. The system ofclaim 46 , wherein the circuitry for packaging the one or more agents comprises:
circuitry for formulating the one or more agents into unit dosage form.
48. The system ofclaim 46 , wherein the circuitry for packaging the one or more agents comprises:
circuitry for packaging two or more of the agents into a single administration form.
49. (canceled)
50. The system ofclaim 46 , wherein the circuitry for packaging the one or more agents comprises:
circuitry for packaging the one or more agents with one or more pharmaceutically acceptable carriers.
51. (canceled)
52. The system ofclaim 46 , wherein the circuitry for packaging the one or more agents comprises:
circuitry for packaging the one or more agents with packaging material and addressing the packaging material for delivery to one or more addresses.
53. The system ofclaim 46 , further comprising:
circuitry for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents.
54-55. (canceled)
56. The system ofclaim 53 , wherein the circuitry for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents comprises:
circuitry for shipping the one or more packages to one or more treatment facilities.
57. The system ofclaim 53 , wherein the circuitry for shipping one or more packages that include the one or more agents comprises:
circuitry for shipping the one or more packages to one or more pharmacies.
58-156. (canceled)
Priority Applications (11)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US11/900,637US20080103746A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for pathogen detection and response |
| US11/900,649US20080210748A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and responding |
| US11/900,660US8068991B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for transmitting pathogen related information and responding |
| PCT/US2007/020272WO2008036300A2 (en) | 2006-09-18 | 2007-09-18 | Systems and methods for transmitting pathogen related information and responding |
| PCT/US2007/020305WO2008036317A2 (en) | 2006-09-18 | 2007-09-18 | Systems and methods for pathogen detection and response |
| PCT/US2007/020283WO2008036306A2 (en) | 2006-09-18 | 2007-09-18 | Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and responding |
| US11/906,171US20090050569A1 (en) | 2007-01-29 | 2007-09-28 | Fluidic methods |
| US11/906,168US20080245740A1 (en) | 2007-01-29 | 2007-09-28 | Fluidic methods |
| US12/011,008US20080193919A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2008-01-22 | Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and responding |
| US17/005,065US20210086172A1 (en) | 2007-03-27 | 2020-08-27 | Fluidic Methods |
| US18/664,790US20240299927A1 (en) | 2007-03-27 | 2024-05-15 | Fluidic methods |
Applications Claiming Priority (31)
| Application Number | Priority Date | Filing Date | Title |
|---|---|---|---|
| US11/291,482US20070119928A1 (en) | 2005-11-17 | 2005-11-30 | Generating a nutraceutical request from an inventory |
| US11/314,945US20070112591A1 (en) | 2005-11-17 | 2005-12-20 | Generating a request from a nutraceutical inventory |
| US11/453,571US20070289258A1 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2006-06-14 | Individualized pharmaceutical selection and packaging |
| US11/474,109US20070299693A1 (en) | 2006-06-23 | 2006-06-23 | Customized visual marking for medication labeling |
| US11/478,341US20070124219A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2006-06-28 | Computational and/or control systems related to individualized nutraceutical selection and packaging |
| US11/478,296US20070124218A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2006-06-28 | Computational and/or control systems related to individualized nutraceutical selection and packaging |
| US11/486,998US20070136092A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2006-07-14 | Computational and/or control systems related to individualized pharmaceutical and nutraceutical selection and packaging |
| US11/486,973US20070174128A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2006-07-14 | Computational and/or control systems related to individualized pharmaceutical and nutraceutical selection and packaging |
| US11/515,357US8340944B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2006-09-01 | Computational and/or control systems and methods related to nutraceutical agent selection and dosing |
| US11/518,540US8297028B2 (en) | 2006-06-14 | 2006-09-08 | Individualized pharmaceutical selection and packaging |
| US11/523,809US20070124176A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2006-09-18 | Computational and/or control systems and methods related to nutraceutical agent selection and dosing |
| US11/523,766US20070124175A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2006-09-18 | Computational and/or control systems and methods related to nutraceutical agent selection and dosing |
| US11/637,638US7927787B2 (en) | 2006-06-28 | 2006-12-11 | Methods and systems for analysis of nutraceutical associated components |
| US11/637,616US20080004905A1 (en) | 2006-06-28 | 2006-12-11 | Methods and systems for analysis of nutraceutical associated components |
| US11/729,301US20080241935A1 (en) | 2007-03-27 | 2007-03-27 | Methods for pathogen detection |
| US11/729,274US20080241000A1 (en) | 2007-03-27 | 2007-03-27 | Systems for pathogen detection |
| US11/729,276US20080241910A1 (en) | 2007-03-27 | 2007-03-27 | Devices for pathogen detection |
| US11/729,275US20080241909A1 (en) | 2007-03-27 | 2007-03-27 | Microfluidic chips for pathogen detection |
| US11/799,462US20080178692A1 (en) | 2007-01-29 | 2007-04-30 | Fluidic methods |
| US11/799,465US20080179255A1 (en) | 2007-01-29 | 2007-04-30 | Fluidic devices |
| US11/824,529US10296720B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-06-28 | Computational systems and methods related to nutraceuticals |
| US11/824,604US20080004909A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-06-28 | Computational systems related to nutraceuticals |
| US11/888,627US20080114577A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-07-31 | Computational methods and systems associated with nutraceutical related assays |
| US11/888,613US7827042B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-07-31 | Methods and systems related to transmission of nutraceutical associated information |
| US11/888,614US20080033763A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-07-31 | Methods and systems related to receiving nutraceutical associated information |
| US11/893,606US20080082272A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-08-15 | Computational systems and methods related to nutraceuticals |
| US11/893,608US7974856B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-08-15 | Computational systems and methods related to nutraceuticals |
| US11/893,605US20080052114A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-08-15 | Computational systems and methods related to nutraceuticals |
| US11/900,637US20080103746A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for pathogen detection and response |
| US11/900,649US20080210748A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and responding |
| US11/900,660US8068991B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for transmitting pathogen related information and responding |
Related Parent Applications (3)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US11/893,608Continuation-In-PartUS7974856B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-08-15 | Computational systems and methods related to nutraceuticals |
| US11/900,637Continuation-In-PartUS20080103746A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for pathogen detection and response |
| US11/900,660Continuation-In-PartUS8068991B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for transmitting pathogen related information and responding |
Related Child Applications (3)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US11/900,637Continuation-In-PartUS20080103746A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for pathogen detection and response |
| US11/900,660Continuation-In-PartUS8068991B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for transmitting pathogen related information and responding |
| US12/011,008Continuation-In-PartUS20080193919A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2008-01-22 | Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and responding |
Publications (1)
| Publication Number | Publication Date |
|---|---|
| US20080210748A1true US20080210748A1 (en) | 2008-09-04 |
Family
ID=39201069
Family Applications (3)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US11/900,649AbandonedUS20080210748A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and responding |
| US11/900,637AbandonedUS20080103746A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for pathogen detection and response |
| US11/900,660Active2027-09-20US8068991B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for transmitting pathogen related information and responding |
Family Applications After (2)
| Application Number | Title | Priority Date | Filing Date |
|---|---|---|---|
| US11/900,637AbandonedUS20080103746A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for pathogen detection and response |
| US11/900,660Active2027-09-20US8068991B2 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-09-11 | Systems and methods for transmitting pathogen related information and responding |
Country Status (2)
| Country | Link |
|---|---|
| US (3) | US20080210748A1 (en) |
| WO (3) | WO2008036300A2 (en) |
Cited By (1)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20160092657A1 (en)* | 2014-09-29 | 2016-03-31 | Athenahealth, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for geography-based antimicrobial resistance tracking |
Families Citing this family (15)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| JP3818277B2 (en)* | 2003-07-14 | 2006-09-06 | 株式会社日立製作所 | Chemical reaction device, chemical reaction system, and chemical reaction method |
| US20080245740A1 (en)* | 2007-01-29 | 2008-10-09 | Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware | Fluidic methods |
| US10001496B2 (en) | 2007-01-29 | 2018-06-19 | Gearbox, Llc | Systems for allergen detection |
| US9182411B2 (en)* | 2009-07-14 | 2015-11-10 | Colen Innovations, L.L.C. | Methods and apparatus for the detection and differentiation of non-sialated proteins from sialated proteins in a fluid sample |
| US20110152634A1 (en)* | 2009-12-17 | 2011-06-23 | Jeff Thew | Measuring Human Biological Fluid Levels |
| WO2011087410A1 (en)* | 2010-01-14 | 2011-07-21 | Hans Giertz | Methods to measure pathogens |
| US20110312078A1 (en)* | 2010-06-17 | 2011-12-22 | Geneasys Pty Ltd | Microfluidic device for detecting target nucleic acid sequences in mitochondrial dna |
| US20120284037A1 (en)* | 2011-05-06 | 2012-11-08 | Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware | Computer program product for receiving a notification of a benefit after queuing the result of an evaluation of a sample for transmission |
| KR20140043373A (en)* | 2011-05-06 | 2014-04-09 | 시리트 엘엘씨 | Sample evaluation result reporting after queuing the result for transmission |
| US9243222B2 (en)* | 2014-01-06 | 2016-01-26 | Lawrence Livermore National Security, Llc | Compositions and methods for pathogen transport |
| WO2017051413A1 (en)* | 2015-09-21 | 2017-03-30 | 4C Diagnostics Ltd. | Stool specimen collecting, sampling and diagnosing means and methods thereof |
| RU2018120004A (en) | 2015-10-30 | 2019-12-02 | Конинклейке Филипс Н.В. | METHODS, SYSTEMS AND PROCESSES FOR DETERMINING WAYS OF TRANSFER OF INFECTIOUS AGENTS |
| US12194157B2 (en) | 2020-04-09 | 2025-01-14 | Finncure Oy | Carrier for targeted delivery to a host |
| EP4132478A1 (en) | 2020-04-09 | 2023-02-15 | Finncure Oy | Mimetic nanoparticles for preventing the spreading and lowering the infection rate of novel coronaviruses |
| US12060148B2 (en) | 2022-08-16 | 2024-08-13 | Honeywell International Inc. | Ground resonance detection and warning system and method |
Citations (102)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US4009078A (en)* | 1975-01-24 | 1977-02-22 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration | Detecting the presence of microorganisms |
| US4081356A (en)* | 1976-09-24 | 1978-03-28 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health, Education And Welfare | Fecalator, an apparatus and method for concentration of parasite eggs and larvae |
| US4257041A (en)* | 1978-06-19 | 1981-03-17 | Izon Corporation | Electro optical display device |
| US4436378A (en)* | 1980-12-31 | 1984-03-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Passive display module and system |
| US4567185A (en)* | 1983-05-13 | 1986-01-28 | Key Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Endorphin blockage |
| USH201H (en)* | 1985-08-23 | 1987-01-06 | United States Of America | Biosensors from membrane proteins reconstituted in polymerized lipid bilayers |
| US4729636A (en)* | 1984-07-12 | 1988-03-08 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Passive display device having movable electrodes and method of manufacturing |
| US4807967A (en)* | 1986-01-09 | 1989-02-28 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Passive display device |
| US5093268A (en)* | 1988-04-28 | 1992-03-03 | Igen, Inc. | Apparatus for conducting a plurality of simultaneous measurements of electrochemiluminescent phenomena |
| US5176285A (en)* | 1991-08-26 | 1993-01-05 | Shaw Thomas J | Pill dispensing apparatus |
| US5279294A (en)* | 1985-04-08 | 1994-01-18 | Cascade Medical, Inc. | Medical diagnostic system |
| US5284656A (en)* | 1991-03-15 | 1994-02-08 | Amgen Inc. | Pulmonary administration of granulocyte colony stimulating factor |
| US5387267A (en)* | 1993-08-25 | 1995-02-07 | Modular Energy Corporation | Process and apparatus for treating heterogeneous waste to provide a homogeneous fuel |
| US5490962A (en)* | 1993-10-18 | 1996-02-13 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Preparation of medical devices by solid free-form fabrication methods |
| US5495961A (en)* | 1992-03-30 | 1996-03-05 | Maestre; Federico A. | Portable programmable medication alarm device and method and apparatus for programming and using the same |
| US5542420A (en)* | 1993-04-30 | 1996-08-06 | Goldman; Arnold J. | Personalized method and system for storage, communication, analysis, and processing of health-related data |
| US5704350A (en)* | 1994-03-25 | 1998-01-06 | Nutritec Corporation | Nutritional microcomputer and method |
| US5716852A (en)* | 1996-03-29 | 1998-02-10 | University Of Washington | Microfabricated diffusion-based chemical sensor |
| US5719123A (en)* | 1991-03-18 | 1998-02-17 | Sandoz Ltd. | Ciclosporin form for pulmonary administration |
| US5726404A (en)* | 1996-05-31 | 1998-03-10 | University Of Washington | Valveless liquid microswitch |
| US5873369A (en)* | 1997-03-31 | 1999-02-23 | Chronoslim P.C.E. Ltd. | System for monitoring health conditions of an individual and a method thereof |
| US5882931A (en)* | 1997-07-14 | 1999-03-16 | Petersen; Roger | Method and apparatus for performing urinalysis in real time |
| US6021202A (en)* | 1996-12-20 | 2000-02-01 | Financial Services Technology Consortium | Method and system for processing electronic documents |
| US6024699A (en)* | 1998-03-13 | 2000-02-15 | Healthware Corporation | Systems, methods and computer program products for monitoring, diagnosing and treating medical conditions of remotely located patients |
| US6023916A (en)* | 1996-07-22 | 2000-02-15 | Dispill Inc. | Kit and process for the manufacture of a set of individual pill containers |
| US6035230A (en)* | 1995-09-13 | 2000-03-07 | Medison Co., Ltd | Real-time biological signal monitoring system using radio communication network |
| US6037167A (en)* | 1994-10-03 | 2000-03-14 | Ericomp | Magnetic polynucleotide separation and analysis |
| US6169068B1 (en)* | 1993-02-12 | 2001-01-02 | Avant Immunotherpeutics, Inc. | Pulmonary administration of soluble complement receptor-1 (sCR1) and its derivatives |
| US6188988B1 (en)* | 1998-04-03 | 2001-02-13 | Triangle Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Systems, methods and computer program products for guiding the selection of therapeutic treatment regimens |
| US6194900B1 (en)* | 1998-06-19 | 2001-02-27 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Integrated miniaturized device for processing and NMR detection of liquid phase samples |
| US6335021B1 (en)* | 1997-06-18 | 2002-01-01 | Sigma-Tau Healthscience S.P.A. | Composition for controlling mood disorders in healthy individuals |
| US20020004749A1 (en)* | 2000-02-09 | 2002-01-10 | Froseth Barrie R. | Customized food selection, ordering and distribution system and method |
| US20020016719A1 (en)* | 2000-06-19 | 2002-02-07 | Nemeth Louis G. | Methods and systems for providing medical data to a third party in accordance with configurable distribution parameters |
| US20020019784A1 (en)* | 1999-05-12 | 2002-02-14 | Airclic, Inc. | Printed medium activated interactive communication |
| US20020019165A1 (en)* | 2000-08-02 | 2002-02-14 | Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Wire harness structure |
| US20020027164A1 (en)* | 2000-09-07 | 2002-03-07 | Mault James R. | Portable computing apparatus particularly useful in a weight management program |
| US20020032580A1 (en)* | 2000-04-27 | 2002-03-14 | Hopkins John W. | Method of directing patients to medical care |
| US20020032583A1 (en)* | 1999-12-18 | 2002-03-14 | Joao Raymond Anthony | Apparatus and method for processing and/or for providing healthcare information and/or healthcare-related information |
| US20020032582A1 (en)* | 2000-09-14 | 2002-03-14 | Feeney Robert J. | System for medication dispensing and integrated data management |
| US20020032620A1 (en)* | 1999-09-24 | 2002-03-14 | Benz Patrick H. | Electronic network based controlled products selling and delivering system and method |
| US20020033753A1 (en)* | 2000-06-28 | 2002-03-21 | Sally Imbo | System for prompting user activities |
| US20020038392A1 (en)* | 1999-10-22 | 2002-03-28 | Carlos De La Huerga | Method and apparatus for controlling an infusion pump or the like |
| US20030005445A1 (en)* | 1995-10-02 | 2003-01-02 | Schein Steven M. | Systems and methods for linking television viewers with advertisers and broadcasters |
| US6510430B1 (en)* | 1999-02-24 | 2003-01-21 | Acumins, Inc. | Diagnosis and interpretation methods and apparatus for a personal nutrition program |
| US20030019165A1 (en)* | 2001-05-25 | 2003-01-30 | Gallant Dennis J. | Patient care apparatus and method |
| US20030028399A1 (en)* | 2000-09-25 | 2003-02-06 | Duane Davis | Method and system for providing interactive health care services |
| US20030032868A1 (en)* | 2001-07-09 | 2003-02-13 | Henning Graskov | Method and system for controlling data information between two portable apparatuses |
| US20030036683A1 (en)* | 2000-05-01 | 2003-02-20 | Kehr Bruce A. | Method, system and computer program product for internet-enabled, patient monitoring system |
| US6523392B2 (en)* | 2000-01-25 | 2003-02-25 | Arizona Board Of Regents | Microcantilever sensor |
| US6529446B1 (en)* | 1996-12-20 | 2003-03-04 | Telaric L.L.C. | Interactive medication container |
| US20030044832A1 (en)* | 1996-09-04 | 2003-03-06 | Scandinavian Micro Biodevices A/S | Microflow system for particle separation and analysis |
| US20030055531A1 (en)* | 1995-10-18 | 2003-03-20 | Telepharmacy Solutions, Incorporated | Method for controlling a drug dispensing system |
| US20030061123A1 (en)* | 2000-02-04 | 2003-03-27 | Mcmenimen James L. | Responsive manufacturing and inventory control |
| US20040001874A1 (en)* | 2002-06-24 | 2004-01-01 | Vital Living, Inc. | Safe and effective nutritional supplement formulations and associated regimens adapted to prevent and/or treat targeted diseases or medical or health conditions, and related methods |
| US20040004523A1 (en)* | 2001-11-30 | 2004-01-08 | Humphries David E. | High performance hybrid magnetic structure for biotechnology applications |
| US20040026447A1 (en)* | 2002-08-08 | 2004-02-12 | Jeffrey Badin | Any protein and energy powder supplement cold dispensing coin operated vending machine |
| US20040033553A1 (en)* | 2002-05-23 | 2004-02-19 | Littarru Gian Paolo | Method to assay coenzyme Q10 in blood plasma or blood serum |
| US20040032330A1 (en)* | 2002-08-14 | 2004-02-19 | Ncr Corporation | Pharmacy transaction system and method |
| US6695147B1 (en)* | 1996-06-14 | 2004-02-24 | University Of Washington | Absorption-enhanced differential extraction device |
| US20040039599A1 (en)* | 2001-04-11 | 2004-02-26 | Fralic Donald R. | Method of distributing cost savings to participants in a prescription drug distribution chain |
| US6699193B2 (en)* | 2000-09-29 | 2004-03-02 | New Health Sciences, Inc. | Decision support systems and methods for assessing vascular health |
| US20040053290A1 (en)* | 2000-01-11 | 2004-03-18 | Terbrueggen Robert Henry | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing |
| US6709676B2 (en)* | 1999-12-20 | 2004-03-23 | Schering Corporation | Extended release oral dosage composition |
| US6709869B2 (en)* | 1995-12-18 | 2004-03-23 | Tecan Trading Ag | Devices and methods for using centripetal acceleration to drive fluid movement in a microfluidics system |
| US6838076B2 (en)* | 2001-05-21 | 2005-01-04 | Nektar Therapeutics | Pulmonary administration of chemically modified insulin |
| US6841544B2 (en)* | 2000-02-23 | 2005-01-11 | Bioselect Innovations, Inc. | Composition and method for treating the effects of diseases and maladies |
| US20050010416A1 (en)* | 2003-07-09 | 2005-01-13 | Gensym Corporation | System and method for self management of health using natural language interface |
| US20050014134A1 (en)* | 2003-03-06 | 2005-01-20 | West Jason Andrew Appleton | Viral identification by generation and detection of protein signatures |
| US20050013863A1 (en)* | 2003-07-18 | 2005-01-20 | Depomed, Inc., A Corporation Of The State Of California | Dual drug dosage forms with improved separation of drugs |
| US20050021413A1 (en)* | 2001-10-22 | 2005-01-27 | Lisa Berry | Interactive product selection system |
| US6849396B2 (en)* | 1999-04-20 | 2005-02-01 | Target Discovery, Inc. | Methods for conducting metabolic analyses |
| US6852206B2 (en)* | 2000-04-13 | 2005-02-08 | Janusz Pawliszyn | Measurement of fluorescence using capillary isoelectric focusing |
| US20050033606A1 (en)* | 2003-08-06 | 2005-02-10 | Miller Raymond F. | Medication order processing and dispensing system |
| US20050038558A1 (en)* | 2003-05-30 | 2005-02-17 | Keene Astrid I.-S. | System and method for labeling pharmaceutical prescriptions |
| US20050038674A1 (en)* | 2003-04-15 | 2005-02-17 | Braig James R. | System and method for managing a chronic medical condition |
| US20050053650A1 (en)* | 2003-09-08 | 2005-03-10 | Anne-Marie Chalmers | Medication delivery device |
| US20050060188A1 (en)* | 2003-09-03 | 2005-03-17 | Electronic Data Systems Corporation | System, method, and computer program product for health care patient and service management |
| US20050062238A1 (en)* | 2003-03-28 | 2005-03-24 | Laird Broadfield | Point of care station |
| US20050070607A1 (en)* | 2003-08-19 | 2005-03-31 | James Andrus | N-acetylcysteine compositions and methods for the treatment and prevention of cysteine/glutathione deficiency in diseases and conditions |
| US20060015016A1 (en)* | 2004-06-22 | 2006-01-19 | Thornton William E | Caloric balance weight control system and methods of making and using same |
| US20060015291A1 (en)* | 2002-10-18 | 2006-01-19 | Leland Stanford Junior University | Methods and systems for data analysis |
| US20060028727A1 (en)* | 2002-08-20 | 2006-02-09 | Moon John A | Method and apparatus for drug product tracking using encoded optical identification elements |
| US7005447B2 (en)* | 1999-03-30 | 2006-02-28 | Hormos Nutraceutical Oy Ltd. | Food product comprising hydroxymatairesinol |
| US20060047538A1 (en)* | 2004-08-25 | 2006-03-02 | Joseph Condurso | System and method for dynamically adjusting patient therapy |
| US7016752B1 (en)* | 1999-12-17 | 2006-03-21 | Rxperts, Inc. | Method of and system for labeling containers of prescribed medicine |
| US20060064250A1 (en)* | 2004-09-17 | 2006-03-23 | Bionutritional, Llc | Methods and systems for providing a nutraceutical program specific to an individual animal |
| US20060069757A1 (en)* | 2004-09-30 | 2006-03-30 | Peters Joseph S | Automated PCN downloads |
| US20070000838A1 (en)* | 2005-04-14 | 2007-01-04 | California Institute Of Technology | Integrated chromatography devices and systems for monitoring analytes in real time and methods for manufacturing the same |
| US20070003447A1 (en)* | 2005-06-29 | 2007-01-04 | Gleason K R | Fluid dispensing system |
| US20070011919A1 (en)* | 2005-06-27 | 2007-01-18 | Case Charles W Jr | Systems for activating and/or authenticating electronic devices for operation with footwear and other uses |
| US7169432B2 (en)* | 2004-03-04 | 2007-01-30 | Microsoy Corporation | Toasted soybean flakes and method of making same |
| US7172897B2 (en)* | 2000-01-11 | 2007-02-06 | Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing |
| US7193128B2 (en)* | 1997-06-03 | 2007-03-20 | Chromatin, Inc. | Methods for generating or increasing revenues from crops |
| US20070067186A1 (en)* | 2005-09-22 | 2007-03-22 | Ira Brenner | Method and system for electronically prescribing medications |
| US20070065506A1 (en)* | 2005-03-11 | 2007-03-22 | Kelly Robert J | Keratin and soluble derivatives thereof for a nutraceutical and to reduce oxidative stress and to reduce inflammation and to promote skin health |
| US7197492B2 (en)* | 2000-11-02 | 2007-03-27 | Daniel Joseph Sullivan | Computerized risk management module for medical diagnosis |
| US20070068959A1 (en)* | 2003-11-26 | 2007-03-29 | D Silva Joe | Preparing for individualized dosage forms of medicaments |
| US20070192134A1 (en)* | 2005-12-15 | 2007-08-16 | Benjamin Littenberg | Clinical decision support system |
| US7461006B2 (en)* | 2001-08-29 | 2008-12-02 | Victor Gogolak | Method and system for the analysis and association of patient-specific and population-based genomic data with drug safety adverse event data |
| US7483839B2 (en)* | 1994-10-28 | 2009-01-27 | Cybear, L.L.C. | Computerized prescription system for gathering and presenting information relating to pharmaceuticals |
| US7490085B2 (en)* | 2002-12-18 | 2009-02-10 | Ge Medical Systems Global Technology Company, Llc | Computer-assisted data processing system and method incorporating automated learning |
| US8135595B2 (en)* | 2004-05-14 | 2012-03-13 | H. Lee Moffitt Cancer Center And Research Institute, Inc. | Computer systems and methods for providing health care |
Family Cites Families (266)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US3971065A (en) | 1975-03-05 | 1976-07-20 | Eastman Kodak Company | Color imaging array |
| JPS612060A (en) | 1984-06-15 | 1986-01-08 | Matsushita Electric Works Ltd | Biosensor |
| US5054493A (en) | 1986-01-31 | 1991-10-08 | Regents Of The University Of Minnesota | Method for diagnosing, monitoring and treating hypertension |
| US4857716A (en) | 1986-05-12 | 1989-08-15 | Clinicom Incorporated | Patient identification and verification system and method |
| US5820876A (en) | 1986-08-28 | 1998-10-13 | Lts Lohmann Therapie-Systeme Gmbh & Co. Kg | Transdermal therapeutic system |
| US4847764C1 (en) | 1987-05-21 | 2001-09-11 | Meditrol Inc | System for dispensing drugs in health care instituions |
| US5006343A (en) | 1988-12-29 | 1991-04-09 | Benson Bradley J | Pulmonary administration of pharmaceutically active substances |
| US5300302A (en) | 1990-10-04 | 1994-04-05 | Nestec S.A. | Pharmaceutical composition in gel form in a dispensing package |
| US6468805B1 (en) | 1990-10-10 | 2002-10-22 | Chimera Research And Chemical Inc. | Automated analyzer testing of urine for presence of a pH abnormality |
| US6565841B1 (en) | 1991-03-15 | 2003-05-20 | Amgen, Inc. | Pulmonary administration of granulocyte colony stimulating factor |
| US5412560A (en) | 1991-08-27 | 1995-05-02 | Dine Systems, Inc. | Method for evaluating and analyzing food choices |
| AU2605592A (en) | 1991-10-15 | 1993-04-22 | Atrix Laboratories, Inc. | Polymeric compositions useful as controlled release implants |
| US6582728B1 (en) | 1992-07-08 | 2003-06-24 | Inhale Therapeutic Systems, Inc. | Spray drying of macromolecules to produce inhaleable dry powders |
| SE500122C2 (en) | 1992-08-27 | 1994-04-18 | Rudolf Valentin Sillen | Method and apparatus for individually controlled, adaptive medication |
| US5869097A (en) | 1992-11-02 | 1999-02-09 | Alza Corporation | Method of therapy comprising an osmotic caplet |
| US5940801A (en) | 1994-04-26 | 1999-08-17 | Health Hero Network, Inc. | Modular microprocessor-based diagnostic measurement apparatus and method for psychological conditions |
| US5307263A (en) | 1992-11-17 | 1994-04-26 | Raya Systems, Inc. | Modular microprocessor-based health monitoring system |
| US5354934A (en) | 1993-02-04 | 1994-10-11 | Amgen Inc. | Pulmonary administration of erythropoietin |
| US6280771B1 (en) | 1997-02-20 | 2001-08-28 | Therics, Inc. | Dosage forms exhibiting multi-phasic release kinetics and methods of manufacture thereof |
| US5833599A (en) | 1993-12-13 | 1998-11-10 | Multum Information Services | Providing patient-specific drug information |
| IL109492A (en) | 1994-05-01 | 1999-06-20 | Sirotech Ltd | Method and apparatus for evaluating bacterial populations |
| US5958458A (en) | 1994-06-15 | 1999-09-28 | Dumex-Alpharma A/S | Pharmaceutical multiple unit particulate formulation in the form of coated cores |
| US5737539A (en) | 1994-10-28 | 1998-04-07 | Advanced Health Med-E-Systems Corp. | Prescription creation system |
| JP3524606B2 (en) | 1994-12-28 | 2004-05-10 | 三洋電機株式会社 | Solid preparation filling device |
| US5589468A (en) | 1995-01-13 | 1996-12-31 | Clintec Nutrition Co. | Method for providing nutrition to elderly patients |
| US5758095A (en) | 1995-02-24 | 1998-05-26 | Albaum; David | Interactive medication ordering system |
| CA2704228C (en) | 1995-03-10 | 2013-10-22 | Meso Scale Technologies, Llc | Multi-array, multi-specific electrochemiluminescence testing |
| US5780014A (en) | 1995-04-14 | 1998-07-14 | Inhale Therapeutic Systems | Method and apparatus for pulmonary administration of dry powder alpha 1-antitrypsin |
| AU6541596A (en) | 1995-06-16 | 1997-01-15 | University Of Washington | Microfabricated differential extraction device and method |
| EP0871539B1 (en) | 1995-06-16 | 2002-02-20 | University of Washington | Tangential flow planar microfabricated fluid filter |
| US6454945B1 (en) | 1995-06-16 | 2002-09-24 | University Of Washington | Microfabricated devices and methods |
| US5758096A (en) | 1995-08-09 | 1998-05-26 | Barsky; Howard | System and method for personalized medication treatment management |
| US5692502A (en) | 1995-09-11 | 1997-12-02 | Alpert; Scott E. | Computer-aided drug recognition screeening evaluation system and method |
| US5700998A (en) | 1995-10-31 | 1997-12-23 | Palti; Yoram | Drug coding and delivery system |
| US5807579A (en) | 1995-11-16 | 1998-09-15 | F.H. Faulding & Co. Limited | Pseudoephedrine combination pharmaceutical compositions |
| US5837196A (en) | 1996-01-26 | 1998-11-17 | The Regents Of The University Of California | High density array fabrication and readout method for a fiber optic biosensor |
| US5995938A (en) | 1996-02-27 | 1999-11-30 | Whaley; Susan S. | Medication compliance system |
| CA2220768A1 (en) | 1996-03-13 | 1997-09-18 | Yale University | Smoking cessation treatments using naltrexone and related compounds |
| US5747349A (en) | 1996-03-20 | 1998-05-05 | University Of Washington | Fluorescent reporter beads for fluid analysis |
| US6541213B1 (en) | 1996-03-29 | 2003-04-01 | University Of Washington | Microscale diffusion immunoassay |
| US5948684A (en) | 1997-03-31 | 1999-09-07 | University Of Washington | Simultaneous analyte determination and reference balancing in reference T-sensor devices |
| US6890426B2 (en) | 1996-06-07 | 2005-05-10 | Immunivest Corporation | Magnetic separation apparatus and methods |
| US6660159B1 (en) | 1996-06-07 | 2003-12-09 | Immunivest Corporation | Magnetic separation apparatus and methods |
| US5955269A (en) | 1996-06-20 | 1999-09-21 | Rutgers, The State University Of New Jersey | Methods of screening foods for nutraceuticals |
| US5954640A (en) | 1996-06-27 | 1999-09-21 | Szabo; Andrew J. | Nutritional optimization method |
| US5770226A (en) | 1996-07-10 | 1998-06-23 | Wake Forest University | Combined pharmaceutical estrogen-androgen-progestin oral contraceptive |
| US5654011A (en) | 1996-07-30 | 1997-08-05 | Energetics, Inc. | Dietary supplements |
| AUPO149596A0 (en) | 1996-08-08 | 1996-08-29 | Ka Pty Ltd | Particle separator |
| US5798266A (en) | 1996-08-27 | 1998-08-25 | K-Quay Enterprises, Llc | Methods and kits for obtaining and assaying mammary fluid samples for breast diseases, including cancer |
| US5839438A (en) | 1996-09-10 | 1998-11-24 | Neuralmed, Inc. | Computer-based neural network system and method for medical diagnosis and interpretation |
| WO1998022625A1 (en) | 1996-11-20 | 1998-05-28 | The Regents Of The University Of Michigan | Microfabricated isothermal nucleic acid amplification devices and methods |
| US6087090A (en) | 1997-02-25 | 2000-07-11 | Celtrix Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Methods for predicting drug response |
| US5907291A (en) | 1997-06-05 | 1999-05-25 | Vsm Technology Inc. | Multi-patient monitoring apparatus and method |
| US5974867A (en) | 1997-06-13 | 1999-11-02 | University Of Washington | Method for determining concentration of a laminar sample stream |
| JP2001518624A (en) | 1997-09-26 | 2001-10-16 | ユニバーシティ・オブ・ワシントン | Simultaneous particle separation and chemical reactions |
| US6007775A (en) | 1997-09-26 | 1999-12-28 | University Of Washington | Multiple analyte diffusion based chemical sensor |
| US6139494A (en) | 1997-10-15 | 2000-10-31 | Health Informatics Tools | Method and apparatus for an integrated clinical tele-informatics system |
| FI107080B (en) | 1997-10-27 | 2001-05-31 | Nokia Mobile Phones Ltd | measuring device |
| US6123819A (en) | 1997-11-12 | 2000-09-26 | Protiveris, Inc. | Nanoelectrode arrays |
| WO1999045354A2 (en) | 1998-03-02 | 1999-09-10 | Biosensing Technologies Ltd. | Luminescent microbe assay |
| US6117073A (en) | 1998-03-02 | 2000-09-12 | Jones; Scott J. | Integrated emergency medical transportation database system |
| US6421650B1 (en) | 1998-03-04 | 2002-07-16 | Goetech Llc | Medication monitoring system and apparatus |
| DE19809719A1 (en) | 1998-03-06 | 1999-09-09 | Roehm Gmbh | Aqueous dispersion for binder and coating for medicine |
| US6318970B1 (en) | 1998-03-12 | 2001-11-20 | Micralyne Inc. | Fluidic devices |
| US20010022758A1 (en) | 1998-04-07 | 2001-09-20 | Michael Haber | Pill storage, dispensing and notification device |
| IL139307A0 (en) | 1998-05-19 | 2001-11-25 | Res Dev Foundation | Triterpene compositions and methods for use thereof |
| US6219587B1 (en) | 1998-05-27 | 2001-04-17 | Nextrx Corporation | Automated pharmaceutical management and dispensing system |
| US6287595B1 (en) | 1998-06-10 | 2001-09-11 | Delsys Pharmaceuticals Corporation | Biomedical assay device |
| US6128534A (en) | 1998-06-16 | 2000-10-03 | Pacesetter, Inc. | Implantable cardiac stimulation device and method for varying pacing parameters to mimic circadian cycles |
| US6946144B1 (en) | 1998-07-08 | 2005-09-20 | Oryxe | Transdermal delivery system |
| US6780582B1 (en) | 1998-07-14 | 2004-08-24 | Zyomyx, Inc. | Arrays of protein-capture agents and methods of use thereof |
| US6397190B1 (en) | 1998-07-22 | 2002-05-28 | Gerald E. Goetz | Veterinary medication monitoring system and apparatus |
| US6314405B1 (en) | 1998-07-24 | 2001-11-06 | Donna L. Jung Richardson | Medical log apparatus and method |
| US6482306B1 (en) | 1998-09-22 | 2002-11-19 | University Of Washington | Meso- and microfluidic continuous flow and stopped flow electroösmotic mixer |
| US7135616B2 (en) | 2001-04-18 | 2006-11-14 | Mendel Biotechnology, Inc. | Biochemistry-related polynucleotides and polypeptides in plants |
| JP4178617B2 (en) | 1998-10-14 | 2008-11-12 | 松下電器産業株式会社 | Optical transmission system, optical transmitter, and optical transmission method |
| US6143314A (en) | 1998-10-28 | 2000-11-07 | Atrix Laboratories, Inc. | Controlled release liquid delivery compositions with low initial drug burst |
| US6565874B1 (en) | 1998-10-28 | 2003-05-20 | Atrix Laboratories | Polymeric delivery formulations of leuprolide with improved efficacy |
| ES2264278T3 (en) | 1998-11-23 | 2006-12-16 | Proteome Sciences, Inc. | METHODS AND COMPOSITIONS FOR TREATMENT. |
| US6161095A (en) | 1998-12-16 | 2000-12-12 | Health Hero Network, Inc. | Treatment regimen compliance and efficacy with feedback |
| US6451286B1 (en) | 1998-12-21 | 2002-09-17 | Generex Pharmaceuticals Incorporated | Pharmaceutical compositions for buccal and pulmonary administration comprising an alkali metal alkyl sulfate and at least three micelle-forming compounds |
| TW496775B (en) | 1999-03-15 | 2002-08-01 | Aviva Bioscience Corp | Individually addressable micro-electromagnetic unit array chips |
| CN1181337C (en) | 2000-08-08 | 2004-12-22 | 清华大学 | Method for manipulating solid molecules in microfluidic system and related kits |
| AU4226900A (en) | 1999-04-08 | 2000-10-23 | Joseph L. Chan | Apparatus for fast preparation and analysis of nucleic acids |
| US20020065682A1 (en) | 1999-05-18 | 2002-05-30 | David M. Goldenberg | Virtual doctor interactive cybernet system |
| US20060097516A1 (en) | 1999-05-29 | 2006-05-11 | Nancy Kozlowski | Medication record system and method |
| CA2375734A1 (en) | 1999-06-03 | 2000-12-14 | Knoll Gmbh | Benzothiazinone and benzoxazinone compounds |
| US6878540B2 (en) | 1999-06-25 | 2005-04-12 | Cepheid | Device for lysing cells, spores, or microorganisms |
| US6692916B2 (en) | 1999-06-28 | 2004-02-17 | Source Precision Medicine, Inc. | Systems and methods for characterizing a biological condition or agent using precision gene expression profiles |
| US6569630B1 (en) | 1999-07-02 | 2003-05-27 | Conceptual Mindworks, Inc. | Methods and compositions for aptamers against anthrax |
| US6955873B1 (en) | 2000-08-04 | 2005-10-18 | Kenneth Blum | Diagnosis and treatment system for reward deficiency syndrome (RDS) and related behaviors |
| US6372895B1 (en) | 2000-07-07 | 2002-04-16 | 3M Innovative Properties Company | Fluorogenic compounds |
| US6827260B2 (en) | 1999-08-09 | 2004-12-07 | First Data Corporation | Systems and methods for utilizing a point-of-sale system |
| US6623945B1 (en) | 1999-09-16 | 2003-09-23 | Motorola, Inc. | System and method for microwave cell lysing of small samples |
| US7006893B2 (en) | 1999-09-22 | 2006-02-28 | Telepharmacy Solutions, Inc. | Systems for dispensing medical products |
| US6564121B1 (en) | 1999-09-22 | 2003-05-13 | Telepharmacy Solutions, Inc. | Systems and methods for drug dispensing |
| CA2387780C (en) | 1999-10-15 | 2011-10-11 | W. Jean Dodds | Animal health diagnosis |
| JP2001127649A (en) | 1999-10-29 | 2001-05-11 | Mitsubishi Electric Corp | Communication device and communication method |
| US20040078236A1 (en) | 1999-10-30 | 2004-04-22 | Medtamic Holdings | Storage and access of aggregate patient data for analysis |
| US6671818B1 (en) | 1999-11-22 | 2003-12-30 | Accenture Llp | Problem isolation through translating and filtering events into a standard object format in a network based supply chain |
| US7136820B1 (en) | 1999-11-22 | 2006-11-14 | Advanced Medical Instruments | Method/process of determining a personal dietary supplement profile and recommending dietary supplements for an individual |
| US7045145B1 (en) | 1999-11-24 | 2006-05-16 | Agile Therapeutics, Inc. | Transdermal contraceptive delivery system and process |
| US6790198B1 (en) | 1999-12-01 | 2004-09-14 | B-Braun Medical, Inc. | Patient medication IV delivery pump with wireless communication to a hospital information management system |
| US7645258B2 (en) | 1999-12-01 | 2010-01-12 | B. Braun Medical, Inc. | Patient medication IV delivery pump with wireless communication to a hospital information management system |
| US6408884B1 (en) | 1999-12-15 | 2002-06-25 | University Of Washington | Magnetically actuated fluid handling devices for microfluidic applications |
| AU2277101A (en) | 1999-12-20 | 2001-07-03 | Schering Corporation | Stable extended release oral dosage composition |
| CA2394942A1 (en) | 1999-12-20 | 2001-06-28 | Stephen J. Fonash | Deposited thin films and their use in detection, attachment, and bio-medical applications |
| US20010037220A1 (en) | 1999-12-21 | 2001-11-01 | Merry Randy L. | Integrated software system for implantable medical device installation and management |
| US6980958B1 (en) | 2000-01-11 | 2005-12-27 | Zycare, Inc. | Apparatus and methods for monitoring and modifying anticoagulation therapy of remotely located patients |
| US6627223B2 (en) | 2000-02-11 | 2003-09-30 | Eurand Pharmaceuticals Ltd. | Timed pulsatile drug delivery systems |
| US6576267B2 (en) | 2000-02-23 | 2003-06-10 | Bioselect Innovations, Inc. | Composition and method for treating the effects of diseases and maladies |
| US6787164B2 (en) | 2000-02-23 | 2004-09-07 | Bioselect Innovations, Inc. | Composition and method for treating the effects of diseases and maladies |
| US6759062B2 (en) | 2000-02-23 | 2004-07-06 | Bioselect Innovations, Inc. | Composition and method for treating the effects of diseases and maladies |
| US6793942B2 (en) | 2000-02-23 | 2004-09-21 | Bioselect Innovations, Inc. | Composition and method for treating the effects of diseases and maladies |
| JP2003524193A (en) | 2000-02-23 | 2003-08-12 | ザイオミックス インコーポレイテッド | Chip with sample surface positioned high |
| US6383136B1 (en) | 2000-03-06 | 2002-05-07 | Charlyn Jordan | Health analysis and forecast of abnormal conditions |
| AU5121801A (en) | 2000-03-31 | 2001-10-15 | Micronics Inc | Protein crystallization in microfluidic structures |
| WO2001079529A1 (en) | 2000-04-17 | 2001-10-25 | Purdue Research Foundation | Biosensor and related method |
| US7236595B1 (en) | 2000-04-18 | 2007-06-26 | Litton Systems, Inc. | Integrated optics encryption device |
| AU6154101A (en) | 2000-05-11 | 2001-11-20 | Caliper Techn Corp | Microfluidic devices and methods to regulate hydrodynamic and electrical resistance utilizing bulk viscosity enhancers |
| US20020091991A1 (en) | 2000-05-11 | 2002-07-11 | Castro Juan Carlos | Unified real-time microprocessor computer |
| US6227371B1 (en) | 2000-05-12 | 2001-05-08 | Julie Song | Medical container and system |
| WO2001087486A2 (en) | 2000-05-15 | 2001-11-22 | Tecan Trading Ag | Microfluidics devices and methods for performing cell based assays |
| US6616606B1 (en) | 2000-05-19 | 2003-09-09 | Welch Allyn Protocol, Inc. | Patient monitoring system |
| US7257327B2 (en) | 2000-06-01 | 2007-08-14 | Raytheon Company | Wireless communication system with high efficiency/high power optical source |
| US7351376B1 (en) | 2000-06-05 | 2008-04-01 | California Institute Of Technology | Integrated active flux microfluidic devices and methods |
| US6893547B2 (en) | 2000-06-14 | 2005-05-17 | Board Of Regents, The University Of Texas System | Apparatus and method for fluid injection |
| AU2001273486A1 (en) | 2000-07-17 | 2002-01-30 | Labnetics, Inc. | Method and apparatus for the processing of remotely collected electronic information characterizing properties of biological entities |
| US7280975B1 (en) | 2000-07-24 | 2007-10-09 | Donner Irah H | System and method for determining and/or transmitting and/or establishing communication with a mobile device user for providing, for example, concessions, tournaments, competitions, matching, reallocating, upgrading, selling tickets, other event admittance means, goods and/or services |
| WO2002015438A1 (en) | 2000-08-15 | 2002-02-21 | Lockheed Martin Corporation | Infrared data communication system |
| US6979471B1 (en) | 2000-09-05 | 2005-12-27 | Council Of Scientific And Industrial Research | Composition comprising pharmaceutical/nutraceutical agent and a bio-enhancer obtained from Glycyrrhiza glabra |
| US7045159B1 (en) | 2000-09-19 | 2006-05-16 | Rutgers, The State University Of New Jersey | Antiviral substances from plant cuticular and epiciticular material |
| US7056951B2 (en) | 2000-09-26 | 2006-06-06 | Mutual Pharmaceutical Co., Inc. | Stable solid dosage forms of amino acids and processes for producing same |
| ES2288899T3 (en) | 2000-10-04 | 2008-02-01 | Astellas Pharma Inc. | USE OF A VASOPRESIN ANTAGONIST AS CONIVAPT IN THE MANUFACTURE OF A MEDICINAL PRODUCT FOR THE TREATMENT OF PULMONARY HYPERTENSION. |
| US20020055856A1 (en) | 2000-10-20 | 2002-05-09 | Adams William M. | Adjudicating pharmaceutical drug sample distribution system and method |
| US7041317B2 (en) | 2000-10-23 | 2006-05-09 | Ono Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. | Sustained-release preparation containing 5-acetyl-4,6-dimethyl-2[2-[4-(2-methoxyphenyl) piperazinyl]ethylamino] pyrimidine trihydrochloride as active ingredient |
| US7273629B2 (en) | 2000-11-28 | 2007-09-25 | Cryovac, Inc. | Meat package with reduced leaker rates |
| JP2002185559A (en) | 2000-12-14 | 2002-06-28 | Pioneer Electronic Corp | Radio transmitting and receiving device |
| US6582987B2 (en) | 2000-12-30 | 2003-06-24 | Electronics And Telecommunications Research Institute | Method of fabricating microchannel array structure embedded in silicon substrate |
| US6958216B2 (en) | 2001-01-10 | 2005-10-25 | The Trustees Of Boston College | DNA-bridged carbon nanotube arrays |
| JP2002208923A (en) | 2001-01-11 | 2002-07-26 | Oki Electric Ind Co Ltd | Encrypting transmission system of periodic signal |
| US7070682B2 (en) | 2001-01-16 | 2006-07-04 | Cheng Lee | Microfluidic apparatus for performing gel protein extractions and methods for using the apparatus |
| US6878755B2 (en) | 2001-01-22 | 2005-04-12 | Microgen Systems, Inc. | Automated microfabrication-based biodetector |
| US20020192310A1 (en) | 2001-02-02 | 2002-12-19 | Bland Jeffrey S. | Medical composition for managing hormone balance |
| JP4356250B2 (en) | 2001-02-13 | 2009-11-04 | 日本電気株式会社 | Wireless receiver |
| US20020115639A1 (en) | 2001-02-16 | 2002-08-22 | Weiyu Fan | Glucosamine and method of making glucosamine from microbial blomass |
| DE60206602T3 (en) | 2001-02-28 | 2010-06-02 | DataLase Ltd., Widnes | LASER MARKING |
| US20030207270A1 (en) | 2001-03-09 | 2003-11-06 | Kung Patrick C. | Phytomics: a genomic-based approach to herbal compositions |
| US20020143434A1 (en) | 2001-03-29 | 2002-10-03 | John Greeven | Method and apparatus for delivering and refilling pharmaceuticals |
| US6742661B1 (en) | 2001-04-03 | 2004-06-01 | Micronics, Inc. | Well-plate microfluidics |
| US7359518B2 (en)* | 2001-04-05 | 2008-04-15 | Intel Corporation | Distribution of secured information |
| AU2002307152A1 (en) | 2001-04-06 | 2002-10-21 | California Institute Of Technology | Nucleic acid amplification utilizing microfluidic devices |
| JP3822454B2 (en) | 2001-04-10 | 2006-09-20 | 独立行政法人科学技術振興機構 | Method for identifying phosphorylated protein |
| US20020156651A1 (en) | 2001-04-18 | 2002-10-24 | Florio Vito V. | Prescription system for unregulated therapeutic substances |
| US20020177763A1 (en) | 2001-05-22 | 2002-11-28 | Burns David W. | Integrated lancets and methods |
| US20070087048A1 (en) | 2001-05-31 | 2007-04-19 | Abrams Andrew L | Oral dosage combination pharmaceutical packaging |
| US7041068B2 (en) | 2001-06-12 | 2006-05-09 | Pelikan Technologies, Inc. | Sampling module device and method |
| US7120928B2 (en) | 2001-06-15 | 2006-10-10 | Dinesh Sheth | Secure selective sharing of account information on an internet information aggregation system |
| US20020194226A1 (en) | 2001-06-15 | 2002-12-19 | Dinesh Sheth | Internet information aggregation system using programmatic data extraction |
| WO2003003267A1 (en) | 2001-06-29 | 2003-01-09 | Nutrition Act.Co., Ltd. | Nutrition demand calculating apparatus, nutrition supplementary ingredient proposing apparatus, nutrition supplementary ingredient blending apparatus, and nutrition supplementary ingredient blending system |
| US20030092039A1 (en) | 2001-08-01 | 2003-05-15 | Third Wave Technologies, Inc. | Screening nutraceuticals |
| US7260155B2 (en) | 2001-08-17 | 2007-08-21 | Synopsys, Inc. | Method and apparatus for encoding and decoding digital communications data |
| WO2003019185A1 (en) | 2001-08-31 | 2003-03-06 | Docusys, Inc. | System and method for displaying drug information |
| US6881425B2 (en) | 2001-08-31 | 2005-04-19 | Council Of Scientific And Industrial Research | Custom made herbal health promotive formulation for females/expectant mothers |
| US20030068655A1 (en) | 2001-09-12 | 2003-04-10 | Protiveris, Inc. | Microcantilever apparatus and methods for detection of enzymes |
| US20030069757A1 (en) | 2001-10-05 | 2003-04-10 | Sanford Greenberg | Systems and methods for designing and delivering a nutritional supplement regime |
| US7124791B2 (en) | 2001-10-11 | 2006-10-24 | Kirby Lester, Llc | Method and system for high-speed tablet counting and dispensing |
| US6966880B2 (en) | 2001-10-16 | 2005-11-22 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Universal diagnostic platform |
| US6821730B2 (en) | 2001-11-09 | 2004-11-23 | Intel Corporation | Carbon nanotube molecular labels |
| US6926864B2 (en) | 2001-11-09 | 2005-08-09 | Protiveris Inc | Microfluidics apparatus and methods for use thereof |
| JP4355210B2 (en) | 2001-11-30 | 2009-10-28 | フルイディグム コーポレイション | Microfluidic device and method of using microfluidic device |
| US6847861B2 (en) | 2001-11-30 | 2005-01-25 | Mckesson Automation, Inc. | Carousel product for use in integrated restocking and dispensing system |
| US20050101841A9 (en) | 2001-12-04 | 2005-05-12 | Kimberly-Clark Worldwide, Inc. | Healthcare networks with biosensors |
| US20030155012A1 (en) | 2001-12-04 | 2003-08-21 | Dave Smith | Rotary valve with compliant lining |
| US20050118202A1 (en) | 2001-12-19 | 2005-06-02 | Akio Yamashita | Solid compositions containing compounds unstable to oxygen and method for stabilization thereof |
| US20030119057A1 (en) | 2001-12-20 | 2003-06-26 | Board Of Regents | Forming and modifying dielectrically-engineered microparticles |
| US7877273B2 (en) | 2002-01-08 | 2011-01-25 | Fredric David Abramson | System and method for evaluating and providing nutrigenomic data, information and advice |
| US6985870B2 (en) | 2002-01-11 | 2006-01-10 | Baxter International Inc. | Medication delivery system |
| US6877892B2 (en) | 2002-01-11 | 2005-04-12 | Nanostream, Inc. | Multi-stream microfluidic aperture mixers |
| US8489427B2 (en) | 2002-01-29 | 2013-07-16 | Baxter International Inc. | Wireless medical data communication system and method |
| AU2003216175A1 (en) | 2002-02-04 | 2003-09-02 | Colorado School Of Mines | Laminar flow-based separations of colloidal and cellular particles |
| DE60303122T9 (en) | 2002-02-13 | 2007-02-22 | Nanostream, Inc., Pasadena | MICROFLUIDIC SEPARATION COLLONS AND THEIR MANUFACTURING PROCESS |
| US20040084895A1 (en)* | 2002-10-19 | 2004-05-06 | Harvey Blum | System for reducing health-insurance costs including fraud by providing medical histories |
| WO2003071391A2 (en) | 2002-02-19 | 2003-08-28 | Lexicor Medical Technology, Inc. | Systems and methods for managing biological data and providing data interpretation tools |
| US20030156724A1 (en) | 2002-02-21 | 2003-08-21 | Medivox Rx Technologies, Inc. | Pill, capsule, or medicine container audio instruction systems and methods for providing audio instructions with pill, capsule, or medicine containers |
| US20030171950A1 (en) | 2002-03-05 | 2003-09-11 | Conor Kilgannon | Inventory management method and system for prescribed goods and services |
| US7110646B2 (en) | 2002-03-08 | 2006-09-19 | Lucent Technologies Inc. | Tunable microfluidic optical fiber devices and systems |
| JP2005538937A (en) | 2002-03-08 | 2005-12-22 | シェーリング−プラウ， リミテッド | New florfenicol antibiotics |
| CA2479861A1 (en) | 2002-03-20 | 2003-10-02 | Purdue Research Foundation | Microscale sensor element and related device and method of manufacture |
| JP3921402B2 (en) | 2002-03-20 | 2007-05-30 | 株式会社日立コミュニケーションテクノロジー | Wireless receiver |
| AU2003223420A1 (en) | 2002-04-01 | 2003-10-20 | Healthetech, Inc. | System and method of determining an individualized drug administration dosage |
| US20030191670A1 (en) | 2002-04-08 | 2003-10-09 | Hatcher Edwin Bruce | Medication compatibility profile data system |
| US20030193185A1 (en) | 2002-04-15 | 2003-10-16 | Valley Jeffrey M. | Prescription pharmaceutical labeling system |
| US7112444B2 (en) | 2002-04-24 | 2006-09-26 | Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation | Method of performing gradient-based assays in a microfluidic device |
| US20030204412A1 (en) | 2002-04-29 | 2003-10-30 | John Brier | Apparatus and method for providing on-line customized nutrition, fitness, and lifestyle plans based upon a user profile and goals |
| US7074311B1 (en) | 2002-05-08 | 2006-07-11 | Sru Biosystems Inc. | Biosensor electrophoresis |
| US8025314B2 (en) | 2002-05-15 | 2011-09-27 | Target Brands, Inc. | Medication packaging and labeling system |
| US20030220848A1 (en) | 2002-05-22 | 2003-11-27 | Michigan Medical & Dental | Method and apparatus for accessing and tracking customer information and ordering product |
| US7260402B1 (en) | 2002-06-03 | 2007-08-21 | Oa Systems, Inc. | Apparatus for and method of creating and transmitting a prescription to a drug dispensing location |
| US7118676B2 (en)* | 2003-09-04 | 2006-10-10 | Arryx, Inc. | Multiple laminar flow-based particle and cellular separation with laser steering |
| EP1529211A1 (en) | 2002-08-08 | 2005-05-11 | Nanostream, Inc. | Systems and methods for high-throughput microfluidic sample analysis |
| AU2003261446A1 (en) | 2002-08-09 | 2004-02-25 | Mckesson Automation Systems, Inc. | Controller for dispensing products |
| US7759395B2 (en) | 2002-08-12 | 2010-07-20 | The Brigham And Women's Hospital, Inc. | Use of docosatrienes, resolvins and their stable analogs in the treatment of airway diseases and asthma |
| US7376585B2 (en) | 2002-09-04 | 2008-05-20 | Sap Aktiengesellschaft | Real-time sales information architecture |
| US7216343B2 (en) | 2002-09-20 | 2007-05-08 | International Business Machines Corporation | Method and apparatus for automatic updating and testing of software |
| US20040064342A1 (en) | 2002-09-30 | 2004-04-01 | Browne David W. | Health care protocols |
| US20040075272A1 (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2004-04-22 | Kaufman Stacy R. | Verification of prescription information with double side extended tab label and method of forming same |
| NZ540045A (en) | 2002-10-16 | 2008-04-30 | Frank D Marcum | Treatment for traumatic synovitis and damaged articular cartilage with chondroitin sulfate, N-acetyl D-glucosamine and hyaluronan |
| JP2006502814A (en) | 2002-10-18 | 2006-01-26 | マッケソン オートメーション システムズ，インコーポレイテッド | Drug substitution / confirmation / report automation system |
| US20050271596A1 (en) | 2002-10-25 | 2005-12-08 | Foamix Ltd. | Vasoactive kit and composition and uses thereof |
| WO2004040717A2 (en) | 2002-10-28 | 2004-05-13 | University Of Washington | Wavelength tunable surface plasmon resonance sensor |
| US20040081023A1 (en) | 2002-10-29 | 2004-04-29 | Ho Wai Kwan | Pill container |
| US20040086872A1 (en) | 2002-10-31 | 2004-05-06 | Childers Winthrop D. | Microfluidic system for analysis of nucleic acids |
| US7022288B1 (en) | 2002-11-13 | 2006-04-04 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Secretary Of The Navy | Chemical detection sensor system |
| US20040143403A1 (en) | 2002-11-14 | 2004-07-22 | Brandon Richard Bruce | Status determination |
| US7260764B2 (en) | 2002-11-26 | 2007-08-21 | Qualcomm Incorporated | Multi-channel transmission and reception with block coding in a communication system |
| US20040107022A1 (en) | 2002-12-02 | 2004-06-03 | Gomez Michael R. | Method and apparatus for automatic capture of label information contained in a printer command file and for automatic supply of this information to a tablet dispensing/counting system |
| US20040158507A1 (en) | 2002-12-06 | 2004-08-12 | Meek Robert B. | Inventory management and replenishment system |
| US20040111298A1 (en) | 2002-12-10 | 2004-06-10 | Roy Schoenberg | Method of and system for integrating health information into a patient's record |
| US20040122707A1 (en) | 2002-12-18 | 2004-06-24 | Sabol John M. | Patient-driven medical data processing system and method |
| US7041840B2 (en) | 2002-12-18 | 2006-05-09 | Alberta Research Council Inc. | Antioxidant triacylglycerols and lipid compositions |
| BR0317548A (en) | 2002-12-19 | 2005-11-22 | Pfizer | Indazole compounds and pharmaceutical compositions for protein kinase inhibition and methods for their use |
| AU2003303594A1 (en) | 2002-12-30 | 2004-07-29 | The Regents Of The University Of California | Methods and apparatus for pathogen detection and analysis |
| HRP20140379A2 (en) | 2003-01-14 | 2014-07-18 | Gilead Sciences, Inc. | Compositions and methods for combination antiviral therapy |
| US20040220498A1 (en) | 2003-01-24 | 2004-11-04 | Guann-Pyng Li | Micro medical-lab-on-a-chip in a lollipop as a drug delivery device and/or a health monitoring device |
| US7046357B2 (en) | 2003-01-30 | 2006-05-16 | Ciphergen Biosystems, Inc. | Apparatus for microfluidic processing and reading of biochip arrays |
| US7338637B2 (en) | 2003-01-31 | 2008-03-04 | Hewlett-Packard Development Company, L.P. | Microfluidic device with thin-film electronic devices |
| US7379167B2 (en) | 2003-02-11 | 2008-05-27 | International Technidyne Corporation | Hemoglobin test strip and analysis system |
| EP2397128A1 (en) | 2003-02-14 | 2011-12-21 | Children's Hospital & Research Center at Oakland | Use of L-arginine optionally combined with magnesium for the treatment of sickle cell disease and/or pulmonary hypertension |
| AU2004230485B2 (en) | 2003-04-10 | 2009-01-22 | Novartis Vaccines And Diagnostics, Inc. | The severe acute respiratory syndrome coronavirus |
| US20040243441A1 (en) | 2003-04-15 | 2004-12-02 | Siegfried Bocionek | Personal and healthcare data financial management system |
| US20040215486A1 (en) | 2003-04-23 | 2004-10-28 | Medi-Dose, Inc. | Prescription labeling system and method of use |
| JP3906179B2 (en) | 2003-04-25 | 2007-04-18 | 株式会社東芝 | Radio receiver and radio signal processing method |
| US20040225203A1 (en) | 2003-05-06 | 2004-11-11 | Jemison Mae C. | Real-time and simultaneous monitoring of multiple parameters from multiple living beings |
| US7150813B2 (en) | 2003-06-12 | 2006-12-19 | Palo Alto Research Center Incorporated | Isoelectric focusing (IEF) of proteins with sequential and oppositely directed traveling waves in gel electrophoresis |
| US6763705B1 (en) | 2003-06-16 | 2004-07-20 | Ut-Battelle, Llc | High throughput microcantilever detector |
| KR100973813B1 (en)* | 2003-08-06 | 2010-08-03 | 삼성전자주식회사 | Liquid Crystal Display and Image Signal Correction Method |
| EP1682063A1 (en) | 2003-10-21 | 2006-07-26 | Ambo Innovation LLC | Digestible and volume adjustable multi medication delivery device |
| SE0302815D0 (en) | 2003-10-24 | 2003-10-24 | Mathcore Engineering Ab | Computer system for determining a drug dosage |
| US20060111944A1 (en) | 2003-10-31 | 2006-05-25 | Sirmans James R Jr | System and method for encouraging performance of health-promoting measures |
| US20050102159A1 (en) | 2003-11-06 | 2005-05-12 | Mondshine Robert B. | Computer based risk level monitor and patient compliance method and system |
| US20050110268A1 (en) | 2003-11-21 | 2005-05-26 | Schone Olga M. | Personalized medication card |
| WO2005062849A2 (en) | 2003-12-19 | 2005-07-14 | Elixir Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Lifespan management |
| US20050147667A1 (en) | 2004-01-06 | 2005-07-07 | Rines Robert H. | Method of ensuring patient identification of prescribed drug and quantity for prescribed purpose and improved self-identifying drug appearance |
| US20050192487A1 (en) | 2004-02-27 | 2005-09-01 | Cosentino Louis C. | System for collection, manipulation, and analysis of data from remote health care devices |
| US20050260679A1 (en) | 2004-03-19 | 2005-11-24 | Sirid-Aimee Kellerman | Reducing the risk of human anti-human antibodies through V gene manipulation |
| US7543718B2 (en) | 2004-03-22 | 2009-06-09 | Morris Simon | System and method for storing and dispensing medication |
| US20050216390A1 (en) | 2004-03-23 | 2005-09-29 | Snider Kimberly A | System and method of managing a position in financial stock investments |
| US20050216313A1 (en) | 2004-03-26 | 2005-09-29 | Ecapable, Inc. | Method, device, and systems to facilitate identity management and bidirectional data flow within a patient electronic record keeping system |
| US8019471B2 (en) | 2004-04-24 | 2011-09-13 | Inrange Systems, Inc. | Integrated, non-sequential, remote medication management and compliance system |
| US7351739B2 (en) | 2004-04-30 | 2008-04-01 | Wellgen, Inc. | Bioactive compounds and methods of uses thereof |
| US7502666B2 (en) | 2004-05-14 | 2009-03-10 | Mts Medication Technologies, Inc. | Systems and methods for storing and dispensing medication |
| US20050285746A1 (en) | 2004-06-25 | 2005-12-29 | Sengupta Uttam K | Radio frequency identification based system to track consumption of medication |
| DE102004040785B4 (en) | 2004-08-23 | 2006-09-21 | Kist-Europe Forschungsgesellschaft Mbh | Microfluidic system for the isolation of biological particles using immunomagnetic separation |
| JP2008513022A (en) | 2004-09-15 | 2008-05-01 | マイクロチップ バイオテクノロジーズ， インコーポレイテッド | Microfluidic device |
| US20060099310A1 (en) | 2004-11-10 | 2006-05-11 | Ralph Koekkoek | Personalized nutritional supplement |
| US20060129324A1 (en) | 2004-12-15 | 2006-06-15 | Biogenesys, Inc. | Use of quantitative EEG (QEEG) alone and/or other imaging technology and/or in combination with genomics and/or proteomics and/or biochemical analysis and/or other diagnostic modalities, and CART and/or AI and/or statistical and/or other mathematical analysis methods for improved medical and other diagnosis, psychiatric and other disease treatment, and also for veracity verification and/or lie detection applications. |
| JP4548316B2 (en) | 2005-02-10 | 2010-09-22 | セイコーエプソン株式会社 | Color ID card, card creation system, card creation method, program, and storage medium |
| US20060223178A1 (en) | 2005-04-05 | 2006-10-05 | Tom Barber | Devices and methods for magnetic enrichment of cells and other particles |
| US8968806B2 (en) | 2005-04-26 | 2015-03-03 | Sean Joseph Delaney | Method and system for creating and using a supplement to balance animal diets |
| NZ603604A (en) | 2005-05-09 | 2014-02-28 | Theranos Inc | Point-of-care fluidic systems and uses thereof |
| JP4596976B2 (en) | 2005-05-20 | 2010-12-15 | 株式会社 日立ディスプレイズ | Organic light emitting display |
| US20060280307A1 (en) | 2005-06-10 | 2006-12-14 | Tsuyoshi Ikushima | Data transmission apparatus and data reception apparatus |
| WO2007061838A2 (en) | 2005-11-17 | 2007-05-31 | Searete Llc | Assistance related to health |
| US20070136092A1 (en) | 2005-11-30 | 2007-06-14 | Searete Llc, A Limited Liability Corporation Of The State Of Delaware | Computational and/or control systems related to individualized pharmaceutical and nutraceutical selection and packaging |
| US8478605B2 (en) | 2006-07-17 | 2013-07-02 | Walgreen Co. | Appropriateness of a medication therapy regimen |
- 2007
- 2007-09-11USUS11/900,649patent/US20080210748A1/ennot_activeAbandoned
- 2007-09-11USUS11/900,637patent/US20080103746A1/ennot_activeAbandoned
- 2007-09-11USUS11/900,660patent/US8068991B2/enactiveActive
- 2007-09-18WOPCT/US2007/020272patent/WO2008036300A2/enactiveApplication Filing
- 2007-09-18WOPCT/US2007/020305patent/WO2008036317A2/enactiveApplication Filing
- 2007-09-18WOPCT/US2007/020283patent/WO2008036306A2/enactiveApplication Filing
Patent Citations (103)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US4009078A (en)* | 1975-01-24 | 1977-02-22 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Administrator Of The National Aeronautics And Space Administration | Detecting the presence of microorganisms |
| US4081356A (en)* | 1976-09-24 | 1978-03-28 | The United States Of America As Represented By The Department Of Health, Education And Welfare | Fecalator, an apparatus and method for concentration of parasite eggs and larvae |
| US4257041A (en)* | 1978-06-19 | 1981-03-17 | Izon Corporation | Electro optical display device |
| US4436378A (en)* | 1980-12-31 | 1984-03-13 | International Business Machines Corporation | Passive display module and system |
| US4567185A (en)* | 1983-05-13 | 1986-01-28 | Key Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Endorphin blockage |
| US4729636A (en)* | 1984-07-12 | 1988-03-08 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Passive display device having movable electrodes and method of manufacturing |
| US5279294A (en)* | 1985-04-08 | 1994-01-18 | Cascade Medical, Inc. | Medical diagnostic system |
| USH201H (en)* | 1985-08-23 | 1987-01-06 | United States Of America | Biosensors from membrane proteins reconstituted in polymerized lipid bilayers |
| US4807967A (en)* | 1986-01-09 | 1989-02-28 | U.S. Philips Corporation | Passive display device |
| US5093268A (en)* | 1988-04-28 | 1992-03-03 | Igen, Inc. | Apparatus for conducting a plurality of simultaneous measurements of electrochemiluminescent phenomena |
| US5284656A (en)* | 1991-03-15 | 1994-02-08 | Amgen Inc. | Pulmonary administration of granulocyte colony stimulating factor |
| US5719123A (en)* | 1991-03-18 | 1998-02-17 | Sandoz Ltd. | Ciclosporin form for pulmonary administration |
| US5176285A (en)* | 1991-08-26 | 1993-01-05 | Shaw Thomas J | Pill dispensing apparatus |
| US5495961A (en)* | 1992-03-30 | 1996-03-05 | Maestre; Federico A. | Portable programmable medication alarm device and method and apparatus for programming and using the same |
| US6169068B1 (en)* | 1993-02-12 | 2001-01-02 | Avant Immunotherpeutics, Inc. | Pulmonary administration of soluble complement receptor-1 (sCR1) and its derivatives |
| US5542420A (en)* | 1993-04-30 | 1996-08-06 | Goldman; Arnold J. | Personalized method and system for storage, communication, analysis, and processing of health-related data |
| US5387267A (en)* | 1993-08-25 | 1995-02-07 | Modular Energy Corporation | Process and apparatus for treating heterogeneous waste to provide a homogeneous fuel |
| US5490962A (en)* | 1993-10-18 | 1996-02-13 | Massachusetts Institute Of Technology | Preparation of medical devices by solid free-form fabrication methods |
| US5704350A (en)* | 1994-03-25 | 1998-01-06 | Nutritec Corporation | Nutritional microcomputer and method |
| US6037167A (en)* | 1994-10-03 | 2000-03-14 | Ericomp | Magnetic polynucleotide separation and analysis |
| US7483839B2 (en)* | 1994-10-28 | 2009-01-27 | Cybear, L.L.C. | Computerized prescription system for gathering and presenting information relating to pharmaceuticals |
| US6035230A (en)* | 1995-09-13 | 2000-03-07 | Medison Co., Ltd | Real-time biological signal monitoring system using radio communication network |
| US20030005445A1 (en)* | 1995-10-02 | 2003-01-02 | Schein Steven M. | Systems and methods for linking television viewers with advertisers and broadcasters |
| US20050065645A1 (en)* | 1995-10-18 | 2005-03-24 | Telepharmacy Solutions, Incorporated | Method for controlling a drug dispensing system |
| US20030055531A1 (en)* | 1995-10-18 | 2003-03-20 | Telepharmacy Solutions, Incorporated | Method for controlling a drug dispensing system |
| US6709869B2 (en)* | 1995-12-18 | 2004-03-23 | Tecan Trading Ag | Devices and methods for using centripetal acceleration to drive fluid movement in a microfluidics system |
| US5716852A (en)* | 1996-03-29 | 1998-02-10 | University Of Washington | Microfabricated diffusion-based chemical sensor |
| US5726404A (en)* | 1996-05-31 | 1998-03-10 | University Of Washington | Valveless liquid microswitch |
| US6695147B1 (en)* | 1996-06-14 | 2004-02-24 | University Of Washington | Absorption-enhanced differential extraction device |
| US6023916A (en)* | 1996-07-22 | 2000-02-15 | Dispill Inc. | Kit and process for the manufacture of a set of individual pill containers |
| US20030044832A1 (en)* | 1996-09-04 | 2003-03-06 | Scandinavian Micro Biodevices A/S | Microflow system for particle separation and analysis |
| US6021202A (en)* | 1996-12-20 | 2000-02-01 | Financial Services Technology Consortium | Method and system for processing electronic documents |
| US6529446B1 (en)* | 1996-12-20 | 2003-03-04 | Telaric L.L.C. | Interactive medication container |
| US5873369A (en)* | 1997-03-31 | 1999-02-23 | Chronoslim P.C.E. Ltd. | System for monitoring health conditions of an individual and a method thereof |
| US7193128B2 (en)* | 1997-06-03 | 2007-03-20 | Chromatin, Inc. | Methods for generating or increasing revenues from crops |
| US6335021B1 (en)* | 1997-06-18 | 2002-01-01 | Sigma-Tau Healthscience S.P.A. | Composition for controlling mood disorders in healthy individuals |
| US5882931A (en)* | 1997-07-14 | 1999-03-16 | Petersen; Roger | Method and apparatus for performing urinalysis in real time |
| US6024699A (en)* | 1998-03-13 | 2000-02-15 | Healthware Corporation | Systems, methods and computer program products for monitoring, diagnosing and treating medical conditions of remotely located patients |
| US6188988B1 (en)* | 1998-04-03 | 2001-02-13 | Triangle Pharmaceuticals, Inc. | Systems, methods and computer program products for guiding the selection of therapeutic treatment regimens |
| US6194900B1 (en)* | 1998-06-19 | 2001-02-27 | Agilent Technologies, Inc. | Integrated miniaturized device for processing and NMR detection of liquid phase samples |
| US6510430B1 (en)* | 1999-02-24 | 2003-01-21 | Acumins, Inc. | Diagnosis and interpretation methods and apparatus for a personal nutrition program |
| US7005447B2 (en)* | 1999-03-30 | 2006-02-28 | Hormos Nutraceutical Oy Ltd. | Food product comprising hydroxymatairesinol |
| US6849396B2 (en)* | 1999-04-20 | 2005-02-01 | Target Discovery, Inc. | Methods for conducting metabolic analyses |
| US20020019784A1 (en)* | 1999-05-12 | 2002-02-14 | Airclic, Inc. | Printed medium activated interactive communication |
| US20020032620A1 (en)* | 1999-09-24 | 2002-03-14 | Benz Patrick H. | Electronic network based controlled products selling and delivering system and method |
| US20020038392A1 (en)* | 1999-10-22 | 2002-03-28 | Carlos De La Huerga | Method and apparatus for controlling an infusion pump or the like |
| US7016752B1 (en)* | 1999-12-17 | 2006-03-21 | Rxperts, Inc. | Method of and system for labeling containers of prescribed medicine |
| US20020032583A1 (en)* | 1999-12-18 | 2002-03-14 | Joao Raymond Anthony | Apparatus and method for processing and/or for providing healthcare information and/or healthcare-related information |
| US6709676B2 (en)* | 1999-12-20 | 2004-03-23 | Schering Corporation | Extended release oral dosage composition |
| US7172897B2 (en)* | 2000-01-11 | 2007-02-06 | Clinical Micro Sensors, Inc. | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing |
| US20040053290A1 (en)* | 2000-01-11 | 2004-03-18 | Terbrueggen Robert Henry | Devices and methods for biochip multiplexing |
| US6523392B2 (en)* | 2000-01-25 | 2003-02-25 | Arizona Board Of Regents | Microcantilever sensor |
| US20030061123A1 (en)* | 2000-02-04 | 2003-03-27 | Mcmenimen James L. | Responsive manufacturing and inventory control |
| US20020004749A1 (en)* | 2000-02-09 | 2002-01-10 | Froseth Barrie R. | Customized food selection, ordering and distribution system and method |
| US6841544B2 (en)* | 2000-02-23 | 2005-01-11 | Bioselect Innovations, Inc. | Composition and method for treating the effects of diseases and maladies |
| US6852206B2 (en)* | 2000-04-13 | 2005-02-08 | Janusz Pawliszyn | Measurement of fluorescence using capillary isoelectric focusing |
| US20020032580A1 (en)* | 2000-04-27 | 2002-03-14 | Hopkins John W. | Method of directing patients to medical care |
| US20030036683A1 (en)* | 2000-05-01 | 2003-02-20 | Kehr Bruce A. | Method, system and computer program product for internet-enabled, patient monitoring system |
| US20020016719A1 (en)* | 2000-06-19 | 2002-02-07 | Nemeth Louis G. | Methods and systems for providing medical data to a third party in accordance with configurable distribution parameters |
| US20020033753A1 (en)* | 2000-06-28 | 2002-03-21 | Sally Imbo | System for prompting user activities |
| US20020019165A1 (en)* | 2000-08-02 | 2002-02-14 | Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha | Wire harness structure |
| US20020027164A1 (en)* | 2000-09-07 | 2002-03-07 | Mault James R. | Portable computing apparatus particularly useful in a weight management program |
| US20020032582A1 (en)* | 2000-09-14 | 2002-03-14 | Feeney Robert J. | System for medication dispensing and integrated data management |
| US20030028399A1 (en)* | 2000-09-25 | 2003-02-06 | Duane Davis | Method and system for providing interactive health care services |
| US6699193B2 (en)* | 2000-09-29 | 2004-03-02 | New Health Sciences, Inc. | Decision support systems and methods for assessing vascular health |
| US7197492B2 (en)* | 2000-11-02 | 2007-03-27 | Daniel Joseph Sullivan | Computerized risk management module for medical diagnosis |
| US20040039599A1 (en)* | 2001-04-11 | 2004-02-26 | Fralic Donald R. | Method of distributing cost savings to participants in a prescription drug distribution chain |
| US6838076B2 (en)* | 2001-05-21 | 2005-01-04 | Nektar Therapeutics | Pulmonary administration of chemically modified insulin |
| US20030019165A1 (en)* | 2001-05-25 | 2003-01-30 | Gallant Dennis J. | Patient care apparatus and method |
| US20030032868A1 (en)* | 2001-07-09 | 2003-02-13 | Henning Graskov | Method and system for controlling data information between two portable apparatuses |
| US7461006B2 (en)* | 2001-08-29 | 2008-12-02 | Victor Gogolak | Method and system for the analysis and association of patient-specific and population-based genomic data with drug safety adverse event data |
| US20050021413A1 (en)* | 2001-10-22 | 2005-01-27 | Lisa Berry | Interactive product selection system |
| US20040004523A1 (en)* | 2001-11-30 | 2004-01-08 | Humphries David E. | High performance hybrid magnetic structure for biotechnology applications |
| US20040033553A1 (en)* | 2002-05-23 | 2004-02-19 | Littarru Gian Paolo | Method to assay coenzyme Q10 in blood plasma or blood serum |
| US20040001874A1 (en)* | 2002-06-24 | 2004-01-01 | Vital Living, Inc. | Safe and effective nutritional supplement formulations and associated regimens adapted to prevent and/or treat targeted diseases or medical or health conditions, and related methods |
| US20040026447A1 (en)* | 2002-08-08 | 2004-02-12 | Jeffrey Badin | Any protein and energy powder supplement cold dispensing coin operated vending machine |
| US20040032330A1 (en)* | 2002-08-14 | 2004-02-19 | Ncr Corporation | Pharmacy transaction system and method |
| US20060028727A1 (en)* | 2002-08-20 | 2006-02-09 | Moon John A | Method and apparatus for drug product tracking using encoded optical identification elements |
| US20060015291A1 (en)* | 2002-10-18 | 2006-01-19 | Leland Stanford Junior University | Methods and systems for data analysis |
| US7490085B2 (en)* | 2002-12-18 | 2009-02-10 | Ge Medical Systems Global Technology Company, Llc | Computer-assisted data processing system and method incorporating automated learning |
| US20050014134A1 (en)* | 2003-03-06 | 2005-01-20 | West Jason Andrew Appleton | Viral identification by generation and detection of protein signatures |
| US20050062238A1 (en)* | 2003-03-28 | 2005-03-24 | Laird Broadfield | Point of care station |
| US20050038674A1 (en)* | 2003-04-15 | 2005-02-17 | Braig James R. | System and method for managing a chronic medical condition |
| US20050038558A1 (en)* | 2003-05-30 | 2005-02-17 | Keene Astrid I.-S. | System and method for labeling pharmaceutical prescriptions |
| US20050010416A1 (en)* | 2003-07-09 | 2005-01-13 | Gensym Corporation | System and method for self management of health using natural language interface |
| US20050013863A1 (en)* | 2003-07-18 | 2005-01-20 | Depomed, Inc., A Corporation Of The State Of California | Dual drug dosage forms with improved separation of drugs |
| US20050033606A1 (en)* | 2003-08-06 | 2005-02-10 | Miller Raymond F. | Medication order processing and dispensing system |
| US20050070607A1 (en)* | 2003-08-19 | 2005-03-31 | James Andrus | N-acetylcysteine compositions and methods for the treatment and prevention of cysteine/glutathione deficiency in diseases and conditions |
| US20050060188A1 (en)* | 2003-09-03 | 2005-03-17 | Electronic Data Systems Corporation | System, method, and computer program product for health care patient and service management |
| US20050053650A1 (en)* | 2003-09-08 | 2005-03-10 | Anne-Marie Chalmers | Medication delivery device |
| US20070068959A1 (en)* | 2003-11-26 | 2007-03-29 | D Silva Joe | Preparing for individualized dosage forms of medicaments |
| US7169432B2 (en)* | 2004-03-04 | 2007-01-30 | Microsoy Corporation | Toasted soybean flakes and method of making same |
| US8135595B2 (en)* | 2004-05-14 | 2012-03-13 | H. Lee Moffitt Cancer Center And Research Institute, Inc. | Computer systems and methods for providing health care |
| US20060015016A1 (en)* | 2004-06-22 | 2006-01-19 | Thornton William E | Caloric balance weight control system and methods of making and using same |
| US20060047538A1 (en)* | 2004-08-25 | 2006-03-02 | Joseph Condurso | System and method for dynamically adjusting patient therapy |
| US20060064250A1 (en)* | 2004-09-17 | 2006-03-23 | Bionutritional, Llc | Methods and systems for providing a nutraceutical program specific to an individual animal |
| US20060069757A1 (en)* | 2004-09-30 | 2006-03-30 | Peters Joseph S | Automated PCN downloads |
| US20070065506A1 (en)* | 2005-03-11 | 2007-03-22 | Kelly Robert J | Keratin and soluble derivatives thereof for a nutraceutical and to reduce oxidative stress and to reduce inflammation and to promote skin health |
| US20070000838A1 (en)* | 2005-04-14 | 2007-01-04 | California Institute Of Technology | Integrated chromatography devices and systems for monitoring analytes in real time and methods for manufacturing the same |
| US20070011919A1 (en)* | 2005-06-27 | 2007-01-18 | Case Charles W Jr | Systems for activating and/or authenticating electronic devices for operation with footwear and other uses |
| US20070003447A1 (en)* | 2005-06-29 | 2007-01-04 | Gleason K R | Fluid dispensing system |
| US20070067186A1 (en)* | 2005-09-22 | 2007-03-22 | Ira Brenner | Method and system for electronically prescribing medications |
| US20070192134A1 (en)* | 2005-12-15 | 2007-08-16 | Benjamin Littenberg | Clinical decision support system |
Non-Patent Citations (1)
| Title |
|---|
| Lagally et al. (Anal. Chem., June 2004, Vol. 76, p.3162-3170)* |
Cited By (2)
| Publication number | Priority date | Publication date | Assignee | Title |
|---|---|---|---|---|
| US20160092657A1 (en)* | 2014-09-29 | 2016-03-31 | Athenahealth, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for geography-based antimicrobial resistance tracking |
| US10347382B2 (en)* | 2014-09-29 | 2019-07-09 | Athenahealth, Inc. | Methods and apparatus for geography-based antimicrobial resistance tracking |
Also Published As
| Publication number | Publication date |
|---|---|
| WO2008036306A3 (en) | 2008-11-06 |
| WO2008036300A3 (en) | 2008-12-11 |
| US8068991B2 (en) | 2011-11-29 |
| WO2008036317A3 (en) | 2008-11-27 |
| WO2008036306A2 (en) | 2008-03-27 |
| US20080103746A1 (en) | 2008-05-01 |
| WO2008036317A2 (en) | 2008-03-27 |
| US20080183396A1 (en) | 2008-07-31 |
| WO2008036300A2 (en) | 2008-03-27 |
Similar Documents
| Publication | Publication Date | Title |
|---|---|---|
| US8068991B2 (en) | Systems and methods for transmitting pathogen related information and responding | |
| Hsiao et al. | Recent advances in novel lateral flow technologies for detection of COVID-19 | |
| US20080193919A1 (en) | Systems and methods for receiving pathogen related information and responding | |
| Chen et al. | Novel surface-enhanced Raman spectroscopy techniques for DNA, protein and drug detection | |
| Srivastav et al. | Rapid and sensitive SERS-based lateral flow test for SARS-CoV2-specific IgM/IgG antibodies | |
| Giouroudi et al. | Recent advances in magnetic microfluidic biosensors | |
| Buchegger et al. | Miniaturized protein microarray with internal calibration as point-of-care device for diagnosis of neonatal sepsis | |
| Kim et al. | Integrated magnetic bead–quantum dot immunoassay for malaria detection | |
| Martiskainen et al. | Double-antigen lateral flow immunoassay for the detection of anti-HIV-1 and-2 antibodies using upconverting nanoparticle reporters | |
| Ahmad Najib et al. | Quantum dot-based lateral flow immunoassay as point-of-care testing for infectious diseases: A narrative review of its principle and performance | |
| Zhang et al. | Microarray technology for major chemical contaminants analysis in food: Current status and prospects | |
| Guzman et al. | A two-dimensional affinity capture and separation mini-platform for the isolation, enrichment, and quantification of biomarkers and its potential use for liquid biopsy | |
| Nanduri et al. | Antibody immobilization on waveguides using a flow–through system shows improved Listeria monocytogenes detection in an automated fiber optic biosensor: RAPTOR™ | |
| Heidari-Bafroui et al. | Development of a new lab-on-paper microfluidics platform using Bi-material cantilever actuators for ELISA on paper | |
| Ren et al. | based test for rapid on-site screening of SARS-CoV-2 in clinical samples | |
| Jeon et al. | Label-free electrochemical microfluidic chip for the antimicrobial susceptibility testing | |
| Krausz et al. | A variable height microfluidic device for multiplexed immunoassay analysis of traumatic brain injury biomarkers | |
| González-González et al. | Automated ELISA on-chip for the detection of anti-SARS-CoV-2 antibodies | |
| Sotnikov et al. | Theoretical and experimental comparison of different formats of immunochromatographic serodiagnostics | |
| Pohanka | Immunosensors for assay of toxic biological warfare agents | |
| Khashayar et al. | A multiplexed microfluidic platform for bone marker measurement: A proof-of-concept | |
| Byzova et al. | Development of a lateral flow highway: Ultra-rapid multitracking immunosensor for cardiac markers | |
| Berlina et al. | Development of immunochromatographic assay for determination of tetracycline in human serum | |
| Li et al. | The development of Aptamer-based gold nanoparticle lateral Flow Test strips for the detection of SARS-CoV-2 S proteins on the Surface of Cold-Chain Food Packaging | |
| Gumanova et al. | Detection of anti-SARS-CoV-2-S1 RBD-specific antibodies prior to and during the pandemic in 2011–2021 and COVID-19 observational study in 2019–2021 |
Legal Events
| Date | Code | Title | Description |
|---|---|---|---|
| AS | Assignment | Owner name:SEARETE LLC, WASHINGTON Free format text:ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:JUNG, EDWARD K.Y.;LEUTHARDT, ERIC C.;LEVIEN, ROYCE A.;AND OTHERS;REEL/FRAME:020381/0513;SIGNING DATES FROM 20071008 TO 20071210 Owner name:SEARETE LLC, WASHINGTON Free format text:ASSIGNMENT OF ASSIGNORS INTEREST;ASSIGNORS:JUNG, EDWARD K.Y.;LEUTHARDT, ERIC C.;LEVIEN, ROYCE A.;AND OTHERS;SIGNING DATES FROM 20071008 TO 20071210;REEL/FRAME:020381/0513 | |
| STCB | Information on status: application discontinuation | Free format text:ABANDONED -- FAILURE TO RESPOND TO AN OFFICE ACTION |